Nova Biomedical - Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, K Reference Manual)

Stat Profile Ultra
nova
ANALYZE
CURSOR
Stat Profile Ultra

F, G, H, I, J, K Reference Manual
Stat Profile Ultra
ANALYZE
nova
CURSOR
F, G, H, I, J, K Reference Manual
Stat Profile Ultra
Preface
Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, K) Reference Manual
Nova Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, K) Reference Manual

Part Number and Ordering Information
The Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, K) Reference Manual (PN 16794) can be ordered from
Nova Biomedical Order Services. Write or call:
Nova Biomedical
200 Prospect Street
Waltham, MA 02254-9141
U.S.A.
Telephone:
1-800-458-5813
FAX:
(617) 893-6998 (in the U.S.A.) or

(617) 899-0417 (outside the U.S.A.)
Technical Assistance
For technical assistance, call Nova Biomedical Technical Services at:
Telephone:
1-800-545-NOVA or
(617) 894-0800
FAX:
(617) 894-0585
Trademarks and Patents

Stat Profile is a registered trademark of Nova Biomedical.
The Stat Profile Ultra F, G, H, I, J, and K Analyzers are covered by one or more of the following
patents: U.S. Pat. No. 4,686,479, U.S. Pat. No. 4,759,828, U.S. Pat. No. 5,352,348.
Copyright
Printed in the U.S.A. Copyright 1997, Nova Biomedical, Waltham, MA 02254.
Preface
Note: U.S. Legislative Requirements Nova Analyzers

The new legislative requirements for clinical laboratories have established a new regulatory
environment and have changed the responsibility that Nova Biomedical has regarding the
proper operation and control of Nova analyzers. With the advent of the requirements that the
end user specifically follows all directions for use from the manufacturer, Nova becomes a
partner with the user and becomes responsible for providing instructions that will virtually
guarantee that the analyzer is in control. This requires Nova to provide instructions on
maintenance and control which are virtually foolproof in regards to assuring that an analyzer
is in control.
In addition to asking that all operators perform the maintenance and calibration procedures
described in this manual, we also recommend that only Nova reagents, calibrators, cleaning
agents, and controls be run through the analyzers. These are the only materials that we have fully
characterized and tested. We have neither tested the performance nor determined the long term
effects of products provided by others for use on our instruments. Confirming that an analyzer
is in control by using reagents and controls not certified by Nova Biomedical can not be
guaranteed by Nova, and Nova will not be responsible for the consequences. Users who elect
to use reagents, standards and/or controls from other producers should confirm by the
appropriate testing protocols from those other manufacturers that Novas instrumentation is in
control and in compliance with all legislative requirements. This testing verification should
also include a means of troubleshooting when the instrument is not in control, since Nova
Biomedical cannot, in the present environment, provide that service. Since Nova Biomedical
does not know the formulations of the reagents and controls used by other manufacturers,
including the levels of surfactants, preservatives, viscosity adjusters, and other additives that
may be used, there is no way for Nova to be certain that the results obtained on controls or
patient samples will be correct when these products are used. There is also no way to tell
whether there will be long term or short term adverse effects on sensor performance, sensor
life, tubing or flow cell degradation, or on data quality/accuracy or reliability.
Nova Biomedical manufactures totally integrated systems to assure proper analyzer performance. We cannot characterize all products that might be used on Nova analyzers, nor can we
control changes that other manufacturers might choose to make to their products. Therefore,
use of these products with a Nova analyzer must be the responsibility of the individual end user
and of that manufacturer rather than Nova.
Under these new legislative requirements, user modification of an in vitro diagnostic device,
is also regulated. Modification of the product includes use of untested products or products
which have not been tested to determine substantial equivalency and safety and effectiveness
in use with Nova analyzers.
Nova Biomedicals Reference Manuals include the specific information needed for the proper
maintenance, qualification, and operation of Nova Biomedical Analyzers. If the user follows
the directions in those manuals, they should have very few problems. In the case where they
need assistance from Nova Biomedical in troubleshooting their systems, we will stand ready
to assist them in any and all ways necessary.
ii
NCCLS Cross-Reference
Stat Profile Ultra Reference Manual
Cross-Reference Table for NCCLS Guideline
NCCLS Guideline
Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, and K)

Reference Manual
1.
Principle of Test
Appendix B
2.
Specimen required
Chapter 1, Sections 1.3, 1.3.1-1.3.5
3.
Reagents, Standards, and Controls
Appendix C
4.
Calibration procedures and schedule
Chapter 3, Section 3.15
5.
Step-by-Step Directions
Analysis
Chapter 3
Maintenance
Chapter 4
Troubleshooting
Chapter 5
6.
Calculations
Appendix B, Sections B.4, B.4.1-B.4.2
7.
Frequency, Control Tolerance
Appendix C, Sections C.4, C.5, C.6
8.
Expected values
Appendix D
9.
Linearity limits
Appendix A
10.
Limitations (interferences)
Chapter 1, Section 1.3.6
11.
References
Appendix D
12.
Effective Date
Table of Contents
13.
Distribution
Stat Profile Ultra Customers
14.
Author
Alan J. Mannarino
NOTE: This manual complies with the NCCLS guidelines Vol. 4, Section 2.1. As a user, you
can copy and compile these above sections into one compact NCCLS Stat Profile Ultra (F,
G, H, I, J, and K) Manual or use the cross-reference to find the appropriate section in the
Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, and K) Reference Manual.
Table of Contents
Contents
1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Installation ............................................................................................................ 1-1

1.1.1 Requirements ............................................................................................ 1-1
Intended Use, Tests Performed, and Clinical Utility ............................................ 1-2
The Sample ........................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3.1 Acceptable Samples .................................................................................. 1-5
1.3.2 Handling Requirements ............................................................................ 1-5
1.3.3 Dilution of Whole Blood Samples for Measurement of Elevated Glucose1-6
1.3.4 Dilution of Serum/Plasma Samples for Measurement of Elevated Lactate1-6
1.3.5 Dilution of Serum/Plasma Samples for Measurement of Elevated BUN . 1-7
1.3.6 Acceptable Anticoagulants ....................................................................... 1-7
1.3.7 Interfering Substances .............................................................................. 1-8
About This Reference Manual .............................................................................. 1-8
Setup and Initial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Installing New Software ....................................................................................... 2-1

Adapting the Program to Your Clinical Requirements with the Set Up Menu ..... 2-1
2.2.1 Operation Configuration ........................................................................... 2-3
2.2.1.1 Analysis Configuration ................................................................. 2-3
2.2.1.2 Calibration Configuration ............................................................. 2-5
2.2.1.3 Barometric Pressure ...................................................................... 2-6
2.2.1.4 Set Date and Time......................................................................... 2-7
2.2.1.5 Set Analyzer Identification ........................................................... 2-8
2.2.1.6 Sample Number Counter .............................................................. 2-8
2.2.2 Results Configuration ............................................................................... 2-9
2.2.2.1 Set Electrolyte Resolution .......................................................... 2-10
2.2.2.2 Set Units Of Measurement ......................................................... 2-10
2.2.2.3 Electrode Offsets ........................................................................ 2-11
2.2.2.4 Results, Measured Results, and Calculated Results Reporting
Screens .................................................................................................... 2-13
2.2.2.5 Reference and Panic Ranges ....................................................... 2-18
2.3.3 Quality Control Setup ............................................................................. 2-19
2.2.4 Communications Setup ........................................................................... 2-24
2.2.4.1 Transmission Port Configuration ................................................ 2-24
2.2.5 Default Parameter ................................................................................... 2-25
2.2.6 Password Options ................................................................................... 2-26
Patient Recall Menu............................................................................................ 2-29
Resuming Normal Operation After Power Loss ................................................. 2-31
PN 16794 Rev. B 6/97
TOC-1

3
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
TOC-2
CRT Display ......................................................................................................... 3-2

Stat Profile Keypad and Functions ....................................................................... 3-2
Printer ................................................................................................................... 3-5
Septum Assembly ................................................................................................. 3-5
Analytical Compartment....................................................................................... 3-5
3.5.1 Reagent Harness ....................................................................................... 3-7
3.5.2 Reagent Preheater ..................................................................................... 3-7
3.5.3 Gas Humidifier Wells ............................................................................... 3-7
3.5.4 Sampler Assembly .................................................................................... 3-7
3.5.5 Electrode Rack Assembly ......................................................................... 3-7
3.5.6 Sample Preheater ...................................................................................... 3-7
3.5.7 Flow Cell .................................................................................................. 3-8
3.5.8 Electrodes ................................................................................................. 3-8
3.5.9 Reference Electrode .................................................................................. 3-9
3.5.10 W/R Harness ............................................................................................. 3-9
3.5.11 Barometric Pressure Module .................................................................... 3-9
3.5.12 Fiber Optic Module .................................................................................. 3-9
3.5.13 Flow Cell Light ......................................................................................... 3-9
Reagent Flow Controllers ................................................................................... 3-10
3.6.1 Pinch Valve ............................................................................................. 3-10
3.6.2 Pump ....................................................................................................... 3-11
3.6.3 Pump Bypass Valve ................................................................................ 3-11
Reagent Pack ...................................................................................................... 3-11
Fluidic Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-12
Operation Overview ............................................................................................ 3-13
Program Overview .............................................................................................. 3-14
Ready for Analysis Screen .................................................................................. 3-15
3.11.1 When the Not Ready Screen is Displayed .............................................. 3-16
Status .................................................................................................................. 3-18
3.12.1 Sensor Status........................................................................................... 3-18
3.12.2 Air Detector Status ................................................................................. 3-19
3.12.3 Sequence Errors ...................................................................................... 3-20
3.12.4 System Errors ......................................................................................... 3-21
3.12.5 System Status .......................................................................................... 3-22
Reagent Management System Overview ............................................................ 3-23
Main Menu ......................................................................................................... 3-24
Calibrating the Analyzer ..................................................................................... 3-24
3.15.1 Two-Point Calibration (Automatic and Manual) .................................... 3-25
3.15.1.1 Automatic Calibration (Auto-Cal) ............................................ 3-25
3.15.1.2 Manual Calibration ................................................................... 3-25
PN 16794 Rev. B 6/97
Table of Contents
3.16
3.17
Quality Control Menu ......................................................................................... 3-26

3.16.1 Running QC Samples ............................................................................. 3-28
3.16.2 Proficiency Samples ............................................................................... 3-29
3.16.3 Override Mandatory QC Analysis .......................................................... 3-29
3.16.4 QC Key Pressed in Error ........................................................................ 3-29
Analysis .............................................................................................................. 3-30
3.17.1 Analyzing Samples ................................................................................. 3-30
3.17.2 Three Ways of Running Samples, Based On Sample & Container Type 3-31
3.17.2.1 Running Syringe, Vacuum Tube, or Sample Cup Samples....... 3-31
3.17.2.2 Running Capillary Samples ...................................................... 3-39
3.17.2.3 Running Expired Gas Samples (PCO2 and PO2) ..................... 3-40
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Performing Maintenance Functions with the Maintenance Menu........................ 4-1

4.1.1 Alternate Analysis (Expired Gas) ............................................................. 4-2
4.1.2 Flow Cell Light ......................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Calibration Options................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.3.1 Manual or Full Calibration ........................................................... 4-4
4.1.3.2 Terminating Calibrations .............................................................. 4-4
4.1.3.3 Cal I .............................................................................................. 4-5
4.1.3.4 Oxygen Saturation Calibration ..................................................... 4-5
4.1.4 Fluid/Gas Prime Options .......................................................................... 4-6
4.1.5 Flow Path Cleaning ................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.5.1 Cleaning with Preheater Cleaning Agent...................................... 4-7
4.1.5.2 Routine Cleaning with Deproteinizing Solution .......................... 4-8
4.1.6 Calibration Gases ...................................................................................... 4-9
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................................................................... 4-10
Maintenance Procedures ..................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.1 Component Conditioning ....................................................................... 4-10
4.3.1.1 Flow Cell Conditioning .............................................................. 4-11
4.3.1.2 Sodium Conditioning.................................................................. 4-11
4.3.2 Septum Assembly Inlet Port Cleaning .................................................... 4-12
4.3.3 Gas Humidifier Well Filling ................................................................... 4-13
Component Replacement.................................................................................... 4-14
4.4.1 Sodium, Potassium, Chloride, and Calcium Electrode Replacement ..... 4-14
4.4.2 pH Electrode Replacement ..................................................................... 4-17
4.4.3 Glucose Electrode Membraning, Polishing, and Replacement .............. 4-19
4.4.4 Lactate Electrode Membraning, Polishing, and Replacement ................ 4-21
4.4.5 BUN Electrode Membraning and Replacement ..................................... 4-23
4.4.6 PCO2 Electrode Conditioning, Membraning, and Replacement ............ 4-24
4.4.7 PO2 Electrode Membraning, Polishing, and Replacement..................... 4-29
4.4.8 SO2 Maintenance .................................................................................... 4-33
PN 16794 Rev. B 6/97
TOC-3

4.4.9 Reference Electrode Replacement .......................................................... 4-33
4.4.10 Replace Pump Tubing ............................................................................. 4-35
4.4.10.1 Replacing the Tailpiece............................................................. 4-42
4.4.11 W/R-Harness Replacement..................................................................... 4-45
4.4.12 Reagent/Septum Harness Maintenance and Replacement...................... 4-47
4.4.13 Reagent Pack and Septum Assembly Replacement ................................ 4-50
4.4.14 Sample Probe/S-line Replacement ......................................................... 4-53
4.4.15 Flow Cell Replacement........................................................................... 4-56
4.4.16 Preheater Replacement ........................................................................... 4-59
4.4.17 Printer Paper Replacement ..................................................................... 4-60
4.4.18 Gas Cylinders Replacement.................................................................... 4-63
4.4.18.1 Gas Regulator Adjustment ........................................................ 4-63
4.4.18.2 Gas Filter Replacement ............................................................ 4-64
4.4.18.3 Gas Hose Connection ............................................................... 4-64
4.4.19 Fuse Replacement ................................................................................... 4-65
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1
5.2
5.3
TOC-4
Error Codes and How to Display Them ............................................................... 5-1

Troubleshooting .................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.1 Stat Profile Ultra 2-Point Calibration Sequence ....................................... 5-3
5.2.2 The Stat Profile Ultra Flow Test ............................................................. 5-77
5.2.2.1 Water Test ................................................................................... 5-77
5.2.2.2 Pump Aspiration Test .................................................................. 5-78
5.2.2.3 Flow Path and Component Flushing........................................... 5-79
5.2.2.4 Gas Pressure Test ........................................................................ 5-85
5.2.3 Troubleshooting Results ......................................................................... 5-87
5.2.3.1 Problems with Aqueous Controls ............................................... 5-87
5.2.3.2 Altitude and Barometric Pressure Effects ................................... 5-88
5.2.3.3 Calibration Gas Values ............................................................... 5-88
5.2.3.4 Multiple Parameter Control Failures .......................................... 5-88
5.2.3.5 Single Parameter Control Failures .............................................. 5-89
5.2.4 Problems with Patient Specimens........................................................... 5-90
5.2.5 Sample Handling .................................................................................... 5-91
5.2.6 Check Septum Assembly Message ......................................................... 5-92
5.2.7 Clean Sample Preheater Message ........................................................... 5-92
Performing Troubleshooting and Service Functions with the Service Menu ..... 5-93
5.3.1 System Test ............................................................................................. 5-94
5.3.1.1 System Test Functions ................................................................ 5-94
5.3.1.2 Shorting Jumper Test .................................................................. 5-95
5.3.1.3 Air Detector Test ......................................................................... 5-96
5.3.1.4 Pump Test ................................................................................... 5-97
5.3.1.5 Sample Probe Position Test ........................................................ 5-97
5.3.1.6 Valve Test .................................................................................. 5-100
PN 16794 Rev. B 6/97
Table of Contents
5.4
5.3.1.7 Gas Test .................................................................................... 5-101

5.3.1.8 Pump Bypass Valve Test ........................................................... 5-101
5.3.1.9 Reference Solution Flow Check ............................................... 5-102
5.3.2 Analog Input Data ................................................................................ 5-103
5.3.3 Analysis/Calibration Signal Data ......................................................... 5-104
5.3.3.1 Subsystem Test Blood Gases + pH ........................................... 5-104
5.3.3.2 Subsystem Test Electrolytes ..................................................... 5-105
5.3.3.3 Subsystem Test Glucose, Lactate, and BUN ............................ 5-106
5.3.3.4 Subsystem Test Air Detectors and Hct ..................................... 5-107
5.3.3.5 Oxygen Saturation .................................................................... 5-109
5.3.4 Subsystem Temperature Control ........................................................... 5-110
5.3.5 Fluid/Gas Prime .................................................................................... 5-111
5.3.6 I/O Devices ........................................................................................... 5-111
5.3.6.1 Bar Code Wand Port Test .......................................................... 5-112
5.3.6.2 Printer Subsystem ..................................................................... 5-113
5.3.6.3 External Parallel Port ................................................................ 5-114
5.3.6.4 Subsystem Test Communications ............................................. 5-115
5.3.6.5 Disk Drive Utilities ................................................................... 5-118
Analyzer Reset .................................................................................................. 5-120
6.0 Stat Profile Ultra Communications Interface . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 6-1

Low-Level Protocol .............................................................................................. 6-1
6.2.1 Communication States .............................................................................. 6-2
6.2.1.1 Idle State ....................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1.2 Link Establishment State .............................................................. 6-2
6.2.1.3 Transfer State ................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.1.4 Link Termination State ................................................................. 6-3
High-Level Protocol ............................................................................................. 6-3
6.3.1 Header Record .......................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Patient Information Record ...................................................................... 6-5
6.3.3 Test Order Record ..................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.4 Result Record ........................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.5 Comment Record for Error ..................................................................... 6-12
6.3.6 Message Terminator Record ................................................................... 6-12
Parameter Names ................................................................................................ 6-13
Examples ............................................................................................................ 6-21
PN 16794 Rev. B 6/97
TOC-5

A
Instrument Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.1
Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.1
B.2
B.3
B.4
TOC-6
Reagents and Solutions ......................................................................................... C-1

Reagent Pack ........................................................................................................ C-2
Calibrating Gases .................................................................................................. C-2
Verifying the Analyzer's Performance .................................................................. C-3
C.4.1 Nova Stat Profile Ultra Multi Controls: Quality Control ......................... C-4
C.4.2 Nova Stat Profile Ultra Controls: Quality Control ................................... C-5
Reference Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shutdown/Reinstallation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . .
G.1
G.2
Origin of the Potential Measurement.................................................................... B-1

Electrode Calibration ............................................................................................ B-5
B.2.1 Two-Point Calibration .............................................................................. B-5
B.2.2 One-Point Calibration ............................................................................... B-5
Principles of Measurement ................................................................................... B-5
B.3.1 Sodium, Potassium, Chloride, and Ionized Calcium ................................ B-5
B.3.2 pH Electrode ............................................................................................. B-6
B.3.3 Partial Pressure of Carbon Dioxide (PCO2) ............................................. B-7
B.3.4 Partial Pressure of Oxygen (PO2) ............................................................. B-8
B.3.5 Hematocrit ................................................................................................ B-8
B.3.6 Glucose ..................................................................................................... B-9
B.3.7 Lactate ...................................................................................................... B-9
8.3.8 BUN Concentration ................................................................................ B-10
B.3.9 SO2 % Concentration .............................................................................. B-10
Calculated Values ................................................................................................ B-10
B.4.1 Temperature Correction for Measured Values ........................................ B-11
B.4.2 Calculated Parameters ............................................................................ B-11
Reagents and Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
D
E
F
G
Instrument Specifications .................................................................................... A-1
D-1
E-1
F-1
G-1
Shutdown Procedure ............................................................................................ G-1

Reinstallation Procedure ...................................................................................... G-2
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
PN 16794 Rev. B 6/97
1 Introduction
Introduction
This manual provides all necessary instructions for the routine operation and maintenance of
the Stat Profile Ultra Analyzer. Please read this manual carefully. It has been prepared to help
you attain optimum performance from your Stat Profile Ultra Analyzer.
WARNING: Blood samples and blood products are potential sources of hepatitis and
other infectious agents. Handle all blood products and flowpath components (wasteline, septum assembly, probe, flow cell, etc.) with care. Gloves and protective
clothing are recommended.
This section introduces the Stat Profile Ultra Analyzer and covers requirements, tests
performed, procedural limitations, clinical utility, and sample handling.
1.1
Installation
This section covers the installation requirements and assembly procedures for the Stat Profile
Ultra Analyzer.
NOTE: Under the Ultra Warranty, a Nova service representative will install
this equipment for you.
1.1.1 Requirements
Working Area Requirements:
The analyzer should be above any instrument, apparatus, or the like that could damage it by
fluid from a spill. Keep the working area around the system free of dirt, corrosive fumes,
vibration, and excessive temperature changes. Ambient operating temperature is 16 C to
30 C (61F to 86 F).
Electrical Requirements:
A grounded, 3-wire receptacle within 5 feet of the system is required for operation. The U.S.
models require a 120 Volt AC line at 50/60 Hz frequency. The analyzer can be operated at
90 - 264 Volt AC 50/60 Hz.
Fuse requirements:
4 Amp Time Delay (SB 4A or T4A) at 100 - 120 Volt AC line.

2 Amp Time Delay (T2A) at 200 - 240 Volt AC line.
1-1
1. Intro.
1. Intro.

Gas Calibrating Requirements:
The instrument calibration gas supply compositions are given in Appendix A. For use of gas from
suppliers other than Nova refer to Appendix A for correct concentrations and tolerances. Each
tank requires a gas regulator gauge pressure of 5 psig 1. Regulators for gas cylinders are
included with the calibration gas kit.
1.2
Intended Use, Tests Performed, and Clinical Utility

Intended Use
The Stat Profile Ultra Analyzer is intended for in vitro diagnostic use by health care
professionals and for Point-of-Care usage in the quantitative determination of sodium,
potassium, ionized calcium, glucose, pH, PCO2, PO2, oxygen saturation, lactate, BUN, and
hematocrit in serum, plasma, and whole blood.
Tests Performed
Depending on which software package is purchased, this manual covers the Stat Profile Ultra
F, G, H, I, J, and K Analyzers only.
Stat Profile Ultra F
pH PCO2 PO2 SO2%
Hct
Na
Cl
BUN
Stat Profile Ultra G
pH PCO2 PO2 SO2%
Hct
Na
Cl
Glu
BUN
Stat Profile Ultra H
pH PCO2 PO2 SO2%
Hct
Na
Cl
Glu
Lact BUN
Stat Profile Ultra I
pH PCO2 PO2 SO2%
Hct
Na
iCa
Stat Profile Ultra J
pH PCO2 PO2 SO2%
Hct
Na
iCa
Glu
BUN
Stat Profile Ultra K
pH PCO2 PO2 SO2%
Hct
Na
iCa
Glu
Lact BUN
From the directly measured results, the calculated results are

Base Excess of the Blood (BE-B)
Base Excess of Extracellular Fluid (BE-ECF)
Bicarbonate level (HCO3-)
Standard Bicarbonate Concentration (SBC)
Total Carbon Dioxide (TCO2)
Oxygen Content (O2Ct)
Hemoglobin (Hb)
Osmolality (Osm) - only analyzers that measure glucose
Arterial Alveolar Oxygen Tension Ratio (a/A)
1-2
BUN
1 Introduction
1. Intro.
P50
Normalized Calcium (nCa) - only analyzers that measure ionized calcium
Anion Gap (An. Gap)
Alveolar Oxygen (A)
Arterial Alveolar Oxygen Tension Gradient (AaDO2)
Acceptable samples are
Whole blood, plasma, or serum collected anaerobically from an arterial, venous, or

capillary site
Whole blood, plasma, or serum collected aerobically (Na+, K+, Cl-, iCa, Glu, Lac,and
BUN)
Expired gas
When a flashing result is displayed on the results screen and printed with a question mark, this
is an indication that a minor error has occurred during the analysis. Refer to the displayed error
code to interpret whether to accept or reject the result.
Clinical Utility1
The following list includes the clinical utility information for each of the analytes measured
on the Stat Profile Ultra Analyzer.
Blood Gases:
(PCO2, PO2,
and pH)
Whole blood measurement of blood gases is used in the diagnosis

and treatment of life-threatening acid-base disturbances in critically ill
patients with numerous metabolic and pulmonary diseases.
O2 Saturation
Used to assess the oxygenation of hemoglobin and the adequacy of tissue

oxygenation in the evaluation of pulmonary function. Also used in the
diagnosis and treatment of cyanosis.
Lactate
Measurement of lactic acid (lactate) in whole blood, serum, and plasma is

used to evaluate the acid-base status of patients suspected of having lactic
acidosis.
Sodium
Measurements are used in the diagnosis and treatment of aldosteronism,

diabetes insipidus, adrenal hypertension, Addisons disease, dehydration, or
diseases involving electrolyte imbalance.
Potassium
Measurement of potassium is used to monitor electrolyte balance in the

diagnosis and treatment of disease conditions characterized by low or high
potassium levels.
1-3
1. Intro.
1.3
Chloride
Measurement of chloride is used in the diagnosis and treatment of electrolyte

and metabolic disorders such as cystic fibrosis and diabetic acidosis.
Ionized
Calcium
Used in the diagnosis and treatment of hypertension, renal disease and

vitamin D related disorders. Also useful in the diagnosis and treatment of
patients with increased total protein and/or albumin levels as in dehydration.
Hematocrit
Whole blood measurement of hematocrit is used to distinguish normal from

abnormal states of red blood cells, such as anemia and erythrocytosis.
Glucose
Measurement of glucose is used in the diagnosis and treatment of carbohydrate metabolism disturbances including diabetes mellitus, neonatal
hypoglycemia, and idiopathic hypoglycemia, and of pancreatic islet cell
carcinoma.
Urea Nitrogen
Measurement of urea nitrogen is used in the diagnosis and treatment of

certain renal and metabolic diseases.
Ref.
1.Tietz, N.W. ed. 1986. Textbook of Clinical Chemistry. W. B. Saunders Co.
The Sample
This section covers sample requirements and reference values for the Stat Profile Ultra
Analyzer.
1-4
1 Introduction
1. Intro.
1.3.1 Acceptable Samples

The following chart lists the sample types required for the different parameters measured.
Parameters
pH*
PCO2*
PO2*
Sodium
Potassium
Chloride
iCa
Glucose
Lactate
BUN
Hematocrit
SO2*
Samples
Whole blood
Whole blood, expired gas
Whole blood, expired gas
Whole blood, plasma, or serum
Whole blood
Whole blood
*Anaerobic samples
Capillary Samples
Capillary sampling requires a capillary tube with a minimum delivery volume of 225 L.
Adapt the capillary tubes to the instrument with Nova Capillary Adapters (PN 06529) as
described in Capillary Sample Analysis, Section 3.17.2.2.
1.3.2 Handling Requirements

Correct sample handling is critical to ensure that the blood gas values obtained accurately
reflect the in vivo state. Ensure that all samples have been obtained and stored following
consistent, clinically accepted protocols. It is particularly important to ensure that samples are
well mixed before introduction into the analyzer. Nova Biomedical recommends that you
analyze the sample within 15 minutes for blood gases and within 30 minutes for electrolytes,
glucose, and lactate. Storing samples on ice is not recommended. Using iced samples may
elevate the PO2 and potassium results.1
1.
National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Considerations in the Simultaneous Measurement of Blood Gases, Electrolytes, and Related Analytes in Whole Blood; Proposed Guideline.
NCCLS Document C32-P. Vol. 13, No. 17.
1-5
1. Intro.

1.3.3 Dilution of Whole Blood Samples for Measurement of Elevated Glucose
The operating range of Stat Profile Ultra for glucose is 15 to 500 mg/dL. Glucose values
between 500 to 700 are displayed with a question mark. Values greater than 700 are not
displayed. An estimated glucose value will be displayed in reverse video on the Glucose
Subsystem Millivolt screen (MENU 5,3, ENTER,ENTER). USE EXTREME CAUTION. View this
value as a guideline for dilution purposes ONLY. For samples exhibiting values at or above 500 mg/
dL, the following is a method for confirming the glucose concentration.
NOTE: All other parameters should be obtained from the undiluted, unmodified blood sample.
1. Mix the sample in the syringe. Pipet 0.5 mL into a conical sample cup.
2. Pipet 1.0 mL of isotonic saline into this sample cup. Mix well.
3. Aspirate this diluted sample into the Ultra to measure the glucose concentration.
Multiply the observed concentration by 3.0 to establish the initial concentration.
1.3.4 Dilution of Serum/Plasma Samples for Measurement of Elevated Lactate

The operating range of the Stat Profile Ultra for lactate is 0.3 to 20 mmol/L. Above this level,
results will not be displayed and sample dilution is required. An estimated lactate value will
be displayed in reverse video on the Lactate Subsystem Millivolt screen (MENU, 5,3,
ENTER,ENTER). USE EXTREME CAUTION. View this value as a guideline for dilution purposes ONLY.
For samples exhibiting values at or above 20 mmol/L, use the following method to confirm the
lactate concentration.
1. Centrifuge the whole blood. Pipet 0.5 mL of serum/plasma into a conical sample cup.
3. Aspirate this diluted sample into the Stat Profile to measure the lactate concentration.
1-6
Update to PN 16794 Rev. B 3/2001
1 Introduction
1. Intro.
1.3.5 Dilution of Serum/Plasma Samples for Measurement of Elevated BUN

The operating range of the Stat Profile Ultra M Analyzer for BUN is 3 to 100 mg/dL. Above
this level, results will not be displayed and sample dilution is required. An estimated BUN
value will be displayed in reverse video on the BUN Subsystem Millivolt screen (MENU, 5,
3, ENTER, ENTER). USE EXTREME CAUTION. View this value as a guideline for dilution purposes
ONLY. For samples exhibiting values at or above 100 mg/dL, use the following method to
confirm the BUN concentration.
1. Centrifuge the whole blood. Pipet 0.5 mL of serum/plasma into a conical sample cup.
3. Aspirate this diluted sample into the Stat Profile Ultra M Analyzer to measure the
BUN concentration. Multiply the observed concentration by 2.0 to establish the
initial concentration.
1.3.6 Acceptable Anticoagulants

Sodium and lithium heparin are the recommended anticoagulants for use with the Ultra
analyzers. EDTA, citrate, oxalate, or sodium fluoride are not recommended for use.
Depending on the amount of heparin used in the collection syringe and whether it is filled to
capacity with blood, heparin concentrations of 20 I.U. per mL to over 100 I.U. per mL may
result. Excess sodium heparin may elevate sodium results. Liquid heparin when present in
excess may cause errors by dilution in pH, PCO2, PO2, iCa, and electrolyte/glucose/lactate/
BUN determinations3.
Our experience suggests that lyophilized lithium heparin giving a final concentration in blood
of not more than 20 I.U. per mL is acceptable in the critical care laboratory. Stat Profile Ultra
Analyzer users should take careful note of these considerations when establishing reference
intervals and interpreting results.
1-7
1. Intro.

1.3.7 Interfering Substances
Consider the following list of interfering substances when interpreting abnormally high
chloride or glucose results.
Acetaminophen (15 mg/dL) has been shown to increase the glucose concentration by
approximately 4 mg/dL.
Ascorbic Acid (50 mg/dL) and Uric Acid (40 mg/dL) have no effect on the glucose concentration.
The following substances at the concentrations indicated have been shown to produce an
approximate 2% increase in the chloride concentration:
B-hydroxybutyrate (25 mmol/L)

acetoacetate (25 mmol/L)
formate (10 mmol/L)
lactate (25 mmol/L)
salicylate (50 mg/dL)
citrate (10 mmol/L)
SO2% Interferences:
High levels of COHb and MetHb will increase the reported SO2% value.
MetHb values above 15% will interfere with the SO2% value.
Bilirubin values greater than 10 mg/dL will interfere with the SO2% value.
Lipid solutions of greater than 50 mg/dL will interfere with the SO2% value.
Hemolysed samples will interfere with the SO2% value.
Hematocrit (Hct) Interference:
White Blood Count (WBC) greater than 50,000 WBC/L may increase the hematocrit value.
1.4
About This Reference Manual

This manual is for Stat Profile Ultra F, G, H, I, J, and K Analyzers. The Stat Profile Ultra F and G Analyzers
do not have all the electrodes that are available on the Ultra H, and the Stat Profile Ultra I and J Analyzers
do not have all the electrodes that are available on the Ultra K. In these places, there will be blanks.
Throughout this manual, NOTE: indicates especially important information, CAUTION: indicates
information that is critical to avoid instrument damage or incorrect results, and WARNING:
indicates danger to the operator.
Each chapter in this manual contains the most important screens. To see all of the screens in
a flow chart form, refer to Appendix E.
1-8
1. Intro.


formate (10 mmol/L)
lactate (25 mmol/L)
citrate (10 mmol/L)
SO2% Interferences:
10% Intralipid solutions will interfere with the SO2% when the blood concentrations of
Intralipid are >500 mg/dL.
1.4

1-8
2 Setup
2
Setup and Initial Operation

This section describes how to set up the analyzer to analyze different types of samples and
routine operation.
2. Setup
2.1
Installing New Software

Directions on installing new software are explained in Chapter 5, Troubleshooting (See Section
5.3.6.5 Disk Drive Utilities).
2.2
Adapting the Program to Your Clinical Requirements with the Set Up Menu
Use the Set Up Menu to adapt the analyzer to your requirements. This menu is used if the
analyzer loses power and the internal battery is dead (Section 2.5) or if the barometric pressure
module is removed. The menu is:
Default functions, which define what analysis mode, units of measurement, or

parameters the system uses (defaults to) unless you tell it otherwise
Restriction functions, which allow or disallow analysis modes, and individual,
calculated, and temperature reporting options
Specification functions, which define number of decimal places reported, offsets,
manual or automatic operation, and passwords
A password, which safeguards the setup parameters, is required to enter the Set Up Menu. Set
up the system program as follows:
1. From the Ready For Analysis screen, press MENU to access the Main Menu screen.
2. Press 4 to access the Set Up Menu screen. The Enter System Password screen appears
first. The screen displays a flashing cursor next to the point for keying in the
password.
3. Key in the password (a number) and press ENTER. The analyzer is factory-set with
0 as the default password. Upon entry of the correct password, the Set Up Menu
screen is displayed.
2-1

SET UP MENU
2. Setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
Results Configuration Menu

Operation Configuration Menu
Quality Control Setup Menu
Communications Setup Menu
Default Parameter
Password Options Menu
Press CLEAR to Exit.
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Set Up Menu Screen
1. See Sections 2.2.1 to 2.2.5 to access the appropriate Set Up screens.

2. Press CLEAR, CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Ready For Analysis screen.
2-2
2 Setup
2.2.1 Operation Configuration
1. From the Set Up Menu, press 2 to display the Operation Configuration screen.
2. Press the number before the desired option.
3. Press CLEAR to return to the Set Up Menu screen.
OPERATION CONFIGURATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
Analysis Configuration
Calibration Configuration
Barometric Pressure
Set Date And Time
Set Analyzer Identification
Sample Number Counter
Display Reagent Remaining Status
On

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Operation Configuration Screen
2.2.1.1Analysis Configuration
1. From the Operation Configuration Menu, press 1 to display the Analysis Configuration screen.
2. Press the number before the desired option to change the mode.
3. Press 5 to display the Analysis Reporting Options screen.
4. Press CLEAR to return to the Operation Configuration screen.
2-3
2. Setup
This allows you to access the menus and screens to adapt your analysis and calibration options,
set the barometric pressure, set the date/time, set the instrument identification, display reagent
remaining information.

ANALYSIS CONFIGURATION
Full Panel
2. Setup
1 Default Analysis Type

2 Analysis Throughput Mode
Single
3 Display Patient Data Screen
Auto
4 Results Storage Warning
Enabled
5 Analysis Output Options
Press CLEAR to Exit Screen.
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Analysis Configuration Screen
5. In the Analysis Output Options screen, press the number to change the mode of the
option.
6. Press CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Operation Configuration screen.
ANALYSIS OUTPUT OPTIONS
1
2
3
4
Analysis
Transmit
Transmit
Transmit
Transmit
Analysis
Analysis
Analysis
Mode
mV Data
Drift Data
Errors
5
6
7
Analysis Print Mode

Print Analysis mV Data
Print Analysis Drift Data
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Analysis Output Options Screen
2-4
Manual
Off
Off
Off
Auto
On
On
2 Setup
2.2.1.2Calibration Configuration
CALIBRATION CONFIGURATION
30 minutes
Set Cal I Frequency
Calibration Output Options
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Calibration Configuration Screen
2-5
2. Setup
Access this screen to select the frequency of Gas Cal I. A Gas Cal I is a single point calibration
for PCO2 and PO2 electrodes. A Gas Cal I cannot be aborted. The message, Gas Cal I Pending,
will be posted on the Ready For Analysis screen 5 minutes before it starts.
This screen is also used to allow or not allow the transmitting and/or printing of calibration
information.
1. From the Operation Configuration screen, press 2 to display the Calibration Configuration screen.
2. Press 1 to set the Cal I Frequency time of 30 or 45 minutes.
3. Press 2 to display the Calibration Output Options screen. Then press the number
before the desired option to change the mode.
4. Press CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Operation Configuration Menu.

2.2.1.3Barometric Pressure
2. Setup
This screen allows you to change the units for barometric pressure and update the barometric
pressure.
1. From the Operation Configuration screen, press 3 to display the Barometric Pressure screen.
2. Press 1 and/or 2 to change the mode.
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
Update Barometric Pressure
Units of Measurement
mmHg
Method of Determination
Measured
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Barometric Pressure Screen
3. Press 3 to display the Enter Barometric Pressure screen. Change the pressure, if
necessary, and press CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Operation Configuration screen.
ENTER BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
Set Barometric Pressure
760.0 mmHg
Press ENTER to Enter Value.

Press CLEAR to Cancel Change.
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Enter Barometric Pressure Screen
2-6
2 Setup
2.2.1.4Set Date and Time
1. Press 2 from the Set Up Menu. Then press 4 from the Operations Configuration Menu
to display the Set Date/Time screen.
2. Key in the new date and press ENTER to enter new date. Or, press ENTER
immediately to skip to the time entry.
3. Key in the new time and press ENTER to enter the new time.
4. Press CLEAR to exit this screen.
DATE/TIME
Date:
30/04/95
(DD/MM/YY)
Time:
11:45:45
(HH:MM:SS)
Press ENTER to Skip Entry.

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Date and Time Screen
2-7
2. Setup
The Stat Profile Ultra contains an internal battery-backed clock and calendar that has been set
at Nova Biomedical for Eastern Standard Time. To set the date and time for your location
proceed as follows:

2.2.1.5Set Analyzer Identification
2. Setup
1. From the Operation Configuration screen, press 5 to display the Analyzer Identification screen.
2. Enter the analyzer's identification number (2-digits) and press ENTER to enter the
number or press CLEAR to cancel the change.
ANALYZER IDENTIFICATION
Analyzer Identification #:
nn

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Analyzer Identification Screen
2.2.1.6Sample Number Counter

1. From the Operation Configuration screen, press 6 to display the Sample Number
Counter screen. The Sample Number Counter and the Total Samples Accepted are
displayed.
2-8
2 Setup
SAMPLE NUMBER COUNTER
123
___
2. Setup
Total Samples Accepted 123456789
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Sample Number Counter Screen
2.2.2 Results Configuration

1. From the Set Up Menu, press 1 to display the Results Configuration screen.
RESULTS CONFIGURATION
Electrolyte Resolutions
Electrode Offsets
Results Reporting
Reference & Panic Ranges

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Results Configuration Screen
2-9

2.2.2.1Set Electrolyte Resolution
2. Setup
This screen sets the number of decimal places for Na+ and K+ display or printout. Values are
rounded to the decimal place shown. (The values shown in the screen are for illustration only.)
Set electrolyte resolution as follows:
1. Press 1 to display the Set Electrolyte Resolution screen.
2. Press the number before the desired electrolyte to change the resolution.
3. Press CLEAR to return to the Results Configuration screen.
ELECTROLYTE RESOLUTION
NOTE: The Cloption only

appears in
screens of the
Ultra F, G, and
H Analyzers.
Na+ Result
xxx.
K+ Result
xx.xx
Cl- Result
xxx.x
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Electrolyte Resolution Screen
2.2.2.2Set Units Of Measurement

This screen sets Units of Measurement for various parameters to the units of measurement
reported by your laboratory. The units of measurement highlighted on this screen will be the
units used on all screens and on all results. Select the units of measurement as follows:
1. From the Results Configuration screen, press 2 to display the Units of Measurement
screen.
2. Press the number corresponding to the desired units to change it.
2-10
2 Setup
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
Temperature
Blood Gas Values
Ca++ Concentration
Glu Concentration
Lac Concentration
BUN/Urea Concentration
Hemoglobin
C
kPa
mmol/L
mg/dL
mmol/L
mg/dL BUN
mmol/L (Hb/4)
2. Setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
30 Apr 95
15:45:45
Set Units of Measurement Screen
2.2.2.3Electrode Offsets
The values entered in this screen offset the measured results by the selected percentage. This
is used to correlate the results to the other methodologies currently being used in your
laboratory.
NOTE: Use great care in establishing the offset values for your lab. Contact
Nova Technical Service if you need assistance to determine offset values.
Enter electrode offset values as follows:
1. From the Results Configuration screen, press 3 to access the Electrode Offsets
screen.
2. Press ENTER repeatedly to move the cursor through the available positive or
negative values.
3. Key in the desired offset value to 1 decimal place next to the original parameter. The
offset ranges are as follows in Table 2.1.
2-11

ELECTRODE OFFSETS
2. Setup
Electrode Offset
pH
+ 0.0 mpH
PCO2
+ 0.0 %
PO2
+ 0.0 %
+ 0.0 %
SO2%
Hct
+ 0.0 %
Na+
+ 0.0 %
K+
+ 0.0 %
+ 0.0 %
Ca++/ClGlu
+ 0.0 %
Lac
+ 0.0 %
BUN
+ 0.0 %
30 Apr 95
15:45:45
Electrode Offsets Screen
____________________________________________________________________________________
Table 2.1 Offset Limits
PO2 10%
PCO2 10%
pH
Hct
Na+
K+
ClCa++
SO2
Glu
Lac
BUN
30 mpH units (1 mpH unit = .001 pH units)

7% (Direct offset in volume %)
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
20%
20%
20%
4. Press ENTER to replace the original offset percent value with the new value. To
cancel an entry press CLEAR before pressing ENTER.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each value.
2-12
2 Setup
2.2.2.4 Results, Measured Results, and Calculated Results Reporting Screens
Results Reporting screen - This screen selects from 2 display and print options. Selecting Off
(suppressed) causes the display and printing of results at patient temperature only. Selecting
On causes the display and printing of results at both the patient temperature and 37.0 C
(98.6F). If this screen is not accessed during setup, results will be displayed and printed at the
patient temperature only.
Measured Results Reporting screen - If sodium, a measured parameter, is Off (suppressed) in this
screen, it cannot be selected On during an analysis and cannot be displayed or printed out for
an analysis. If sodium is On, it can be turned On or Off during an analysis. For the effect of
measured result reporting changes on the calculated results reported, refer to Table 2.3.
Calculated Results screens - If BE-ECF, a calculated parameter, is Off (suppressed) in this screen,
it cannot be selected On during an analysis and cannot be displayed or printed out for an
analysis. If BE-ECF is On, it can be turned on or off during an analysis. For calculated result
reporting changes which affect the calculated results reported, refer to Table 2.3.
Reversible Suppression (On/Off) - On the Measured Results Reporting screen, the analytes are
displayed highlighted and underlined (default). To suppress the analyte (to eliminate unwanted
testing), press the corresponding number and the analyte becomes normal intensity (remains
underlined). The analyte is Off or suppressed. Any errors during calibration or analyses will not
be displayed for the Off analyte. Any measured result that depends on the suppressed analyte
will report as long as the suppressed analyte is calibrated and has no errors. To reverse
suppression, press the corresponding number of the analyte.
On the Calculated Results Reporting screens, the parameters are highlighted when On
(unsuppressed). To suppress or turn Off, press the corresponding number and the parameter
becomes normal intensity. To turn On, press the corresponding number of the parameter
(highlighted).
Blank Electrode Suppression - From the Measured Results Reporting screen, you can permanently
remove available analytes to eliminate unwanted tests. Press and hold the FUNCTION key
then press the corresponding analyte number key. The analyte changes to normal intensity with
no underline. Errors will not be reported. Also, any measured result that depends on this analyte
will be suppressed. To reverse blank electrode suppression, press and hold the FUNCTION
key then press the corresponding analyte number key. The analyte changes to highlighted
intensity with underline. After you turn it On (unsuppress the analyte), you must calibrate the
electrode.
2-13
2. Setup
The Results Reporting function in the Set Up Menu allows access to 4 screens. The Results
Reporting, Measured Results Reporting, ABG Calculated Results Reporting, and Electrolyte
Calculated Results Reporting screens, described as follows:
2. Setup
Table 2.3 Result Suppression Effects
Suppressed Parameter
Calculated Result Suppressed*
Na+
Osmolality, Hematocrit,** SO2**
pH
BE-ECF, BE-B, SBC, HCO3-, TCO2, P50, Anion Gap
PCO2
BE-ECF, BE-B, SBC, HCO3-, TCO2, A, AaDO2, a/A,

P50, Anion Gap
PO2
O2Ct, AaDO2, a/A, P50, PO2/FI
SO2
O2Ct, SBC, P50
Hct
Hb, SO2**
Glu, BUN
Osmolality
* Suppressed for Blank Electrode Suppression or if reversible suppressed analyte

is not calibrated or has error codes
** Measured Results
____________________________________________________________________________________
The On or Off state of an analysis mode determines which analysis modes are available in TEST
SELECT for the Test Panel screen. The tests performed and calculated results available for the
different modes are given in Table 2.4.
2-14
2 Setup
Table 2.4 Tests from Test Panel
Full
Panel
Blood
Gas
Blood
Gas +
Pulmonary
Electrolyte
Metabolite
Expired
Gas
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
................................................................................. X ........................................
................................................................................. X ........................................
................................................................................. X ........................................
................................................................................. X ........................................
................ X ................. X ................. X ..............................................................
................ X ................. X ................. X ............................................................ X
................ X ................. X ................. X ............................................................ X
...................................... X ................. X ..............................................................
...................................... X ................. X ..............................................................
....................................................................................................... X ..................
............................................................ X ....................................... X ..................
....................................................................................................... X ..................
Calculated Values*
Base Excess Blood:
Base Excess ECF**:
Bicarbonate:
Std. Bicarb.Conc.:
Total CO2:
O2 Content:
Normalized Calcium:
Hemoglobin:
Anion Gap:
Osmolality:
A:
AaDO2:
a/A:
P50:
PO2/FI:
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
................ X ................. X ................. X ..............................................................

................ X ................. X ................. X ..............................................................
................ X ................. X ................. X ..............................................................
...................................... X ................. X ..............................................................
................ X ................. X ................. X ..............................................................
...................................... X ................. X ..............................................................
...................................... X ................. X ..............................................................
...................................... X ................. X ..............................................................
..............................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................
................ X ................. X ................ X .............................................................
................ X ................. X ................ X .............................................................
................ X ................. X ................ X .............................................................
...................................... X ................ X .............................................................
................ X ................. X ................ X .............................................................
2. Setup
Measured Tests
Sodium:
Potassium:
Chloride:
iCalcium:
pH:
PCO2:
PO2:
SO2:
Hct:
Glucose:
Lactate:
BUN:
* See Appendix B for Definitions.

** ECF = Extracellular Fluid
2-15

Select Result Reporting options as follows:
2. Setup
1. From the Set Up Menu, press 1 then 4 to display the Results Reporting screen.
2. Press 1 to turn Results Measured On or Off.
3. Press TEST SELECT to display the Measured Results Reporting screen.
RESULTS REPORTING
Results Measured at 37.0 C
On
Press TEST SELECT for Results Reporting.

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Results Reporting Screen

MEASURED RESULTS REPORTING
Results Reporting:
Press Number
Hilite - Reporting
Configure Electrodes:
Press Function + Nbr
Underline - Installed
pH
1
PCO2
2
PO2
3
SO2%
4
Hct
5
Na+
6
K+
7
Ca++/Cl8
Glu
9
Lac
.
BUN
0
Press TEST SELECT for Next Screen.

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Measured Results Reporting Screen
4. Press the test number to suppress or unsuppress the test or press FUNCTION and the
test number to blank electrode suppress or unsuppress the test.
2-16
2 Setup
ABG CALCULATED RESULTS REPORTING
Results Reporting:
Press Number
Hilite - Reporting
Hb
1
BE-ECF
2
BE-B
3
SBC
4
HCO35
TCO2
6
O2ct
7
A
8
AaDO2
9
a/A
.
P50
0
PO2/FI
-

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
ABG Calculated Results Reporting Screens
ELECTROLYTE CALCULATED RESULTS REPORTING
Results Reporting:
Press Number
Hilite - Reporting
nCa++
1
Osm
2
Press TEST SELECT for Measured Results.

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Electrolyte Calculated Results Reporting Screens for the Ultra I, J, K Analyzers
2-17
2. Setup
5. Press TEST SELECT again to display the Gas Calculated Results Reporting screen
or press CLEAR to return to the Results Configuration screen.
6. Press the test number to suppress or unsuppress the test.
7. Press TEST SELECT again to display the Electrolyte Calculated Results Reporting
screen or press CLEAR to return to the Results Configuration screen.
8. Press the test number to suppress or unsuppress the test.

2. Setup
Results Reporting:
Press Number
Hilite - Reporting
Osm
1
An.Gap
2
Press TEST SELECT for Measured Results.

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Electrolyte Calculated Results Reporting Screens for the Ultra F, G, H Analyzers
2.2.2.5Reference and Panic Ranges

The Reference and Panic Ranges screen sets high and low limits for all tests reported by your
laboratory. Select the ranges as follows:
1. From the Results Configuration screen, press 5 to display the Reference and Panic
Ranges screen.
2. Press ENTER or the Cursor arrows to move the cursor to the desired location.
3. Change the limit and press ENTER.
4. Move to the next location.
REFERENCE & PANIC RANGES
pH
PCO2
PO2
SO2%
Hct
Na+
K+
Ca++/ClGlu
Lac
BUN
REFERENCE
LOW
HIGH
0.000
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.
0.
0.0
0.0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
PANIC
LOW
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.
0.0
0.00
0.00
0.0
0.0
0.0
HIGH
0.000
0.0
mmHg
0.0
mmHg
0.0
0.0
%
0.0
mmol/L
0.00 mmol/L
0.00 mmol/L
0.0
mg/dL
0.0
mmol/L
0.0
mg/dl

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Reference and Panic Ranges Screen
2-18
2 Setup
2.3.3 Quality Control Setup
QUALITY CONTROL SETUP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
QC Maintenance Configuration Menu

Type
Blood Gas Ctrl #1
Blood Gas Ctrl #2
Blood Gas Ctrl #3
Hematocrit Ctrl #1
Hematocrit Ctrl #2
SO2% Control #1
SO2% Control #2
Lot Number
2316.10.94
3524.12.94
3525.12.95
2822.05.95
2823.05.95
3705.02.95
Status
Expired
Active
Active
Active
Due
Incomplete
Empty
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Quality Control SetUp Screen
4. Press 0 to display the Quality Control Configuration screen.

QUALITY CONTROL CONFIGURATION
1 QC Lockout Mode
Disabled
2 Move Daily Data to Month-to-Date

3 Erase Month-to-Date Data
Auto
Manual
4
5
6
7
Manual
Auto
Manual
Manual
Print
Print
Print
Print
Daily QC Analysis Log

Daily QC Summary Graphs
Month-to-Date Test Summaries
Levey-Jennings Graphs
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Quality Control Configuration Screen
2-19
2. Setup
1. Press the MENU key to display the Main Menu Screen.

2. From the Main Menu screen, press 4 and enter your password, if prompted.
3. From the Set Up Menu, press 3 to display the Quality Control Setup Menu screen.

5. Press 1 to toggle the QC Lockout Mode between Disabled, Reminder Only, and
Mandatory QC. Press 2 through 7 to set up manual or automatic operation of these
features.
2. Setup
QC Lockout Mode
Disabled
No indicating messages are displayed. QC samples need to be run in

accordance with laboratory set policy.
Reminder Only A warning message, "QC Analysis Due," is displayed on the Ready for
Analysis screen 30 minutes prior to the programmed analysis time (see
Step 8) up until the QC sample has been run.
Mandatory QC A warning message, "QC Analysis Due," is displayed on the Ready for
Analysis screen 30 minutes prior to the programmed analysis time (see
Step 8) up until the programmed analysis time. A new message, "QC
Required," is displayed at the programmed analysis time and remains
until the QC sample has been run. Results for the tests that require QC
will not be displayed for any patient samples in this mode.
NOTE: Analysis is not prevented in this mode, but result displays are.
Therefore, if QC is required for all tests and an analysis is run, the sample
will be analyzed but no results will be reported. After the analysis is run,
there is no method for retrieving the results. (See Operation, Override
Mandatory QC Analysis.)
Auto(matic) operation of daily functions occurs at 23:40 hours each day. Automatic operation
of monthly functions occurs at 23:40 hours on the last day of each month.
2-20
2 Setup
Move Daily Data to Month-to-Date
Daily data is moved to Month-to-Date data for each control if daily data
exists. Daily data is then erased.
2. Setup
Erase Month-to-Date Data

The Month-to-Date data and statistics are erased.
Print Daily QC Analysis Log
A log of each QC sample result with control ranges is printed.
Print Daily QC Summary Graphs
For each control, a graphical representation of each test's results are
displayed showing the low, high, and mean results.
Print Month-to-Date Test Summaries
Summaries of the Month-to-Date statistics by test for all tests are printed.
Print Levey-Jennings Graphs
A graphic of the Month-to-Date graphs by test for all tests is printed.
6. Press CLEAR to return to the Quality Control Setup Menu screen.
7. From the Quality Control Setup Menu screen, press a number (1-7) to display the
desired Quality Control Setup screen.

Blood Gas Ctrl
#1
Lot Number:
Expiration Date:
oooooooooo
dd/mm/yy
(DD/MM/YY)
Initial Analysis Time
hh:mm
Analysis Frequency
hh
(HH:MM)
hours.
Press TEST SELECT for Ranges.

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Quality Control Setup Screen
2-21
2. Setup
8. Enter or change information as desired. Press ENTER to input information into the
position indicated by the reverse video cursor bar. Move the cursor with the up and
down arrow keys. "Initial Analysis Time" is the time of day you desire a particular
control to be run. "Analysis Frequency" determines how often the control is run after
the "Initial Analysis Time".
The following warning appears if an attempt is made to enter a new Lot Number for
a control that is not Empty or is Incomplete:
WARNING:
Changing the Lot Number will
delete all data for the current
control.
Press ENTER to Confirm Change.
The following warning appears if an attempt is made to delete the Lot Number (by
entering the Erase Code Characters: _ (Dot, Dash, Dot) for a control that is either
Active or Expired:
WARNING:
Deleting the Lot Number will
delete the data for the current
control.
The following warning appears if an attempt is made to change the Expiration Date
for a control that is either Active or Expired:
WARNING:
The Expiration Date must match
the date specified by the
manufacturer.
When changing lots of controls, all data from the existing lot should be printed or
recorded for laboratory records prior to entering a new lot number. At the time a new
lot number is entered, all stored data for the previous lot number is erased.
One method of performing crossovers is to enter the new lot information and track
the existing lot manually for the crossover period.
2-22
2 Setup
CONTROL RANGE LIMITS

BLOOD GAS Ctrl #1
Low
Lot Number
cccccccccc
Exp. Date
dd/mm/yy
pH
n.nnn
PCO2
nnn.n
PO2
nnn.n
Na+
nnn.n
K+
nn.nn
Ca++/Cl- nn.nn
Glu
nnn.n
Lac
nn.nn
BUN
nn.nn
High
n.nnn
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nn.nn
nn.nn
nnn.n
nn.nn
nn.nn
mmHg
mmHg
mmol/L
mmol/L
mg/dL
mg/dL
mmol/L
mmol/L

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Control Range Limits Screen
10. Press PRINT to get a printout of the QC Control Configuration.
2-23
2. Setup
9. Press TEST SELECT to display the Control Range Limits screen.

a. If the new ranges are identical to the old ranges, simply press CLEAR to
accept these limits for the new control.
b. Change limits as desired. (Entering 0 (zero) for both the low and the high
ranges will disable the range check for the chosen test(s).)
c. Press CLEAR to exit the screen and to enable these limits for the new
control.

2.2.4 Communications Setup
2. Setup
1. From the Set Up Menu, press 4 to display the Communications Setup screen.
COMMUNICATIONS SETUP
Results Transmission
COM1
Ticket Printer
COM3
Remote Diagnostic
COM2
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Communications Setup Screen
2.2.4.1Transmission Port Configuration

1. From the Communications Setup screen, press 1, 2, or 3 to display the Transmission
Port Configuration screen.
2. Input Port, Baud, Parity, Word Length, Stop Bits, and Ack(nowledge) requirements
by entering the number on the left of the screen.
3. Press CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Set Up Menu screen.
2-24
2 Setup
TRANSMISSION PORT CONFIGURATION
Warning, Port Previously Assigned !
Port
COM1:
Baud
4800
Parity
Odd
Word Length
Stop Bits
ACK Required
Enabled
2. Setup
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Transmission Port Configuration Screen
2.2.5 Default Parameter

This screen sets Default Parameters for patient data.
1. From the Set Up Menu, press 5 to display the Default Parameter screen.
2. Press ENTER until you come to the desired default value. Then change it.
DEFAULT PARAMETER
Patient Temperature
37.0
Hemoglobin
14.3
g/dL
FIO2
(Disabled)
20.9

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Default Parameter Screen
2-25

Patient Data
2. Setup
The Patient Data default values are:

Patient Temperature - 37.0 C
Hemoglobin - 14.3 g/dL
FIO2 - 20.9 %
The Patient Temperature default value used for all measured and calculated results is 37.0 C
(normal body temperature). The Hemoglobin default value is 14.3 g/dL. This value is used when,
due to a hematocrit error, an analyzer-calculated hemoglobin result is not available. The default and
entered hemoglobin values will not be displayed or printed, only the calculated hemoglobin
value will be displayed or printed.
NOTE: For an individual test you may enter patient temperature or hemoglobin in the Patient Data screen.
2.2.6 Password Options

This section will enable you to set up password protection for your analyzer. All set up features
are password protected. Once enabled, only an authorized user with the correct password will
be able to use the analyzer. Also, you will have complete control over the password files set
up features.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6
7.
8.
2-26
From the Set Up Menu, press 6 to display the Password Options screen.
Press 1, 2, or 5 to change the options from enabled to disabled, etc.
Press 3 to display the Operator Passwords: #1 or Remote Review.
Press 4 to display the Operator Passwords: #2 or No Remote Review.
Press 6 to display the Technician Passwords screen.
Press 7 to display the Supervisor Password screen.
Press 8 to set all passwords to zero.
Press CLEAR to return to the Set Up Menu screen.
2 Setup
PASSWORD OPTIONS
Remote Review Protection
Enabled
2
3
4
Operator Password Protection

Passwords Entry
-Operator
Passwords Entry
-Operator
Enabled
#1
#2
Technician Password Protection
Enabled
6
7
Passwords Entry
Password Entry
---
2. Setup
Technician
Supervisor

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Password Options Screen
Password Inputs
1. From the Password Options screen, press 3 to display the Operator Passwords screen
for Group #1 or Remote Review (if enabled), or press 4 to display the Operator
Passwords screen for Group #2 or No Remote Review (if enabled).
2. Press ENTER until you come to the desired operator number. Then enter a password
of up to 4 digits. Press ENTER to continue to the next operator number.
3. Press CLEAR to return to the Password Options screen.
OPERATOR PASSWORDS
Remote Review (or Group #1)
OprPswdOprPswdOprPswd
101
nnnn
116
nnnn
131
nnnn
102
nnnn
117
nnnn
132
nnnn
103
nnnn
118
nnnn
133
nnnn
104
nnnn
119
nnnn
134
nnnn
105
nnnn
120
nnnn
135
nnnn
106
nnnn
121
nnnn
136
nnnn
107
nnnn
122
nnnn
137
nnnn
108
nnnn
123
nnnn
138
nnnn
109
nnnn
124
nnnn
139
nnnn
110
nnnn
125
nnnn
140
nnnn
111
nnnn
126
nnnn
141
nnnn
112
nnnn
127
nnnn
142
nnnn
113
nnnn
128
nnnn
143
nnnn
114
nnnn
129
nnnn
144
nnnn
115
nnnn
130
nnnn
145
nnnn
Press ENTER to Skip Entry, CLEAR to Exit
Operator Passwords Screen
2-27
2. Setup
OPERATOR PASSWORDS
No Remote Review (or Group #2)
201
nnnn
216
nnnn
231
nnnn
202
nnnn
217
nnnn
232
nnnn
203
nnnn
218
nnnn
233
nnnn
204
nnnn
219
nnnn
234
nnnn
205
nnnn
220
nnnn
235
nnnn
206
nnnn
221
nnnn
236
nnnn
207
nnnn
222
nnnn
237
nnnn
208
nnnn
223
nnnn
238
nnnn
209
nnnn
224
nnnn
239
nnnn
210
nnnn
225
nnnn
240
nnnn
211
nnnn
226
nnnn
241
nnnn
212
nnnn
227
nnnn
242
nnnn
213
nnnn
228
nnnn
243
nnnn
214
nnnn
229
nnnn
244
nnnn
215
nnnn
230
nnnn
245
nnnn
Operator Passwords Screen
4. From the Password Options screen, press 6 to display the Technician Passwords
screen.
5. Press ENTER until you come to the desired operator number. Then enter a password
of up to 4 digits. Press ENTER to continue to the next operator number.
TECHNICIAN PASSWORDS
301
nnnn
316
nnnn
331
nnnn
302
nnnn
317
nnnn
332
nnnn
303
nnnn
318
nnnn
333
nnnn
304
nnnn
319
nnnn
334
nnnn
305
nnnn
320
nnnn
335
nnnn
306
nnnn
321
nnnn
336
nnnn
307
nnnn
322
nnnn
337
nnnn
308
nnnn
323
nnnn
338
nnnn
309
nnnn
324
nnnn
339
nnnn
310
nnnn
325
nnnn
340
nnnn
311
nnnn
326
nnnn
341
nnnn
312
nnnn
327
nnnn
342
nnnn
313
nnnn
328
nnnn
343
nnnn
314
nnnn
329
nnnn
344
nnnn
315
nnnn
330
nnnn
345
nnnn
Technician Passwords Screen
7. From the Password Options screen, press 7 to display the Supervisor Passwords
screen. Then enter a password of up to 4 digits.
2-28
2 Setup
SUPERVISOR PASSWORD
__
2. Setup
Password
30 Apr 95
15:45:45
Supervisor Password Screen
2.3
Patient Recall Menu

1.
From the Main Menu, press 1 to display the Patient Recall Options screen.
PATIENT RECALL OPTIONS

SYSTEM BUSY
1
Transmit All Stored Results
Transmit Results Stored Since Last Upload
View Stored Patient Results
Delete All Stored Results
Delete Uploaded Stored Results
30 Apr 95
15:45:45
Patient Recall Options Screen
2-29

2.
3.
Press 1 or 2 to display the Transmit Stored Results screen.

Press ENTER to store the results.
2. Setup
TRANSMIT STORED RESULTS
Waiting To Transmit Stored Results
12 Records Transmitted.
Press ENTER When Ready.

Press CLEAR to Exit,
Press CLEAR to Cancel.
30 Apr 95
15:45:45
Transmit Stored Results Screen
4.
5.
Press 3 to display the Stored Patient Results screen.

Press FUNCTION to scroll pages up; press FUNCTION to scroll pages down.
Press to scroll lines up; press to scroll lines down.
STORED PATIENT RESULTS
Date
Time
Accession #
Patient I.D.
10 Mar 95
17:47:30
12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
10 Mar 95
17:47:30
12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
10 Mar 95
17:47:30
12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
10 Mar 95
17:47:30
12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
Fnc/-PgUp

Fnc/-PgDn
-LnUp
30 Apr 95
15:45:45
-LnDn
Stored Patient Results Screen
6. To view the patient data, enter the number on the left of the screen (1-4) associated
with the patient.
2-30
2 Setup
7. From the Patient Data Recall Menu, press 4 or 5 to delete all stored or uploaded stored
results.
8. Press ENTER when ready to delete the results.
9. Press CLEAR to exit.
2. Setup
DELETE STORED RESULTS
Warning !
Deleted Results Cannot Be Recovered.

30 Apr 95
15:45:45
Delete Stored Results Screen
2.4
Resuming Normal Operation After Power Loss

If a power loss of up to 5 seconds occurs, any analysis in progress or other sequence in progress
is stopped. No other adverse effects occur. If a power loss of over 5 seconds duration occurs,
however, an internal battery acts to retain the:
Setup Values
Calibration Gas Values
Barometer Offset
Percent Reagent Remaining in the Reagent Pack
Previous Results
Calibration slopes, pending analysis results and patient data, operation menu values (other than
the barometer offset), and error codes will be lost. Upon return of power, run a calibration, enter
Operation Menu choices, and resume operation.
If the analyzer has been set up previously but upon power loss Set Up Required appears on the
Ready For Analysis screen, the internal battery has died and no setups are saved. The password
is reset to 0 (zero). After accessing the Set Up Menu and performing the setup procedure,
normal operation can resume. Contact Nova Technical Service to have a Service Representative replace the battery.
2-31
3 Operation
Operation
The Stat Profile Ultra Components are shown in Figure 3.1. These components are described
in the following sections.
3
6
3. Operation
5
1
DWG #7-M-003A
Stat Profile Ultra
2
MENU
CALIBRATE
TEST SELECT
CURSOR
QC
PRINT
ANALYZE
PATIENT DATA
ENTER
STATUS
CLEAR
FUNCTION
Figure 3.1 Stat Profile Ultra Components
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CRT Display
Keypad
Printer
Septum Assembly/Probe Port
Analytical Compartment
Fluids Deck (Reagent Flow Controllers)
Reagent Pack
3-1

3.1
CRT Display
3. Operation
The CRT Display displays screens of information on system functions, how to access system
functions, and output patient results. If the instrument is idle for more than 15 minutes, the
computer will blank the CRT to minimize wear. In this situation, pressing the . key will recall
the screen that was blanked.
NOTE: Pressing keys other than . will recall the previous screen as well, but
may activate menu items on these screens.
3.2
Stat Profile Keypad and Functions

The instrument is controlled by a Keypad (see Figure 3.2), and keys are explained in Table 3.1.
CALIBRATE
QC
MENU
CURSOR
TEST SELECT
ANALYZE
ENTER
PRINT
FUNCTION
PATIENT DATA
CLEAR
STATUS
Figure 3.2 Keypad
NOTE: If the instrument is idle for more than 15 minutes, the computer will
blank the CRT to minimize wear. In this situation, the pressing of any key will
recall the screen that was blanked, but will not execute the function described
in Table 3.1. Any subsequent key press will execute its associated function.
Table 3.1 Key Functions
3-2
Key
Function
CALIBRATE
Starts a full 2-point calibration. This key is inoperative if the system is busy
with another sequence.
QC
From the Aspirate Analysis Sample screen, displays the QC Selection screen
to allow the operator to specify the current analysis as a proficiency analysis
(e.g., an analysis for a CAP survey) or as an analysis of one of the specified
QC control materials.
PRINT
Manually prints the information displayed on the current screen. If the printer
is already printing, the PRINT key is disabled.
3 Operation
Table 3.1 Key Functions (continued)
Function
FUNCTION
Use the FUNCTION Key with the other keys to alter the functionality of other
keys, such as:
1.
To cause the ANALYZE Key to start an analysis, use the alternate
analysis mode.
2.
To cause the CALIBRATE Key to display the Calibration Options
screen, you can execute partial as well as full calibrations.
ENTER
Use ENTER to:

1.
Enter numbers on data entry screens.
2.
Skip an entry on a data entry screen. ENTER advances the cursor to the
next entry on the data entry screen.
3.
Step to the next screen in a sequence of screens.
4.
Initiate an action or cycle, such as a mini-cal or a gas/fluid prime, or to
abort a sequence.
5.
Increment the Analog Multiplexer Channel Number on the System Test
screens (when troubleshooting).
CURSOR
Use the Cursor arrow keys to:

1.
Step through the entry fields on data entry screens.
2.
Step through the menu items on menu screens.
3.
Display the next or previous screen in a sequence of screens.
4.
Display a different segment of the logged error codes on the Error Log
screen.
5.
Display a different segment of QC data on the various QC Review data
screens.
CLEAR
Use CLEAR to:

1.
Cancel the entry of a value on data entry screens.
2.
Abort a sequence or procedure in progress.
3.
Exit from a screen.
MENU
Displays the Main Menu. This allows you to use the support functions of the
software. As you become more experienced, you can bypass the MENU key
(and the Main Menu) by pressing the digit key corresponding to the support
functions.
3-3
3. Operation
Key

Key
Function
TEST SELECT
1.
3. Operation
2.
3.
PATIENT DATA
1.
2.
3.
From the Ready For Analysis screen, display the Test Panels screen for
establishing which of the 6 panel options are to be reported for the next
analysis.
From the Patient Data screen, displays the first of the Results Reporting
screens, for establishing which analytical test results are to be
reported for the currently executing or just completed analysis.
From the Results Reporting Configuration screen, displays the first of
the Global Results Reporting screens, for establishing which of the
analytical test results are to be reported for all analyses.
During an analysis, Patient Data enables you to enter the accession

number, patient I.D. number, temperature, sample type, time drawn,
and percent inspired oxygen values.
When an analysis is not being performed, it recalls results from the last
analysis.
When pressed twice from the Ready For Analysis screen, it allows you
to enter alternate patient data, recalculating the previous results.
The Patient Data screen cannot be accessed if the CRT is displaying a Menu
or Status screen or the results of a QC analysis.
STATUS
Displays the Status screens.
ANALYZE
Starts an analysis in the Default Analysis mode. This key is inoperative if the
system is busy with another sequence.
. (Decimal Point) Use the Decimal Point:

1.
As a decimal point when entering numbers.
2.
As a separator in the Patient I.D., Accession number, Control and/or
Calibrator Lot number, and Time Drawn values (instead of a slash,
space, or colon).
3.
As a menu item selector on some menu screens.
4.
To decrease the Analog Multiplexer Channel number in the System
Test screen.
0-9 (Digits)
3-4
1.
2.
Numeric entry.
Menu Selection.
3 Operation
Key
- (Minus Sign)
Use the Minus Sign:

1.
As a negative-value indicator when entering signed numbers.
2.
As a separator in the Patient I.D., Accession number, Control and/or
Calibrator Lot number, and Time Drawn values (instead of a slash,
space, or colon).
3.
As a menu item selector on some menu screens.
Printer
The Printer uses heat-sensitive paper and a 100 dot thermal print head.
NOTE: Leaving printouts in sunlight for extended periods will result in

diminished legibility. Under normal storage conditions, the printouts
remain legible for 10 years.
3.4
Septum Assembly
The septum assembly is described in the next section, Analytical Compartment.
3.5
Analytical Compartment
The Analytical Compartment contains the electrodes and the components of the flow path, i.e.,
the Sample Probe, Septum Assembly, Sample Preheater, Flow Cell, and tubing harnesses
which bring the samples and standards to the electrodes. The Barometric Pressure Module, Gas
Humidifier Wells, Reference Electrode, Reagent Preheater, Fiber Optic Module, and temperature sensors are also in this compartment. A thermostat maintains the compartment temperature at 37 C.
3-5
3. Operation
3.3
Function

10
1
2
3. Operation
8
8
7
11
12
4A
6
4B
5
S
DWG #7-11-004C
4C
Figure 3.3 Analytical Compartment
1.
2.
3.
4a.
4b.
4c.
5.
3-6
Reagent Harness
Reagent Preheater
Gas Humidifier Wells
Septum Harness
Sample Probe
Septum Assembly
Electrode Rack Assembly
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Sample Preheater
Flow Cell
Electrodes
Reference Electrode
W/R-Harness
Fiber Optic Module
Flow Cell Light
3 Operation
3.5.1 Reagent Harness
The Reagent Harness transports fluids from the reagent pack to the analytical components.
3.5.2 Reagent Preheater

3. Operation
The Reagent Preheater equilibrates the reagent pack fluids and the gases to 37 C.
3.5.3 Gas Humidifier Wells

The Humidifier Wells contain deionized water through which the gases are bubbled for
humidification and also provide visual check of gas flow.
3.5.4 Sampler Assembly

The Sampler Assembly consists of the sample probe, septum assembly, sampler housing, and
stepper motor. The sample probe moves through the sampler housing and septum assembly by
action of the stepper motor.The septum assembly is comprised of 6 septa-walled chambers,
into which flow the gas or standard solutions for pickup by the sample probe. When extended,
the sample probe allows presentation of syringes, capillary tubes, sample cups, vacuum tubes,
or expired air samples.
3.5.5 Electrode Rack Assembly

The Electrode Rack Assembly contains the analytical components that measure analyte
concentrations in a sample.
3.5.6 Sample Preheater

The Sample Preheater preheats samples and controls to 37 C. In addition, it contains the
hematocrit impedance electrode and 2 air detectors. A backplate extending from the sample
preheater serves to hold the flow cell and the reference electrode.
3-7

3.5.7 Flow Cell
The Flow Cell houses the electrodes in a clear block with a prism surface for viewing possible
clots or air bubbles.
3. Operation
3.5.8 Electrodes
The Electrodes housed in the flow cell are the core of the Stat Profile Ultra.
Electrodes are flow-by to minimize sample size. The methodology used by each electrode is
shown Table 3.2.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3.2 Stat Profile Ultra Electrode Methodologies
Electrode
Methodology
Sodium
Sodium ion-selective electrode glass
Potassium
Liquid membrane electrode
Chloride
iCa
pH
Hydrogen ion-selective electrode glass
PCO2
Severinghaus-type electrode
PO2
Polarographic Clark-type electrode
Hct
Impedance electrode
Glucose
Enzymatic electrode
Lactate
Enzymatic electrode
BUN
Enzymatic electrode
SO2
Reflectance photometry (fiber optics)
____________________________________________________________________________________
3-8
3 Operation
The electrodes clip into the flow cell (the Hct electrode is part of the sample preheater), and
the cables plug into the electrode rack. The voltages read by the Na+, K+, Cl-, iCa, BUN, and
pH electrodes are related to a reference voltage measured at the reference electrode. Any
reference dependent electrode has a single wire lead. Voltages from the PCO2, glucose, lactate,
and PO2 electrodes are measured by internal reference electrodes. These electrodes have 2 wire
leads. The fiber optic module is used to measure voltages for SO2% calculations.
The Reference Electrode is mounted on the sample preheater above the flow cell. It is a solidstate electrode continuously supplied with reference solution to provide the reference voltage
for comparison to sample voltages. The exit port of the flow path is located on this electrode.
3.5.10 W/R Harness

The harness transports the waste solution to the fluid pack waste bottle and transports the
Reference Solution to the reference electrode.
3.5.11 Barometric Pressure Module

The Barometric Pressure Module, located on the sensor printed circuit board, contains a
barometer which continuously monitors the barometric pressure. This barometer can be
calibrated against an external barometer if desired. See Section 2.2.1.3.
3.5.12 Fiber Optic Module

The fiber optic module is used to measure voltages for SO2% calculations.
3.5.13 Flow Cell Light

When the analytical compartment door is closed, the flow cell light can be turned on or off
through the Maintenance Menu. When the door is opened, the light is always on.
3-9
3. Operation
3.5.9 Reference Electrode

3.6
Reagent Flow Controllers

The Reagent Flow Controllers, shown in Figure 3.4, are located on the fluids deck under the
cover. The flow controllers are the Pump, Pinch Valve, and Pump Bypass Valve. These
components are shown below.
3. Operation
1. Pinch Valve
2. Pump
3. Pump Bypass Valve
W R
1
W R
3
C
DWG #5-10-003B
Figure 3.4 Reagent Flow Controllers
3.6.1 Pinch Valve

The Pinch Valve has 4 tubing pinch stations controlled by a motor-driven cam. The valve
regulates the flow of Standards A, B, C, and D from the reagent pack. When the valve is closed,
the valve pressure plate is extended against the pinch bar and the tube is pinched closed. When
the valve is open, the pressure plate is retracted from the valve pinch bar and the tubing is open,
allowing reagent to flow.
3-10
3 Operation
3.6.2 Pump
The Pump uses peristaltic action to draw the fluids through the tubing and the flow path. A
stepper motor drives the pump and moves at low, medium low, medium high, and high speeds.
The pump rollers contact the waste line to draw standards or samples through the W-line and
simultaneously supply reference solution.
The Pump Bypass Valve is a pinch valve which allows gas to bypass the pump (gas cannot flow
by peristaltic action) and flow through the bypass tubing segment in the W/R-harness.
3.7
Reagent Pack
The Reagent Pack contains standards for pH, electrolyte (Na+, K+, and Cl-), hematocrit, iCa,
glucose, BUN, and lactate electrode calibration, flush solution for washing the flow path, and
reference solution for establishing a reference voltage at the reference electrode. The pack also
has a Reagent Management System cartridge (see Section 3.13) and a waste bottle to collect all
system wastes. SO2 is calibrated separately using Oxygen Saturation Calibrator solutions.
3-11
3. Operation
3.6.3 Pump Bypass Valve

3.8
Fluidic Diagram
FLUSH
3. Operation
REAGENT
PACK
REF
WASTE
WASTE
The Peristaltic pump

rotates to draw in
Reference Solution and
aspirate the flow path.
Pump
R W
REFERENCE
ELECTRODE
ELECTRODES
PINCH
VALVE
SAMPLE PREHEATER
WITH AIR DETECTOR
GASES
GAS
HUMIDIFIER
WELLS
SAMPLER PROBE
GAS
DWG #5-10-004A
FLUSH
C
D
A
B
Figure 3.5 Fluidic Diagram
3-12
SEPTUM ASSEMBLY
The probe moves inside the

Septum Assembly to access
the appropriate reagent or
solution; it moves outside of
the Septum Assembly to
aspirate samples.
3 Operation
3.9
Operation Overview
3-13
3. Operation
The Stat Profile Ultra Analyzer is an automatic, microcomputer-based system for analyzing
samples for blood gas, electrolytes, iCa, glucose, lactate, BUN, SO2, and hematocrit. System
access is via the keypad, allowing entry of data and instructions in response to information
displayed on the CRT.
After the instrument is set up and calibrated, the CRT displays the Ready For Analysis screen
signifying that the instrument is ready. The operator presses ANALYZE to extend the probe
into the sample, immerses the probe, then presses ANALYZE again to begin the analysis cycle.
After the sample is drawn into the flow path to the electrodes, the electrode millivolt values are
measured (error messages are generated if any problems are detected). Patient data is entered
by the operator, calculations for measured parameter results are performed, and these results
are in turn used for computing the calculated results. The measured and calculated results are
displayed on the CRT and printed out.
A 2-point calibration establishes the electrode slopes used for result calculations. The
instrument performs a 2-point calibration every 2, 4, or 6 hours, depending on the number of
analyses performed. See Section 3.15 for details. A 1-point calibration (Cal 1) is performed at
30 or 45 minute intervals and is independent of the sample cycle. Patient results are calculated
using the millivolt difference between the patient sample and the 1-point calibration standard
together with the electrode slope from the last 2-point calibration. The 1-point calibration is
also used to check for unacceptable electrode drift (electrode drift is defined as a small change
in electrode signal over time, the slope remaining constant).
The following description of the 2-point calibration can also serve as an example of what
happens during a 1-point calibration and sample cycle. Refer to Figure 3.5. When calibration
starts, the pinch valve opens reagent line B. The probe tip moves to the Standard B position
in the septum assembly, the pump turns, Standard B is aspirated through the sample preheater
and the air detectors which check for proper flow. During aspiration, the pump simultaneously
pumps reference solution into the reference electrode. The pump stops, positioning the
standard in front of the electrodes. The iCa, pH, and hematocrit electrode millivolt readings are
taken. (The second point for iCa is taken when flush is pulled through the system.) This
sequence is repeated for Standard A, establishing the second of the 2 calibration points for the
pH electrode (the second point for the hematocrit electrode is taken when Standard C is read).
The pump bypass valve then opens and the probe tip moves to the gas position in the septum
assembly. An internal gas valve meters Gas A into the system. The gas is humidified before
entering the flow path where the PCO2 and PO2 millivolt readings are taken. This sequence
is repeated for Gas B, establishing the second of the 2 calibration points for the PCO2 and PO2
electrodes. Gas is then purged out of the system and the pump bypass valve closes.
Finally, the sequence for the Na+, K+, Cl-, glucose, BUN, and lactate electrodes, using Standard
D for the first calibration point then Standard C for the second calibration point, is run.
A barometer provides continuous pressure readings which are used in the calculation of blood
gas results.

The SO2% is calibrated using the SO2% Calibration option. Calibrate the SO2% channel
monthly, using Stat Profile Ultra Oxygen Saturation Calibrators. These calibrators are
formulated to give a low (abnormal) SO2% reading and a high (normal) SO2% reading and are
used to determine the slope and intercept values for calibration. Once the SO2% channel is
calibrated, the readings for the blood sample are related to those of the standards.
3. Operation
3.10 Program Overview

The operator controls the instrument by pressing a key or keys on the keypad in response to
information shown on the CRT screen. The functions are used to:
Analyze a sample
Calibrate the instrument
Perform maintenance
Set up instrument and test parameters
Check instrument status and troubleshoot
Analyze a QC sample
Initiate a printout
Select tests
Enter patient data
The CRT screens present the following information:
Status of the analyzer

Menus
Information to allow changing system setup or test parameters
Patient results
Step by step instructions for maintenance procedures
All screens give information on how to move to the next screen or how to exit the screen. The
screen that most sequences start from is the Ready For Analysis screen. An introduction to this
screen, and the Status and Main Menu screens, follows.
3-14
3 Operation
3.11 Ready for Analysis Screen
The Ready For Analysis screen tells whether the instrument is ready to perform an analysis.
When the Not Ready version of this screen is displayed, see Section 3.11.1.
READY FOR ANALYSIS
3. Operation
Press ANALYZE to Extend Probe.
CLEAN SAMPLE PREHEATER

Uncalibrated Electrodes
pH Glu Lac
Auto-Cal Pending
Cal I Pending
Please Calibrate SO2% Today.
20% Remaining in Reagent Pack
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Ready for Analysis Screen
The following information is displayed:
Analysis mode
When ready for an analysis, information on how to begin the analysis
Uncalibrated electrodes (if any)
Auto-Cal Pending if less than 10 minutes remain to a scheduled calibration
Percent reagent remaining in the reagent pack (if enabled)
Date and time
3-15

3.11.1 When the Not Ready Screen is Displayed
When the Not Ready screen is displayed, the analyzer cannot run an analysis. The following
prompts are typically seen only on power up, but may be displayed if a system failure occurs.
3. Operation
NOT READY
Date/Time Not Set

Set Up Required
Verify Cal Gas Values
System Uncalibrated
Air Bath Not Ready
Preheater Temp. Control Error
Check Barometric Pressure
No Std A When Required
Auto-Cal I Pending
Please Calibrate SO2% Today.
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Not Ready Screen
Respond to the prompts as follows:

Set Up Required
An abbreviated set up procedure is outlined here in which the factory-set selections are entered.
Refer to Section 2.2 for a complete discussion of how to adapt the analyzer to your clinical
requirements. To use the default selections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press MENU to enter the Main Menu screen.

Press 4 to access the Password Required screen.
Key in 0 (zero), the factory-set password.
Press ENTER.
Press CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Not Ready screen.
Verify Cal Gas Values

Check the calibration gas values as follows:
1. Press MENU, to display the Main Menu.
2. Press 2 to display the Maintenance Menu screen.
3-16
3 Operation
3. Press 3 to display the Calibration Option Menu screen.
4. Press 7 to display the Calibration Gases screen.
5. Set the gas calibration values as printed on the gas cylinders as described
in Section 4.1.4 (see also Appendix A).
6. Press CLEAR, CLEAR, CLEAR, to return to the Not Ready screen.
NOTE: Nova gas values are used as defaults.

RMS System Error
Air Bath Not Ready

The air bath temperature has not stabilized at 37 C. Check that the door is closed. When
the air bath temperature stabilizes at 37 C, this prompt will disappear.
Sample Preheater Not Ready
The sample preheater temperature has not stabilized at 37 C. Verify that the preheater
is firmly seated on the electrical connector and that the door is closed. When the sample
preheater temperature stabilizes at 37 C, this prompt will disappear.
System/Air Detectors Uncalibrated
For System Uncalibrated, perform a single flow cell conditioning cycle per Section 4.3.1
then press CALIBRATE, ENTER to initiate a 2-point calibration with gas and liquid
calibrators. If the prompt recurs, press CALIBRATE, ENTER again to perform a second
2-point calibration. If the prompt still recurs, troubleshoot the problem per Section 5.2.
For Air Detectors Uncalibrated, troubleshoot the air detectors per Section 5.2.
Check Barometric Pressure
This prompt will appear if:
a. The analyzer has reverted to the Default Barometric Pressure
(Section 2.1.2.3), or
b. The Manual Barometric Pressure mode has been selected
(Section 2.1.2.3) and the power has been off for 5 seconds.
To clear this prompt, manually set the Barometric Pressure as described in Section
2.1.2.3.
No Reagent/Gas When Required
This prompt appears if a blockage prevents reagent or gas delivery or if the reagent pack is
empty. Press STATUS repeatedly until System Status is displayed and note the specific No
Fluid or No Gas When Required Error Code. Resolve per Section 5.2. Upon completion of
calibration, the Ready For Analysis screen appears. This signifies that the analyzer is ready.
3-17
3. Operation
The reagent pack and RMS pod must be installed and the Reagent Pack screen is needed
to respond to this prompt. Refer to Section 4.4.11.

3.12 Status
The 5 Status screens are as follows:
3. Operation
Sensor Status
Air Detector Status
Sequence Errors
System Errors
System Status
These screens cycle. The screens can be displayed at any time during an analysis, calibration,
or idle sequence. Press ENTER to go to the next Status screen and CLEAR to exit.
3.12.1 Sensor Status

The Sensor Status screen is the first screen displayed when STATUS is pressed.
SENSOR STATUS
System Idle
SensorSlope
pH
+10.2
+10.2
PCO2
PO2
+10.2
SO2%
+10.2
Hct
+10.2
Na+
+10.2
K+
+10.2
Ca++/Cl- +10.2
Glu
+10.2
Lac
+10.2
BUN
+10.2
Errors Detected
Status Offset
C OK
+ 0.0 mpH
C OK
+ 0.0 %
C OK
+ 0.0 %
C OK
+ 0.0 %
C OK
+ 0.0 %
C OK
+ 0.0 %
C OK
+ 0.0 %
C OK
+ 0.0 %
C OK
+ 0.0 %
C OK
+ 0.0 %
C OK
+ 0.0 %
Reporting
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Press ENTER for Next Screen, CLEAR to Exit.
Sensor Status Screen
This screen provides the following information:
3-18
Sequence in progress
Time to completion of sequence
Slope of each electrode
3 Operation
Status of each electrode minor or major error occurrence for last calibration or
analysis cycle
-
Reporting status of electrode if results are being reported for the particular
parameter
Electrode offsets (if used)
3.12.2 Air Detector Status

The Air Detector Status screen is accessed from the Sensor Status screen by pressing ENTER.
AIR DETECTOR STATUS
System Idle
Errors Detected
AIR DET mV's
STATUS
AD2
+123.4
OK
AD3
+123.4
OK
Press ENTER for Next Screen.

Air Detector Status Screen
This screen lists air detector errors (which are mainly electrode or fluidic in nature) from the
last analysis (labeled Analysis) and from calibrations and other operations (labeled Others).
The screen is updated with each calibration and analysis. Refer to Section 5.1 for a discussion
of troubleshooting with this screen.
3-19
3. Operation
C or UC indicates whether an electrode is calibrated or uncalibrated

E or OK indicates whether an error has occurred on that electrode (major
or minor, calibration or analysis)

3.12.3 Sequence Errors
The Sequence Errors screen is accessed next from the Air Detector Status screen by pressing
ENTER.
SEQUENCE ERRORS
Others
A5 AB TEMP TOO HIGH
3. Operation
Analysis
25 Na+ INSTAB C
Sequence Errors Screen
This screen lists sequence errors (which are mainly electrode or fluidic in nature) from the last
analysis (labeled Analysis) and from calibrations and other operations (labeled Others). The
screen is updated with each calibration and analysis. Refer to Section 5.1 for a discussion of
troubleshooting with this screen.
3-20
3 Operation
3.12.4 System Errors
The System Errors screen is next displayed by pressing ENTER.
SYSTEM ERRORS
A5 AB TEMP TOO HIGH
3. Operation
Press 0 to Clear System Errors.

System Errors Screen
System errors are hardware or software related. These codes may occur during calibration,
analysis, or during an idle sequence. System errors are cleared at the start of a full calibration.
Refer to Section 5.1 for a discussion of troubleshooting with this screen.
3-21

3.12.5 System Status
The System Status screen is next displayed by pressing ENTER.
SYSTEM STATUS
3. Operation
Cal Flow Time: 45 tenths of seconds.

Analysis Flow Time: 42 tenths of seconds.
Air Bath Temperature:

Preheater Temperature:
Barometric Pressure:
37.0
37.1
C
C
756.4 mmHg
127 Minutes to Next Auto-Cal

System Status Screen
Calibration flow time

Analysis flow time
Air bath temperature
Preheater temperature
Barometric pressure
Time until next Auto-Cal
Percent reagent remaining in reagent pack (optional display)
Press ENTER for next screen to continue the cycle.

Press CLEAR to exit.
3-22
3 Operation
3.13 Reagent Management System Overview
The Reagent Management System consists of the reagent pack cartridge and the analyzer
program that accepts the information from the cartridge.
The Reagent Management System:
Verifies that a correct, unexpired pack is used

Enters the standard concentrations into computer memory
Measures the percent of reagent remaining in the pack, prompting replacement when
the pack is low
Conserves pack reagents by extending the time between 2-point autocalibrations for
users who analyze samples infrequently.
To display the Reagent Pack screen, press MENU, 2, 7, 3.

REAGENT PACK
Reagent Pack No.
Lot No.
Expiration Date
Fluid Gauge
Calibration
pH
Na+
K+
Ca++/ClGlu
Lac
BUN
:
:
:
:
12345678
4206
Jun 95
84%
Standard
7.384
140.0
4.0
1.0
80.0
2.0
10.0
Concentration
6.840
75.0
10.0
2.0
200.0
6.0
50.0
Press ENTER to Initiate

Change Reagent Pack Procedure
Reagent Pack Screen
Reagent pack number

Lot number
Expiration date
Reagent remaining in percent
Concentrations of standards
Press ENTER to change the reagent pack.

Press CLEAR to exit.
3-23
3. Operation

3.14 Main Menu
The Main Menu is accessed from the Ready (Not Ready) For Analysis screen by pressing
MENU. The support menus are broken down into 5 categories on the Main Menu screen.
3. Operation
MAIN MENU
Patient Recall Menu
Maintenance Menu
Quality Control Menu
Setup Menu
Service Menu
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Main Menu Screen
By pressing 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, you select the Patient Recall Menu, Maintenance Menu, Quality
Control Menu, Setup Menu, or Service Menu. Each of these menus displays a list of numbered
functions for selection. Each menu and its function are explained in this manual.
The Main Menu (and the MENU key) can be bypassed by pressing the appropriate digit (1 for
Patient Recall Menu, 2 for Maintenance Menu and so forth) from the Ready For Analysis
screen.
3.15 Calibrating the Analyzer

The analyzer uses a 2-point calibration to set electrode slopes and to verify electrode
performance. Calibration occurs automatically at regular intervals, or, if desired, calibration
can be manually initiated. It is also possible to perform calibrations on subgroups, known as
subsystems, of electrodes. 1-point calibrations, used to monitor the effect of electrode drift, are
discussed in Appendix B.2.2. The calibration for oxygen saturation is discussed in Section 4.1.3.4.
3-24
3 Operation
3.15.1 Two-Point Calibration (Automatic and Manual)
3.15.1.1 Automatic Calibration (Auto-Cal)
Auto-Cal Interval Extension: Samples Analyzed During Auto-Cal Pending Period

If a sample is analyzed during the Auto-Cal Pending Period (the period just before an AutoCal), the time is extended for an additional 5 minutes. The Auto-Cal Pending Period can be
extended for a maximum of 30 minutes.
Auto-Cal Interval Extension: Reagent Management System
The Reagent Management System bases the time between Auto-Cals on the rate of sample
analyses. If you analyze samples frequently, the system performs Auto-Cals at routine 2-hour
intervals. If you analyze samples infrequently, the system prolongs the life of the reagent pack
by extending the interval between Auto-Cals. Auto-Cals can be extended in this way for a
maximum of 6 hours.
3.15.1.2 Manual Calibration

Manual calibrations may be initiated to calibrate any uncalibrated electrodes, calibrate the
system after maintenance, or calibrate SO2 (see Section 4.1.3.4).
The available manual calibration options are performed by the following:
CALIBRATE Key - A full calibration (all tests except for SO2) is initiated when this key
is pressed.
Calibration Options Screen - This screen is selected from the Maintenance Menu
(see Section 4.1.3) and lists the following possible calibration options:
Full Calibration
Gas Calibration
pH + Hct Calibration
Electrolyte Calibration
Metabolite Calibration
SO2% Calibration
3-25
3. Operation
The analyzer performs an automatic 2-point calibration, known as an Auto-Cal, 30 minutes

after power-up and at 2 to 6 hour intervals thereafter. The 2 ways that these Auto-Cal intervals
can be extended are as follows:

3.16 Quality Control Menu
The Quality Control Menu is accessed from the Main Menu. This menu allows access to
reports and manipulation of Daily and Month-to-Date data.
3. Operation
Definitions:
Daily Statistics - All QC samples stored since the last Move Daily Data to Month-to-Date was
performed. A day may represent a shift or multiple days. Setting Move Daily Data to Monthto-Date to auto (in QC Setup) insures that the daily data accumulation begins at midnight of
the current day.
Month-to-Date (M-T-D) Statistics - Cumulative statistics since the last Erase Month-to-Date Data
was performed. Month-to-Date statistics are simply cumulative statistics that can be cleared
on demand. Setting Erase Month-to-Date Data to auto (in QC Setup) insures that the Monthto-Date accumulated data begins on the first day of the current month.
Cumulative Statistics - A running accumulation of mean, SD (standard deviation), CV%
(coefficient of variance in percent), expected range, and n (number of samples) for all stored
QC samples. The Cumulative Statistics cannot be reset except by changing to a new control.
A. To access the Quality Control Reports screen from the Main Menu, press 3,1, or from
the Ready for Analysis screen, press the QC key.
NOTE: If passwords are enabled, the Password Required screen is displayed first.
A complete screen map of all QC screens is in Appendix E.
B. From this screen you have 9 options:
1. Display Summary Statistics for Test - This report will display the Summary
Statistics screen, which contains Daily, Month-to-Date, and Cumulative
Statistics for a single control and test.
a. Press 1.
b. Choose a control by pressing the corresponding number on the
keypad.
c. If blood gas or SO2% control is selected, the next screen is
displayed. Select a test to be viewed.
d. The Summary Statistics screen appears after a test is selected or
directly after a hematocrit control is selected. This screen gives
the Daily, Month-to-Date, and Cumulative Statistics for a
single control and test.
e. From this screen, you can view different controls for the test
selected by pressing the up () or down () arrow key. To view
a different test for a selected control, press the right () or left
() arrow key.
f. To print the results of the selected control and test, press PRINT.
3-26
3 Operation
3. Display Cumulative Statistics for Control - This report will display the
Cumulative Statistics for Control screen, which contains cumulative mean,
SD, CV%, expected range, and n for all tests for the selected control.
a. Press 3.
b. Choose a control by pressing the corresponding number on the
keypad.
c. From this screen, you can view different control results by
pressing the up () or down () arrow key. All applicable tests
are displayed for the selected control.
d. To print the Cumulative Statistics of the selected control, press
PRINT.
4. Print Daily QC Analysis Log - Press 4 for a printout of all QC samples (not
statistics) stored since the last Move Daily Data to Month-to-Date. Includes
date, time, results, and expected ranges. Maximum storage limit is 169 QC
samples. If the storage area is not cleared (by moving daily data to Monthto-Date), QC sample #170 will erase QC sample #1 etc.
5. Print Daily QC Summary Graphs - This report is printed from the Daily QC
Summary screen.
a. Press 5.
b. Choose all tests for which you want results printed by pressing
the corresponding numbers on the keypad.
c. Press ENTER to print the Daily QC Summary Graphs, a
graphical printout of the mean and range of all QC samples not
yet moved to the Month-to-Date statistics.
On the printout, a left or right arrow indicates a data point
outside of the printable range. Left and right brackets indicate
the lower and upper results recorded (range). The asterisk
indicates the mean of the recorded results. If a range indicator
(bracket) and the mean indicator (asterisk) have the same value,
only the asterisk will be printed. An asterisk without any
brackets indicates a single data point (n=1).
3-27
3. Operation
2. Display Cumulative Statistics for Test - This report will display the Cumulative
Statistics for Test screen, which contains the cumulative mean, SD, CV%,
expected range, and n for all controls for that test.
a. Press 2.
b. Choose a test by pressing the corresponding number on the
keypad.
c. To view results of a different test, press the right () or left ()
arrow key.
d. To print the Cumulative Statistics of the selected test, press
PRINT.

6. Print Month-to-Date Statistics by Control - Press 6 to print only the Month-toDate Cumulative Statistics for all tests in all controls. The printout includes
mean, SD, CV%, n, and expected range for each test.
3. Operation
7. Print Month-to-Date Statistics by Test - This report will print for all controls
the Month-to-Date statistics for all tests selected.
a. Press 7.
b. Choose all tests for which you want results printed by pressing
the corresponding numbers on the keypad.
c. Press ENTER to print the Month-to-Date Cumulative Statistics
report. The printout includes mean, SD, CV%, n, and expected
range for each test (all controls).
8. Print Levey-Jennings Graphs - to display the Levey-Jennings screen.
a. Press 8.
b. Choose all tests for which you want graphs of the daily mean
printed by pressing the corresponding numbers on the keypad.
c. Press ENTER to print the Levey-Jennings Graphs. This printout includes expected range, cumulative mean, SD, and 2SD
range around the cumulative mean for each selected test.
0. Cancel Print-out - Press 0 to cancel printing.
3.16.1 Running QC Samples

NOTE: If QC is required on all tests (Mandatory QC mode only), meaning
QC is past due on at least one level of control for each test, the system
becomes NOT READY, and the status message, QC Analysis Required, is
displayed. Pressing ANALYZE automatically displays the QC Analysis
screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3-28
Press ANALYZE.
Press QC to display the QC Analysis screen.
Select the appropriate control level.
Present the sample to the probe.
Status Indicators:
Empty - Control not in use.
Incomplete - Lot#, valid expiration date, and at least one range must be set
up to be complete.
Active - Control is properly set up.
3 Operation
Due - In Reminder mode, this indicates that control needs to be run. In
Mandatory mode, this indicates the 30 minute period prior to causing QC
lockout.
Required - In Mandatory mode only, this indicates that QC must be run in
order to display results.
NOTE: If the analyzer is unattended when QC results are ready, press

PATIENT DATA to display results.
8. After storing selected results, they are automatically printed.
3.16.2 Proficiency Samples

Press ANALYZE, QC, then select Proficiency Sample. The sample type will be automatically
marked Survey. No offsets will be applied to the results.
3.16.3 Override Mandatory QC Analysis

If it is imperative that a sample be analyzed when QC is required, press 0 in the QC Analysis
screen, enter the supervisor password, and proceed to analyze the sample. This procedure must
be repeated for each override instance.
3.16.4 QC Key Pressed in Error

If QC is pressed in error after ANALYZE during a patient sample analysis, select Patient
Sample Analysis to restore the sample type to normal samples.
3-29
3. Operation
5. After QC sample analysis, results are displayed. Choose to save all, selected, or no
results.
6. Enter the number next to each test to change the storage selection from STORE to
DISCARD.
7. Press ENTER to store selected results in Daily Statistics. Press CLEAR to discard all
results. Results remain available until ANALYZE is pressed again.

3.17 Analysis
This section describes how to analyze different types of samples and how to perform routine
operation.
3. Operation
3.17.1 Analyzing Samples

The default analysis mode test panel is "Full Panel". To change the test panel from the Ready
for Analysis screen, press TEST SELECT. The Test Panels screen is displayed. There are up
to 6 panel options for tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Full Panel
Blood Gas
Blood Gas Plus
Pulmonary
Electrolyte
Metabolite
All tests
pH, PCO2, and PO2
pH, PCO2, and PO2, SO2%, and Hct
pH, PCO2, and PO2, SO2%, Lac and Hct
Na, K, Ca/Cl
Glu, BUN, and Lac
Press the appropriate panel number. Only the panel selected is reported, the others are
suppressed. Any test that was suppressed in setup blinks on/off if it is included in the selected
panel. This alerts you that this test is suppressed and cannot be unsuppressed with this screen.
Analysis begins when the ANALYZE button is pressed. Once the sample is accepted, the test
panel is frozen and cannot be unsuppressed during the analysis.
TEST PANELS
1
2
3
4
5
6
Full
Blood Gas
Blood Gas Plus
Pulmonary
Electrolyte
Metabolite
pH
PCO2
PO2
SO2%
Hct
Na+
K+
Ca++/Cl-
Lac
BUN
Press CLEAR to exit screen.
Test Panels Screen
3-30
Glu
3 Operation
3.17.2 Three Ways of Running Samples, Based On Sample and Container Type
Samples can be analyzed from syringes, vacuum tubes, sample cups, capillaries, or expired air
bags as follows. A minimum of 225 L of sample is required for whole blood, serum, and
plasma samples.
1. Press ANALYZE. The sample probe extends and the CRT displays the Position
Sample for Aspiration screen.
2. Immerse the probe in the sample (syringe shown in Figure 3.6) and press ANALYZE
a second time to aspirate. Do not allow the Sample probe to touch the base of the syringe
plunger or the bottom of the sample cup or tube.
NOTE: Press ANALYZE within 45 seconds after initially pressing ANALYZE

(Step 1).
3-31
3. Operation
3.17.2.1 Running Syringe, Vacuum Tube, or Sample Cup Samples
POSITION SAMPLE FOR ASPIRATION
3. Operation
Press ANALYZE When Ready.

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Position Sample for Aspiration Screen
DWG #7-0-035A
PROBE
SYRINGE
Figure 3.6 Syringe Sample Presentation
3. When the probe retracts, withdraw the sample (if the sample is from a syringe, expel
the bubble of air from the syringe and cap it). The CRT displays the Sequence Start
screen.
3-32
3 Operation
NOTE: If no sample is detected or if a major flow error occurs during analysis, the system aborts the analysis and begins a flush cycle. If an insufficient
sample is detected, the system will finish the analysis and generate error
code 9C, Insufficient Sample.
PATIENT DATA
Analysis in Progress
nnn Seconds to Completion
Accession #
Patient I.D.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Temperature
xxxxx
C
Hemoglobin
xxxx
g/dL
Type
0-Arterial 1-Venous 2-Capillary
Time Drawn
xxxxxxxxx
xxxxx
%
FIO2:
Press TEST SELECT for Results Reporting.

Press CLEAR to Exit
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Patient Data Screen
e. Repeat Steps a through d as needed. Then press CLEAR to exit the screen
or PATIENT DATA to access the Measured Results Reporting screen as
in Step 5.
The Patient Data screen shows the state of the analysis (In Progress, Completed, Aborted, etc.)
and the time remaining to completion. If the analysis has finished when you exit Patient Data,
the current Patient Data values will be used to compute the Corrected and Calculated results,
and the Measured Results screen will be displayed. If the Auto Results Print mode is selected,
the results will be printed.
5. From the Patient Data screen, press TEST SELECT to access the Measured Results
Reporting screen. This screen allows you to change the setting on any of the measured
parameters or calculated results for a single patient test.
3-33
3. Operation
4. About 10 seconds after the Sequence Start screen is displayed, press PATIENT
DATA (if the screen was not set up to be automatically displayed) to access the
Patient Data screen. Enter the patient data, and, if necessary, change the Individual
and Calculated Results reporting as follows.
a. Press ENTER repeatedly to cycle through the choices to the desired choice.
b. Key in the appropriate value using the keypad.
c. Press ENTER to enter the value and also to move the cursor to the next
choice.
d. Press CLEAR to delete.

a. Press the function number of the measured parameter you wish to move to
the Off position. On is highlighted, off is not highlighted.
b. The parameter is now off and will not be reported. Calculated results based
on this value cannot be reported. Turn On a parameter that is Off by pressing
the appropriate function number of the desired measured parameter. The
parameter will now be highlighted.
3. Operation
NOTE: Test Select and Set Up Menu restriction functions define which tests
can be changed.
c. Repeat Step 5 until all desired parameters are changed.
nnn Seconds to Completion.
Accession #
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
pH
1
PCO2
2
PO2
3
Patient I.D.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SO2%
4
Hct
5
Na+
6
K+
7
Ca++/Cl-
8
Glu
9
Lac
.
BUN
0

Press PATIENT DATA for Entered Values.
30 Apr 95
15:45:45
Measured Results Reporting Screen

Accession #
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Hb
1
BE-ECF
2
BE-B
3
Patient I.D.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SBC
4
HCO3
5
TCO2
6
O2Ct
7
A
8
AaDO2
9
a/A
.
P5O
0
PO2/FI
-

30 Apr 95
15:45:45
ABG Calculated Results Reporting Screen
3-34
3 Operation
6. Press TEST SELECT to display the Gas Calculated Results Reporting screen.
7. Repeat Step 5 until all desired tests are changed.
8. Press TEST SELECT to display the Electrolyte Calculated Results Reporting screen.
9. Repeat Step 5 until all desired tests are changed.
10. Press CLEAR to exit this screen and the Patient Data screens.
11. Measured results are displayed upon sequence completion, and measured and
calculated results are printed out. See Figure 3.7.

Accession #
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
nCa++
1
Osm
2
Patient I.D.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

30 Apr 95
15:45:45
Electrolyte Calculated Results Reporting Screen for the Ultra I, J, K Analyzers

Accession #
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Osm
1
An.Gap
2
Patient I.D.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

30 Apr 95
15:45:45
Electrolyte Calculated Results Reporting Screen for the Ultra F, G, H Analyzers
3-35
3. Operation
NOTE: Any results suppressed in the Set Up Menu or the Measured Results
Reporting screen will not be displayed or printed.

Acc. #
I.D. #
MEASURED RESULTS
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
Sample # nnnnn
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
3. Operation
Corrected to 123.4
pH
7.369
PCO2
43.3
mmHg
PO2
100.1
mmHg
SO2%
98
Hct
48.0
%
123.4
mmol/L
Na+
K+
1.2
mmol/L
mmol/L
Ca++/Cl- 1.27
Glu 123.4
mg/dL
Lac
1.2
mmol/L
BUN
1.2
mmol/L
Press ENTER for Calculated Results.
Measured Results Screen
ABG CALCULATED RESULTS

Acc. #: nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
Sample # nnnnn
I.D. #: iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
BE-ECF
BE-B
SBC
HCO3
TCO2
O2Ct
A
AaDO2
a/A
P50
PO2/FI
Hb
+12.3
+12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
123.4
123.4
123.4
12.3
12.34
12.3
mmol/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mL/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mg/dL
mmol/L
mmol/L
Press ENTER for Next Results Screen.

Measured Results (Patient Temperature and 37.0 C) Screen
3-36
3 Operation
NOTE: nCa++ only

appears on the
screens of the Ultra
I, J, K Analyzers.
ELECTROLYTE CALCULATED RESULTS

Acc. #: nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
Sample # nnnnn
I.D. #: iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
nCa++
Osm
12.34
123.
mmol/L
mOsm
3. Operation
Press ENTER for Next Results Screen.

Calculated Results Screen
12.
13.
Press ENTER to redisplay the measured results, if desired.

To recalculate results, enter a new patient temperature or hemoglobin or both.
Entering a new patient temperature will calculate new pH, PCO2, and PO2 values.
Entering a new hemoglobin value will recalculate parameters dependent on
hemoglobin.
a. If the Measured or Calculated Results screen is displayed, continue with
Step b. If it is no longer displayed, press PATIENT DATA and continue
with Step b.
b. From the Measured or Calculated Results screen, press PATIENT DATA
to display the Patient Data entry screen.
c. Press ENTER repeatedly to cycle to the desired choice.
d. Key in the appropriate value using the keypad.
e. Press ENTER to enter the value and also to move the cursor to the next
choice.
f. Repeat Steps c through e as needed.
g. Press CLEAR to display the recalculated results.
14.
Press CLEAR to return to the Ready For Analysis screen.
3-37

Stat Profile Ultra
Analyzer ID 22
Operator ID ___
30 Apr 96
12:08
3. Operation
Sample #
Accession #
Patient I.D.
Time of Analysis
Time Drawn
Sample Type
Patient Temperature
30 Apr 96
12:05
Arterial
37.0 C
Stat Profile Ultra

Analyzer ID 22
Operator ID ___
30 Apr 96
12:20
Sample #
Accession #
Patient I.D.
Time of Analysis
Time Drawn
Sample Type
Patient Temperature
pH
PCO2
PO2
7.373
39.1
mmHg
159.3
mmHg
12:15
Arterial
37.0 C
Measured to
Corrected to 37.0 C
pH
PCO2
PO2
3
021296
82.5901
30 Apr 96
37.0 C
7.357
42.6
mmHg
96.3
mmHg
Corrected to 37.0 C
SO2%
Hct
? 2.
Error
Na+
K+
Ca++
Glu
Lac
BUN
159.4
5.71
1.57
80.
1.0
10.
mmol/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mg/dL
mg/dL
mg/dL
Calculated Results
BE-ECF
BE-B
SBC
HCO3TCO2
O2Ct
A
AaDO2
a/A
P50
Hb
nCa++
Osm
- 6.4
- 3.7
22.3
24.2
73.4
16.5
0.8
? 0.7
1.39
314.
mmol/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mL/dL
mmHg
mmHg
64 Hct TOO Low

95 SO2% CALC. Hct
7.357
42.6
mmHg
96.3
mmHg
SO2%
Hct
? 3.
Error
Na+
K+
Ca++
Glu
Lac
BUN
139.4
3.76
1.07
194.
2.8
27.
mmol/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mg/dL
mg/dL
mg/dL
Calculated Results
mmHg
g/dL
mmol/L
mOsm/kg
ERRORS
pH
PCO2
PO2
BE-ECF
BE-B
SBC
HCO3TCO2
O2Ct
A
AaDO2
a/A
P50
Hb
nCa++
Osm
- 1.7
- 0.4
24.0
25.3
95.6
mmol/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mL/dL
mmHg
mmHg
1.0
? 0.9
1.05
289.
mmHg
g/dL
mmol/L
mOsm/kg
ERRORS
64 Hct TOO Low
95 SO2% CALC. Hct
Figure 3.7 Sample Analysis Printouts
3-38
3 Operation
3.17.2.2 Running Capillary Samples
NOTE: Use a capillary tube of at least 225 microliters delivery capacity.
DWG #7-0-034A
CAUTION: In the following step, ensure that the capillary-adapter unit remains in line with the probe. Misalignment may cause poor aspiration.
Figure 3.8 Capillary-Adapter Fitting
4. Press ANALYZE. When the sample probe retracts, allow the adapter to slide off the
sample probe. The CRT displays the Analysis in Progress screen.
NOTE: Press ANALYZE within 45 seconds after initially pressing ANALYZE

(from Step 2).
CAUTION: Do not touch the door during an analysis, electrode instability
could result.
5. Continue with Step 4 of the Running Syringe, Vacuum Tube, or Sample Cup Samples
(Section 3.17.2.1).
3-39
3. Operation
1. Remove the mixing flea then fit the Capillary Adapter to the tip of the capillary tube,
sliding the base of the adapter over one end of the capillary tube. See Figure 3.8.
2. Press ANALYZE. The sample probe extends and the CRT displays the Sample
Analysis screen.
3. Fit the adapter-capillary unit to the sample probe tip by allowing the capillary tube
and sample probe to meet flush. Hold the capillary in line with the sample probe.
Remove the end cap. Continue to hold the capillary for the next step.

3.17.2.3 Running Expired Gas Samples (PCO2 and PO2)
3. Operation
1. From the Ready For Analysis screen, press 2 (or Menu, 2) to display the Maintenance
Menu.
2. Press 1 to choose Alternate Analysis (Expired Gas).
The Expired Gas Analysis screen appears.
The probe extends.
3. Slide the bag over the tip of the sample probe, maintain slight pressure on the bag,
and proceed to Step 4.
4. Press ANALYZE. When the probe retracts, allow the probe to slide off the bag. The
Analysis in Progress screen is displayed.
NOTE: Press ANALYZE within 45 seconds after choosing Expired Gas (from
Step 2).
CAUTION: Do not touch the analyzers compartment door during an analysis,
electrode instability could result.
5. Continue with Step 4 of the Running Syringe, Vacuum Tube, or Sample Cup
Sampling procedure (Section 3.17.2.1).
NOTE: The Expired Gas Measured and Calculated results will not include
electrolytes, hematocrit, pH, glucose, and the associated results from the
Calculated Results screen.
EXPIRED GAS RESULTS

Acc. #: 123456789012345678901
Sample # 12345
I.D. #: 123456789012345678901
PATIENT RESULTS
Temp
37.0
PCO2
PO2
35.3
65.4
mmHg
mmHg
Expired Gas Analysis Patient Results Screen
3-40
4 Maintenance
4
Maintenance
The following sections provide detailed information and directions for these areas:
Section 4.1 - Calibration, Fluid/Gas Prime, and Flow Path Cleaning

Sections 4.2/4.3 - Scheduled and Routine Maintenance
Section 4.4 - Component Replacement (Non-Routine Maintenance)
other infectious agents. Handle all blood products and flow path components (wasteline, septum assembly, probe, flow cell, etc.) with care. Gloves and protective
4.1
Performing Maintenance Functions with the Maintenance Menu

Display the Maintenance Menu functions to access:
Expired Gas analysis

Flow Cell Light on or off
Calibration - full, gas, setting calibration gas values, etc.
Gas and Fluid Primes - bring gas or reagents into the system
Component Conditioning - conditioning of the flow path or electrodes
Flow Path Maintenance - to purge fluids from the flow path and to stop automatic
instrument cycles allowing work on the flow path; sample preheater cleaning to
remove protein from the sample preheater
Component replacements - reagent pack, harnesses, electrodes, etc.
Display the Maintenance Menu as follows:

1.
2.
From the Ready for Analysis screen, press MENU to display the Main Menu
screen.
Press 2 to display the Maintenance Menu screen. If the system is busy, access is not
allowed until the system is idle.
4-1
4. Maint.
A Maintenance Log (PN 10794) that includes performance records and a maintenance checklist
is supplied with your instrument. Use this log to record data for long-term performance
verification and to document maintenance.

MAINTENANCE MENU
1
2
Alternate Analysis (Expired Gas)

Off
Flow Cell Light
3
4
5
6
7
Calibration Option Menu

Fluid/Gas Prime Option
Component Conditioning Menu
Flow Path Maintenance Menu
Component Replacement Menu
4. Maint.
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Maintenance Menu Screen
3.
See Sections 4.1.1 to 4.1.7 to display menu screens. After displaying a screen, press
ENTER (or ANALYZE for the Flow Cell Conditioning and Sample Preheater
Cleaning functions) to initiate the function. If, before pressing ENTER, you wish
to exit any maintenance function, press CLEAR to return to the Maintenance Menu
screen. Press CLEAR again to return to the Main Menu screen. Press CLEAR once
more to return to Ready For Analysis screen.
4.1.1 Alternate Analysis (Expired Gas)

See Section 3.17.2.3 to run expired gas samples of PCO2 and PO2.
4.1.2 Flow Cell Light

When the flow cell door is closed, you have the option to have the flow cell light on or off. From
the Maintenance Menu screen, press 2 to turn the light on or off. If the flow cell light was
inadvertently left on, it will automatically be turn off during an analysis or calibration.
4-2
4 Maintenance
4.1.3 Calibration Options
Use this screen to perform full or individual calibrations. As a time saver, a 2-point calibration
of gas, pH/hematocrit, electrolytes, metabolites (glucose, lactate, BUN), and SO2 subsystems
can be done whenever you do not need calibration of all electrodes. From the Calibration
Options screen press the appropriate number for a subsystem calibration. A subsystem
calibration is commonly used when maintenance is performed on an electrode, when new
reagents or gases have been introduced to the system, for electrode performance verification,
or for troubleshooting.
NOTE: Performing a subsystem calibration does not reset the autocalibration

timer. Only a full calibration resets the timer, and only a full calibration or
electrolytes/glucose/lactate/BUN calibration updates the calibration flow time.
Press 3 from the Maintenance Menu to display the Calibration Options screen.
To initiate a calibration option, press the number of the calibration type you want.
The Sequence Start screen will appear. To exit, press CLEAR; to start, press
ENTER. After a 15 second gas purge, the specific calibration procedure will
continue. Instrument cycles are shut down for 15 minutes, At which time the
sequence ends; the Ready for Analysis screen is displayed and normal operation
resumes.
CALIBRATION OPTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
Full Calibration
Gas Calibration
SO2% Calibration
Calibration Gases
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Calibration Options Screen
4-3
4. Maint.
1.
2.

4.1.3.1 Manual or Full Calibration
A full 2-point calibration can be run at any time. A full calibration resets the autocalibration
timer. To perform a full calibration, press CALIBRATE or press 1 from the Calibration
Options screen. The CRT displays the Sequence Start screen. Press ENTER to start calibration.
SEQUENCE START
Full Calibration
4. Maint.
Start Sequence?
Press ENTER to Start Sequence.

30 Apr 95
15:43:10
Sequence Start Screen
4.1.3.2 Terminating Calibrations

A calibration can be terminated to perform a stat analysis. In this case, the previous calibration
slopes are used for analysis. The limitations are as follows:
4-4
The analyzer needs 30 seconds to prepare for an analysis after a terminated

calibration. Since terminating a calibration with less than 30 seconds left would
require more time than not terminating the calibration, the analyzer disallows
terminating a calibration under the 30 second limit.
An Auto-Cal cannot be terminated once the 30 minute, Auto-Cal Pending Period
limit has been reached.
At least 1 full calibration must have been completed in order to establish slope
values for use in a terminated procedure. Therefore, the first calibration performed
after a power-up or reset cannot be terminated.
4 Maintenance
Terminate a calibration as follows:
1.
2.
If the calibration progress screen is not displayed, press CLEAR repeatedly until
it is displayed.
Press CLEAR, ENTER to terminate the calibration.
4.1.3.3 Cal I
4.1.3.4 Oxygen Saturation Calibration

Using oxygen Saturation Calibrators Multipack, calibrate the SO2% fiber optics monthly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
From the Calibration Options screen, press 6 to display the SO2% Calibration
screen.
Follow the directions on the screen.
Press ANALYZE when ready to aspirate Standard #1.
Press ANALYZE when ready to aspirate Standard #2.
4-5
4. Maint.
A single-point calibration (Cal I) is performed automatically at 30 or 45 minute intervals (user

selected). The single-point calibration is independent of analysis mode or sampling frequency.
This calibration cannot be delayed or stopped. To set the time interval, press MENU, 4,
password, ENTER, 2, 2. The Calibration Configuration screen should now be displayed. Press
1 to toggle between 30 and 45 minutes.

4.1.4 Fluid/Gas Prime Options
Use this screen after changing the gas cylinders to prime the system with Gases A and B or after
changing the reagent pack and after performing other replacement and maintenance procedures. Aborting a prime will cause a flush sequence to occur before the Ready For Analysis
screen is displayed. This screen is also for purging or priming the flow path.
1.
2.
4. Maint.
3.
4.
Press 4 from the Maintenance Menu to display the Fluid/Gas Prime Options screen.
Press the number of the desired option. Press the FUNCTION key and the number
if a calibration is also desired. This starts the sequence. To abort press CLEAR.
A progress screen indicates the time remaining to completion.
After completion, the Ready for Analysis screen is displayed.
FLUID/GAS PRIME OPTIONS
Fluid Prime
Gas Prime
Combined Gas and Fluid Prime
Flow Path Purge
Flow Path Prime
Use FUNCTION Key with Selection to

calibrate automatically after procedure
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Fluid/Gas Prime Options Screen
4.1.5 Flow Path Cleaning

Use the Flow Path Maintenance screen to clean the sample preheater or to deproteinize the
sample preheater. Terminating a flow path cleaning will trigger a flush sequence before the
Ready For Analysis screen is displayed. Start a flow path cleaning as follows:
Press 6 from the Maintenance Menu to display the Flow Path Maintenance screen.
4-6
4 Maintenance
FLOW PATH MAINTENANCE
Sample Preheater Cleaning Procedure
Sample Preheater Deproteinizing Procedure
Flow Path Maintenance
Press FUNCTION Key with Selection to

calibrate automatically after procedure
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
4. Maint.
Flow Path Cleaning Screen
4.1.5.1 Cleaning with Preheater Cleaning Agent

This procedure should be performed when aggressive preheater cleaning is required. Otherwise, follow Section 4.1.5.2. The following are more detailed instructions than displayed on the
screen.
NOTE: The current action on the analyzer's screen is always highlighted. The
same action is boldfaced in this manual before the more detailed instructions.
NOTE: The screens are in a layered format. To see the entire format, pull
out the flow chart in Appendix E, 2.0 Maintenance.
Nova recommends using the Preheater Cleaning Agent (PN 11802) when the message, Clean
Sample Preheater, appears on the screen (see Section 5.2.7). To clean the sample preheater, the
analyzer aspirates cleaning solution into the sample preheater, where the solution dissolves
protein buildup.
CAUTION: Remove the glucose, BUN, and lactate electrodes before cleaning
with preheater cleaning agent. They may be damaged by direct contact with
the cleaning solution.
1.
2.
Fill a 2 mL sample cup 1/2-full with Cleaning Solution (PN 11802).

Press 1 (press FUNCTION key with 1 to calibrate automatically after procedure)
from the Flow Path Maintenance screen to initiate the Sample Preheater Cleaning
Procedure.
Flow Path Purge in progress.
Remove Metabolite Electrodes. Install Electrode Blanks. Close door.

3.
Open the door. Remove the glucose, BUN, and lactate electrodes from the flow cell.
4-7

4.
5.
*
Position Sample for Aspiration. Press ANALYZE When Ready..

6.
Immerse the probe into the cleaning solution sample and press ANALYZE. After
the probe retracts, the time remaining to completion is displayed. To stop the cycle,
press CLEAR.
Preheater Cleaning in progress.
Remove Electrode Blanks. Install Metabolite Electrodes. Close Door.

7.
4. Maint.
Insert electrode blanks in the glucose, BUN, and lactate chambers and close the
door.
Press ENTER to acknowledge that the blanks are in place and to extend the probe.
After completion of the cycle, remove the electrode blanks and reinstall the
glucose, BUN, and lactate electrodes. Close the analytical compartment door.
Press ENTER.
Calibration in progress. (Only if FUNCTION key was pressed at the start of the procedure.)
4.1.5.2Routine Cleaning with Deproteinizing Solution

Nova recommends the use of Deproteinizing Solution (PN 12704) when routine cleaning is
required. (To perform a more aggressive cleaning, refer to Section 4.1.5.1.) Use, for example,
if flow problems persist, if air detectors become uncalibrated, if PO2 results are consistently
low, or whenever the system prompts you with a Clean Sample Preheater message (see Section
5.2.7). Deproteinizing Solution is a specially formulated solution for cleaning of the sample
preheater. It is necessary to remove the BUN electrode from the flow cell, however, it is not necessary
to remove the glucose or lactate electrodes from the flow cell.
1.
2.
Remove BUN Electrode. Install Electrode Blank. Close door.

3.
4.
5.
Open the door. Remove the BUN electrode from the flow cell.
Insert an electrode blank into the BUN chamber and close the door.
Press ENTER to extend the probe.
Position Sample for Aspiration. Press ANALYZE when Ready.

6.
4-8
Open an ampule of Deproteinizing Solution (PN 12704).

Press 2 from the Flow Path Maintenance screen to initiate the Sample Preheater
Deproteinizing Procedure screen. (Press FUNCTION with 2 to calibrate automatically after the procedure.)
Immerse the probe into the cleaning solution sample and press ANALYZE. After
the probe retracts, the time remaining to completion is displayed. To stop the cycle,
press CLEAR.
4 Maintenance
*
Preheater Cleaning in progress.
Remove Electrode Blank. Install BUN Electrode. Close Door.

7.
After completion of the cycle, remove the electrode blank and reinstall the BUN
electrode. Close the analytical compartment door. Press ENTER.
Calibration in progress. (Only if FUNCTION key was pressed at the start of the procedure.)
4.1.6 Calibration Gases

Display this screen to set the instrument's calibration gases percentage values. Enter the gas
percent as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
From the Maintenance Menu, press 3, 7 to display the Calibration Gases screen.
Press ENTER repeatedly to cycle the cursor (appearing to the right of the values)
through the allowed values.
Key in the gas composition.
Press ENTER to replace the original value with the new default value. To cancel
an entry, press CLEAR instead of pressing ENTER.
After changed, press CLEAR to return to the Maintenance Menu, press CLEAR
again to return to the Main Menu, then press CLEAR again to return to the Ready
for Analysis screen.
CALIBRATION GASES
Set Gas A CO2 %:

Set Gas A O2 %:
5.0 %
20.0 %
Set Gas B CO2 %:

Set Gas B O2 %:
10.0 %
0.0 %
Press ENTER to Skip Change.

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Calibration Gases Screen
4-9
4. Maint.
CAUTION: Correct calibration gas values are critical for valid calibration
and analysis.

4.2
Scheduled Maintenance
It is important to perform preventive maintenance as scheduled. The Maintenance Log (PN
10794) gives suggested schedules based on sample volume. Space is provided for slopes, flow
time, and control results in the Maintenance Log.
NOTE: Keep the analyzer compartment door closed as much as possible. This
will keep the components inside the analyzer compartment at 37 C and
minimize the time needed to recover temperature.
4.3
Maintenance Procedures
4. Maint.
Perform these procedures per the suggested schedule in the Maintenance Log and as needed.
Check off procedure performed in the Maintenance Log.
CAUTION: In the following procedures, whenever the sample probe is in

position 9 (full extension) do not open or close the analyzers compartment
door. Probe damage will occur if the door is opened or closed.
4.3.1 Component Conditioning

Use this screen to condition the flow cell and sodium electrode.
COMPONENT CONDITIONING MENU
Condition Flow Cell
Condition Na+ Electrode
Press FUNCTION with Selection to

calibrate automatically after procedure.
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Component Conditioning Menu Screen
4-10
4 Maintenance
4.3.1.1 Flow Cell Conditioning
The flow cell is conditioned with whole blood after periods of inactivity, with infrequent
sample analysis, after cleaning, or after electrode maintenance. The instrument aspirates blood
into the flow cell, holds it for 5 minutes, then flushes the flow cell. Condition the flow cell as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
4.3.1.2 Sodium Conditioning

The following are more detailed instructions than displayed on the screen.
NOTE: The current action on the analyzer's screen is always highlighted.

The same action is bold-faced in this manual before the more detailed
instructions.
1.
2.
From the Maintenance Menu screen, press 5 to display the Component Conditioning Menu.
Press 2 to display the Na+ Conditioning screen. (Press FUNCTION with 2 to
calibrate automatically after the procedure is completed.)
Remove Electrode. Condition Na+ 2 min. Install electrode & Plug in.
3.
4.
Unplug the Na+ electrode from the rack. Unclip the Na+ electrode and remove it.
Fill the Electrode Conditioning Holder (PN 09458) 1/4-full of Na/pH Conditioning
Solution (PN 06856).
4-11
4. Maint.
5.
Fill a 2 mL sample cup 1/2-full with whole blood.

Press 5 from the Maintenance Menu to display the Component Conditioning Menu
screen.
Press 1 to condition the flow cell and to extend the probe. (Press FUNCTION with
1 to calibrate automatically after the procedure is completed.)
Immerse the probe in blood and press ANALYZE. After the probe retracts, the
Flow Cell Conditioning in Progress screen is displayed. To stop the cycle, press
CLEAR.
After completion of the cycle, the Ready for Analysis screen is displayed.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
*
Insert the Na+ electrode into the holder, make sure that the glass tip is immersed in
the conditioning solution.
Remove the electrode from the solution and rinse the tip with deionized water. Dry
the electrode with a lint-free tissue. Be careful not to break the glass tip.
Rinse the electrode conditioning holder thoroughly with deionized water.
Install the Na+ electrode by sliding the electrode body into the flow cell until the
electrode clips into place.
Plug the Na+ electrode into the rack and press ENTER.
Temperature Re-equilibration in progress.
NOTE: The system needs to reach 37 C.

*
Calibration in progress. (Only if FUNCTION key was pressed at start of the procedure.)
4. Maint.
10.
Press CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Maintenance Menu.
4.3.2 Septum Assembly Inlet Port Cleaning
DWG #5-0-054B
Whenever necessary, clean the septum assembly inlet port using a clean swab moistened with
deionized water. See Figure 4.1.
Figure 4.1 Septum Assembly Inlet Port Cleaning
4-12
4 Maintenance
4.3.3 Gas Humidifier Well Filling
Fill the humidifier chambers with deionized water to the fill lines on the chamber. See Figure 4.2.
When replacing the caps, ensure that they are correctly seated and finger-tighten to prevent gas leakage.
Do not overtighten or gas will leak out of caps.
If the water becomes cloudy, withdraw the water with a syringe, clean the chamber walls with
a swab, then refill the chambers.
In unusual circumstances, bacteria may grow in the chamber. If so, you may clean the chamber
walls with a swab moistened in alcohol.
4. Maint.
DWG #5-0-033B
FILL TO HERE
Figure 4.2 Gas Humidifier Well Fill Levels
4-13

4.4
Component Replacement
The electrodes, tubings, and reagent pack are replaced through the Component Replacement
screen. From the Maintenance Menu, press 7 to display this screen. Select the component to
be replaced and proceed.
COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
Electrode Replacement Menu
Tubing Replacement Menu
Replace Reagent Pack
4. Maint.
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Component Replacement Screen
4.4.1 Sodium, Potassium, Chloride, and Calcium Electrode Replacement


instructions.
1.
4-14
From the Component Replacement screen, press 1 to display the Electrode

Replacement screen. Then press 2 to display the ISE Change Procedure.
Remove electrode & washer. Dry chamber. Condition, remembrane or replace electrode as required.
Replace washer, reinstall electrode & plug in. Close door.
4 Maintenance
2.
3.
4.
Open the door and locate the electrode to be replaced.

Unplug the electrode.
Unclip the electrode and remove it from the flow cell. See Figure 4.3.
Pinch Front and Rear of
Electrode Clip
W
R
Guide Pin
Electrode Chamber
Na
Ca
BUN
Figure 4.3 Electrode-Flow Cell Assembly
Remove the washer by hooking it with the hook end of the Washer Removal Tool
(PN 07157) and, with a lint-free tissue or swab, dry the electrode chamber and
washer thoroughly. If bubble hang up at the electrode tip was a problem or if other
problems suggest a bad washer, replace the washer. The sodium, glucose, and
lactate chambers do not contain washers.
Washer
Type
Thin,
Large Hole
No Washer
DWG #7-F-005A
Thin,
Large Hole
Part
Number
Electrode
Type
PN 08153
K+ / Cl-
Na+
PN 08153
Ca++ / K+
W
R
No Washer
BUN
No Washer
Glu
No Washer
Lac
Thin,
Small Hole
PN09796
pH
Thick,
Small Hole
PN 09797
PCO2
Thick,
Large Hole
PN 09798
PO2
Thick,
Large Hole
PN 09798
SO2
Washer
Washer
Removal
Tool
Flow Cell
Figure 4.4 Flow Cell Washers and Insertion
4-15
4. Maint.
5.

6.
7.
Position the correct electrode washer (from Kit PN 08153 for K+, Ca++, or Cl-) on
the broad end of the washer removal tool, see Figure 4.4, and insert it into the flow
cell, seating it against the back wall of the chamber.
Close the door.
NOTE: In the following steps, keep the door closed as much as possible to
minimize time needed to recover operating temperature.
8.
Precondition the specific electrode or, for the chloride electrode, replace the cap as
follows.
Potassium and Calcium

a.
4. Maint.
b.
c.
Holding the electrode tip downwards, with a wrist-snapping motion shake

the electrode down to move air bubbles to the back of the electrode.
Without raising the electrode tip above the horizontal (to avoid possibly
moving air bubbles back to the tip), insert the electrode into the flow cell
chamber by sliding the guide pin and electrode body into the flow cell until
the electrode clips into place.
Plug the cable into the rack.
Chloride
a.
b.
Unscrew the old chloride cap from the chloride body and dispose of the cap.
Check the washer on the body of the electrode for damage and replace with
the spare washer from the chloride cap kit if necessary.
Fill a new Chloride Cap (PN 08129) to the top edge with Chloride Internal
Filling Solution (PN 00099). See Figure 4.5.
1
Electrode
Body
Chloride
Cap
DWG #7-M-006A
Chloride
Internal
Filling
Solution
Figure 4.5 Chloride Cap Filling and Installation
4-16
4 Maintenance
c.
d.
Insert the Electrode Body (PN 06005) straight down into the filled cap and
screw the cap onto the electrode body.
Dry the electrode with a lint-free tissue, take care to avoid touching the tip.
Check that there are no bubbles in the electrode. If there are bubbles,
unscrew the cap, add more filling solution, and repeat Steps c and d.
Insert the electrode into the flow cell chamber by sliding the electrode body
into the flow cell until the electrode clips into place.
e.
f.
Sodium
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
9.
*
Press ENTER.
Flow Cell Conditioning in progress.

10.
Condition with whole blood.
NOTE: All electrodes must be in the flow cell during a Flow Cell Conditioning cycle.
a.
b.
c.
*

Insert the probe into the sample.
Press ANALYZE to aspirate the blood.
Calibration in progress.
11.
Press CLEAR, CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Maintenance Menu.
4.4.2 pH Electrode Replacement

1.
2.
3.
4.
From the Maintenance Menu, press 6 to display the Flow Path Maintenance screen.
Then select 3, Flow Path Maintenance.
Open the door and locate the pH electrode.
Unplug the electrode.
Unclip the electrode and remove it from the flow cell. See Figure 4.6.
4-17
4. Maint.
Fill the Electrode Conditioning Holder (PN 09458) 1/4 full with Na/pH
Conditioning Solution (PN 06856).
Insert the electrode into the holder, make sure that the glass tip is fully
immersed in the conditioning solution. Wait 2 minutes.
Remove the electrode from the solution and rinse the tip with deionized water.
Dry the electrode with a lint-free tissue. Be careful not to break the glass tip.
Rinse the holder thoroughly with deionized water.
Install the Na+ electrode by sliding the guide pin and electrode body into the
flow cell until the electrode clips into place.
Plug the electrode cable into the electrode rack.

Na

Electrode Clip
K
BUN
Glu
pH
Lac
DWG #7-J-003A
PCO2
Guide Pin
Electrode Chamber
PO 2
SO2
4. Maint.
Figure 4.6 Electrode-Flow Cell Assembly
5.
Remove the washer by hooking it with the hook end of the Washer Removal Tool
(PN 07157) and, with a lint-free tissue or swab, dry the electrode chamber and
washer thoroughly. If bubble hang up at the electrode tip was a problem or if other
problems suggest a bad washer, replace the washer.
Washer
Type
Thin,
Large Hole
No Washer
DWG #7-F-005A
Thin,
Large Hole
Part
Number
Electrode
Type
PN 08153
K+ / Cl-
Na+
PN 08153
Ca++ / K+
No Washer
BUN
No Washer
Glu
No Washer
Lac
Thin,
Small Hole
PN09796
pH
Thick,
Small Hole
PN 09797
PCO2
Thick,
Large Hole
PN 09798
PO2
Thick,
Large Hole
PN 09798
SO2
Flow Cell
4-18
W
R
Washer
Washer
Removal
Tool
4 Maintenance
6.
7.
Position the electrode washer from Kit PN 09796 for pH on the broad end of the
washer removal tool, see Figure 4.7, and insert it into the flow cell, seating it against
the back wall of the chamber.
Close the door.
NOTE: In the following steps, keep the door closed as much as possible to
minimize time needed to recover operating temperature.
8.
9.
Press CLEAR, ENTER to terminate the Flow Path Maintenance sequence.
10. From the Maintenance Menu, press 5, Component Conditioning Menu. Then press
1, Condition Flow Cell.
a.
b.
c.

Insert the probe into the sample.
Press ANALYZE to aspirate the blood.
11. From the maintenance Menu, press 3, Calibration Options. Then press 3, pH
Calibration.
4.4.3 Glucose Electrode Membraning, Polishing, and Replacement


instructions.
4-19
4. Maint.
For a pH electrode which has been in use, condition with Na/pH Conditioning
Solution as follows:
a.
Fill the Electrode Conditioning Holder (PN 09458) 1/4 full with Na/pH
b.
Place the Electrode (PN 06013) into the cup so that the tip of the electrode
is immersed in the Na/pH Conditioning Solution.
c.
Wait 15 minutes.
d.
Remove the electrode from the cup and rinse with deionized water.
e.
Dry the electrode with a lint-free tissue. Be careful not to break the glass tip.
f.
Insert the electrode into the flow cell by sliding the guide pin and electrode
body into the flow cell until the electrode clips into place.
g.

NOTE: It is necessary to polish the glucose electrode if several membranes
go uncalibrated for low slope.
1.
From the Maintenance Menu, press 7 to display the Component Replacement

Menu. Press 1 to display the Electrode Replacement screen. Then press 3 to display
the Metabolite Electrode Change Procedure screen.
Remove electrode & dry chamber. Remembrane or replace electrode as required. Install electrode.
Close door.
4. Maint.
2.
3.
4.
Open the analyzers door and locate the glucose electrode.

Unclip the glucose electrode by pinching the front and rear of the clip and remove
it from the flow cell. Remove the used glucose membrane cap by pulling it straight
off the electrode body. Discard the used cap. If polishing the electrode, remove the
electrode cable from the electrode rack. If electrode polishing is not required, leave the
electrode plugged in and go to Step 7.
Polish the glucose electrode as follows:
a.
Use a clean, dry polishing card (yellow). Do not apply deionized water to the card.
b.
Hold the polishing card so that the tip of your index finger provides light
pressure against the back of the card.
Glu
CAUTION: Never polish the electrode on a

hard surface such as a bench top.
Figure 4.8 Glucose Electrode Tip Polishing
c.
Gently polish the electrode tip on the paper, move the tip in a circular
fashion for about 10 seconds. See Figure 4.8.
5.
Soak the electrode in Electrode Soaking Solution (PN 13409) for 2 minutes.
6.
Remove the electrode and rinse the electrode with deionized water. Then blot dry
the body of the electrode with lint-free tissue. Do not wipe the tip of the electrode.
7.
Gently push a new enzyme-membrane cap onto the electrode body without twisting
the cap (Figure 4.9).
8.
Dry the flow cell chamber with a lint-free tissue or swab.
9.
Insert the electrode assembly into the glucose flow cell; plug the cable into the rack.
10. Close the door and press ENTER.
*
4-20
Membrane equilibration in progress.
4 Maintenance
*
NOTE: If a new glucose membrane does not reach an operational slope

within 2 full calibrations, it may be necessary to replace the membrane again.
DW
Glu
G
#5
0
-0
-M
3B
4. Maint.
Figure 4.9 Replacing the Glucose Membrane Cap
4.4.4 Lactate Electrode Membraning, Polishing, and Replacement


instructions.
NOTE: It is necessary to polish the lactate electrode approximately once per
month or if several membranes go uncalibrated for low slope.
1.

Close door.
2.
3.
Open the analyzers door and locate the lactate electrode.

Unclip the lactate electrode by pinching the front and rear of the clip and remove
it from the flow cell. Remove the used lactate membrane cap by pulling it straight
off the electrode body. Discard the used cap. If polishing the electrode, remove the
electrode cable from the electrode rack. If electrode polishing is not required, leave the
electrode plugged in and go to Step 6.
4-21

4.
Polish the lactate electrode as follows:

a.
Place a few drops of deionized water on a clean piece of polishing paper.
b.
Hold the polishing paper so that the tip of your index finger provides gentle
pressure against the back of the paper.
c.
Lac
DWG
#5-M
-004
4. Maint.
Figure 4.10 Lactate Electrode Tip Polishing
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Soak the electrode in Nova Cleaning Solution (PN 11272) for a minimum of
5 minutes. Remove the electrode and rinse the tip thoroughly with deionized water.
Then blot dry with a lint-free tissue.
Gently push a new enzyme-membrane cap onto the electrode body. See Figure
4.11.
Insert the electrode into the flow cell, plug the cable into the rack.
Close the door and press ENTER.
DW
La
G
B
05
-0
#5
Figure 4.11 Replacing the Lactate Membrane Cap
4-22
Update to Rev. B (4/98)
4 Maintenance
4.4.5 BUN Electrode Membraning and Replacement

instructions.
1.

Close door.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open the analyzers door and locate the BUN electrode.

Unclip the BUN electrode by pinching the front and rear of the clip and remove it
from the flow cell.
Remove the used BUN membrane cap by pulling it straight off the electrode body.
Discard the used cap.
Gently push a new enzyme-membrane cap onto the electrode body. See Figure 4.12.
a.
Hold the electrode with the cap downward and with a wrist-snapping
motion, shake the electrode down to move air bubbles to the back of the
electrode.
DW
G#
5-1
0-0
05B
BUN
Figure 4.12 Replacing the BUN Membrane Cap
7.
8.
*
Insert the electrode into the flow cell, plug the cable into the rack.
NOTE: This is not necessary if only the BUN membrane was replaced. To
eliminate, press CLEAR.
*
4-23
4. Maint.

4.4.6 PCO2 Electrode Conditioning, Membraning, and Replacement

instructions.
4. Maint.
1.
Remove electrode & washer. Dry chamber. Polish if PO2. Remembrane or replace electrode as
required. Replace washer, reinstall electrode. Close door.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
4-24
From the Maintenance Menu, press 7 to display the Component Replacement Menu.
Press 1 to display the Electrode Replacement screen. Then press 1 to display the
PCO2/PO2 Electrode Change Procedure screen.
Open the door.

Unplug the electrode cable from the rack.
Remove the PCO2 Electrode (PN 07541) by pinching the front and rear of the
electrode clip and sliding it out of the flow cell.
Remove the PCO2 washer using the Washer Removal Tool (PN 07157 - hook the
washer with the hook end of the tool). With a lint-free tissue or swab, dry the
electrode chamber and washer thoroughly. If bubble hang up at the electrode tip
was a problem or if other problems suggest a bad washer, replace the washer (from
Kit PN 09797) and continue with Step 6; otherwise, reuse the washer in Step 6.
Position the thick, small-hole washer on the broad end of the washer removal tool.
See Figure 4.13. Align the groove on the washer removal tool with the flow cell
alignment pin. Insert the tool into the flow cell, seating the washer against the back
wall of the chamber. If membraning the electrode is unnecessary, go to Step 16 to
replace the electrode in the flow cell.
Thin,
Large Hole
PN 08153
Ca++
Thin,
Large Hole
PN 08153
Mg++
No Washer
Glu
No Washer
Lac
Thin,
Small Hole
PN09796
pH
Thick,
Small Hole
PN 09797
PCO2
Thick,
Large Hole
PN 09798
PO2
Thick,
Large Hole
PN 09798
SO2
W
R
Washer
Washer
Removal
Tool
4. Maint.
DWG #7-11-002D
4 Maintenance
Flow Cell
7.
Close the door.
CAUTION: Do not twist the electrode body or sleeve when assembling or

taking apart the electrode; slide the cap straight on or off in 1 quick motion to
avoid damaging the glass tip.
8.
Remove the PCO2 membrane cap unit from the electrode body by carefully pulling
it straight off (see Figure 4.14).
O2
DW
pC
-M
#5
06
-0
B
Figure 4.14 PCO2 Electrode Assembly Cap Removal
9.
Discard the used membrane cap.
4-25

10.
If the electrode is new or if you are performing a troubleshooting procedure,

condition the electrode as follows. Otherwise, continue with Step 11.
a.
Fill the Electrode Conditioning Holder (PN 09458) 1/2-full with PCO2
b.
Replace the sleeve on the electrode body (to protect the glass tip).
c.
Place the tip end of the electrode into the holder.
d.
Condition for 15 minutes.
e.
Remove the electrode from the holder, carefully remove the sleeve, and
rinse the sleeve and electrode tip thoroughly with deionized water. Rinse
the holder with deionized water.
f.
Dry the electrode tip and the sleeve with a lint-free tissue.
4. Maint.
NOTE: When assembling the electrode in the following steps, touch the
membrane cap on the edges only; avoid contact with the measuring surface
of the membrane cap.
11.
Fill a new membrane cap so that the bottom of the meniscus of the internal filling
solution (IFS) is at the fill line (just above the vent hole). See Figure 4.15.
DWG #5
-M-007A
Fill
to here
Figure 4.15 Fill To Line Above Vent Hole
CAUTION: In the following step, do not twist the electrode body or membrane
cap when assembling the electrode; slide the cap straight on in 1 quick
motion to avoid damaging the membrane.
12.
4-26
Align the groove on the membrane cap with the PCO2 label on the electrode (this
causes the vent hole to be on top when installed into the flow cell). Insert the
electrode body into the membrane cap and press down firmly to ensure a good seal.
See Figure 4.16. A small amount of filling solution may squirt out the vent hole.
If this happens, dry the outside of the cap thoroughly with a lint-free tissue or swab.
Carefully dry the measuring surface of the membrane with lint-free tissue.
You can extend the life of the PCO2 membrane by minimizing the evaporation of
IFS from the vent hole in the cap. Cover the vent hole of the cap with the adhesive
strip that Nova provides. Use a new adhesive strip after each membrane replacement.
When the electrode is held horizontally, a bubble extending almost the length of the
cap will appear. This bubble is necessary to allow for thermal expansion of the
filling solution after the electrode is inserted into the flow cell.
pCO 2
4 Maintenance
Firmly Insert
Electrode.
Dry Thoroughly.
Air Bubble
Vent Hole
pCO 2
pCO2
DWG #5-M-009B
13.
14.
15.
16.
Degas the electrode as follows:

a.
Hold the electrode with the cap downward and with a thumb over the fill
hole. With a wrist-snapping motion, shake the electrode down to move air
bubbles to the back of the electrode.
b.
With the electrode tip still downward, observe the tip for bubbles. If
bubbles are present, tap the electrode with a finger to loosen the bubbles and
again shake the electrode down. Repeat if necessary.
Dry the electrode with a lint-free tissue. Carefully dry the surface of the membrane
with a lint-free tissue or swab.
Open the door.
Insert the electrode into the flow cell as follows:
a.
Insert the electrode guide pin and electrode body into the flow cell, clip the
electrode into place.
b.
c.
4-27
4. Maint.
Figure 4.16 Electrode Membrane Cap Insertion

Ca

Electrode Clip
Mg
Glu
Lac
pH
PCO2
PCO2
PO2
Guide Pin
Electrode Chamber
4. Maint.
DWG #7-11-006C
SO2
Figure 4.17 PCO2 Electrode-Flow Cell Alignment

16.
Condition the flow cell.
a.
b.
c.
*
Gas Calibration in progress.

18.
19.
20.
4-28
Fill a 2 mL sample cup 1/2-full of whole blood.

Immerse the probe in the blood.
Press ANALYZE to aspirate the blood. Withdraw the cup when the probe
retracts.
Press CLEAR, CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Maintenance Menu.

If the electrode does not calibrate due to slope errors, remove air bubbles as follows:
a.
Perform Steps 2 through 4.
b.
Degas the electrode per Step 13. Do not add more filling solution.
c.
Open the door and reinsert the electrode into the flow cell per Step 16. Press
ENTER.
d.
From the Maintenance Menu, press 3, 2 to initiate a gas calibration and to
verify electrode performance.
If an error code 83, PCO2 Mem Overload, occurs during normal operation, suspect
a leak from the vent hole. Solve this as follows:
a.
Remove the electrode and washer and dry the washer, electrode, and
chamber thoroughly with a lint-free tissue or swab.
b.
Reinsert the electrode and washer in the instrument.
4 Maintenance
c.
From the Maintenance Menu, press 3, 2 to initiate a gas calibration and to

verify electrode performance. If the error code 83, PCO2 Mem Overload,
happens again, replace the cap (Steps 11 through 19).
4.4.7 PO2 Electrode Membraning, Polishing, and Replacement


instructions.
The following procedure explains how to membrane the electrode and how to polish the PO2
electrode.
1.

the PCO2/PO2 Electrode Change Procedure screen.
Remove electrode & washer. Dry chamber. Polish if PO2. Remembrane or replace electrode as
required. Replace washer, reinstall electrode. Close door.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open the door.

Unplug the electrode cable from the rack.
Unclip the PO2 Electrode (PN 11098) and remove from the flow cell.
Remove the PO2 washer using the Washer Removal Tool (PN 07157 hook the
washer with the hook end of the tool). Dry the flow cell chamber and washer with
a lint-free tissue or swab. If bubble hang up at the electrode tip was a problem or
if other problems suggest a bad washer, replace the washer (from Kit PN 09798)
and continue with Step 6; otherwise, reuse the washer in Step 6.
Position the thick, large-hole washer on the broad end of the washer removal tool
and insert it into the flow cell, seating it against the back wall of the chamber. See
Figure 4.18. If membraning the electrode is unnecessary, go to Step 12 to reinsert
the electrode in the flow cell.
4-29
4. Maint.
4. Maint.
DWG #7-11-002D

Thin,
Large Hole
PN 08153
Ca++
Thin,
Large Hole
PN 08153
Mg++
No Washer
Glu
No Washer
Lac
Thin,
Small Hole
PN09796
pH
Thick,
Small Hole
PN 09797
PCO2
Thick,
Large Hole
PN 09798
PO2
Thick,
Large Hole
PN 09798
SO2
Flow Cell
7.
Washer
Washer
Removal
Tool
Unscrew the used PO2 cap from the PO2 body and dispose of it. Check the washer
on the body of the electrode for damage and replace it with the spare washer from
the PO2 premembraned cap kit if necessary.
Polish the electrode as follows:
a.
Place a drop of PO2 Electrolyte Solution (PN 06554) on the polishing paper
(from kit PN 11099).
b.
Hold the PO2 polishing paper so that the tip of your index finger provides
light pressure against the back of the paper.
c.
pO 2
8.
W
R
DWG
#5-M
-010
Figure 4.19 PO2 Polishing the Electrode Tip
4-30
4 Maintenance
d.
Wipe the electrode tip with a lint-free tissue soaked in PO2 electrolyte
solution. See Figure 4.20.
pO 2
DWG #5-M-011B
Lint-free Tissue
Soaked in PO2 Solution
Figure 4.20 Wiping the Electrode Tip
Fill a new PO2 Premembraned Cap (PN 11099) only to the bottom of the threads
with PO2 Internal Filling Solution (PN 06554). Tap it gently to dislodge any air
bubbles on the membrane. See Figure 4.21.
DWG #5
-M-008A
Fill
to here
Figure 4.21 Filling the PO2 Membrane Cap
Insert the Electrode Body (PN 11098) straight down into the filled cap and screw
the cap onto the electrode body. See Figure 4.22.
pO 2
DWG #5-M-012B
10.
Figure 4.22 Tightening the Electrode Cap to the Body
11.
Dry the electrode with a lint-free tissue. Take care not to touch the tip.
4-31
4. Maint.
9.

12.
Insert the electrode into the flow cell by sliding the electrode body into the flow cell
until the electrode clips into place. See Figure 4.23.
Mg

Electrode Clip
Glu
Lac
pH
PO2
PCO2
PO2
SO2
Guide Pin
4. Maint.
DWG #7-11-001C
Electrode Chamber
Figure 4.23
13.
14.
*
PO2 Electrode-Flow Cell Alignment


15.
a.
b.
c.
*

16.
4-32

retracts.
If the electrode does not calibrate due to slope errors, remove air bubbles as follows:
a.
Open the door, remove the electrode, unplug the cable, and shake down the
electrode with a wrist-snapping motion to move air bubbles to the back of
the electrode.
b.
Reinsert the electrode into the flow cell, plug the electrode cable into rack,
and close the door.
c.
From the Maintenance Menu, press 3, 2 to start a gas calibration.
4 Maintenance
4.4.8 SO2 Maintenance (Periodically - every 3 months)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
4.4.9 Reference Electrode Replacement


instructions.
1.
From the Maintenance Menu, press 7 to display the Component Replacement Menu.
Press 1 to display the Component Replacement screen. Then press 4 to display the
Reference Electrode Change Procedure screen. Wait for gas flow to stop.
Disconnect W/R lines from Ref electrode. Rotate latch above electrode. Replace electrode. Reposition
latch. Attach tubing.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Open the door.

Disconnect the W/R-lines from the reference electrode.
Unplug the reference electrode from the rack.
Twist the retainer located on top of the reference electrode, turn the retaining block
to the side. See Figure 4.24.
Lift the used reference electrode up and out of the way of the flow cell.
Place the new Reference Electrode (PN 06025) on top of the flow cell, align the
electrode sides with the backplate sides. Ensure that the reference electrode
connector is seated properly on the flow cell interconnect tubing.
4-33
4. Maint.
7.
8.
From the Maintenance Menu, press 6 to display the Flow Path Maintenance screen.
Then select 3, Flow Path Maintenance.
Open the door and locate the SO2 cable.
To remove the cable, push the knurled ring in and turn it toward you until the cable
can be guided out.
Check the washer (PN 09798). Replace the washer if it looks deformed, cracked,
or worn.
Clean the cable surface with a lint-free tissue that is soaked with bleach. Rinse with
deionized water and blot dry.
Reinstall the washer. With the slot at the cable end toward you, reinstall the fiber
optic cable and turn the knurled ring away from you.
Press CLEAR, ENTER to terminate the Flow Path Maintenance sequence.
From the maintenance Menu, press 3. Then select 6, SO2 Calibration.
DWG #7-0-013A
Figure 4.24 Reference Electrode Replacement
4. Maint.
8.
9.
10.
*
Flow Check in progress. Watch flow path for proper flow.
Close door.
11.
4-34
Loosen the retaining block thumbscrew, center the retaining block in the depression on top of the electrode, and reset the retainer.
Attach the W/R-lines to the reference electrode and press ENTER.
Press ENTER.
4 Maintenance
4.4.10 Replace Pump Tubing

instructions.
The tubing segments that go around the pump can be replaced without replacing the complete
W/R-harness. The following procedure is for replacing these segments (PN 07575). To replace
the complete W/R-harness, see Section 4.4.11.
1.

Menu. Press 2 to display the Tubing Replacement screen.
TUBING REPLACEMENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Pump Tubing
Reagent/Septum Harness
W/R Harness
S line / probe
Flow Cell
Preheater
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Tubing Replacement Screen
Then press 1 to display the Pump Tubing Replacement Procedure screen.

*
Remove tubing from bypass valve. Disconnect R line from left pump fitting & W line from T connector.
2.
3.
Open the top cover to expose the fluids deck.

Remove the W-bypass tubing from the pump bypass valve. See Figure 4.25.
4-35
4. Maint.
NOTE: Pay special attention to the diagrams in this procedure. Reverse

installation of the W and R-tubing is one of the most frequent operator
errors.
4. Maint.
DWG #5-0-041B
Figure 4.25 Removing the W-Bypass Tubing From the Pump Bypass Valve
4.
Remove the R-tubing segment from the tubing support block as follows (Figure
4.26):
a.
Gently stretch the R-tubing and slide it out of the horizontal slot.
b.
Remove the R-tubing from the vertical slot.
DWG #5-0-035B
Figure 4.26 Removing the R-Tubing Segment From the Tubing Support Block
5.
4-36
Pull the R-tubing away from the pump.
4 Maintenance
6.
Disconnect the R-tubing segment from the R-line at the second tubing collar. See
Figure 4.27.
R TUBING SEGMENT
4. Maint.
DWG #5-0-037B
R LINE
Figure 4.27 Disconnecting the R-Tubing Segment From the R-Line
Remove the W-tubing from the tubing support block. See Figure 4.28.
a. Gently stretch the W-tubing and slide it out of the horizontal slot.
b. Remove the W-tubing from the vertical slot.
R
W
DWG #5-0-042C
7.
Figure 4.28 Removing the W-Tubing Segment From the Tubing Support Block
4-37

8.
Disconnect the W-tubing segment from the W-line at the second tubing collar. See
Figure 4.29. Press ENTER.
4. Maint.
DWG #5-M-014B
Figure 4.29 Disconnecting the W-Tubing Segment From the W-Line
Open door & detach tubing from reference electrode.

9.
10.
Open the door.

Disconnect the W/R-tubing from the reference electrode. See Figure 4.30.
W
R
DWG #7-0-017A
Figure 4.30 Disconnecting the W/R-Tubing From the Reference Electrode
11.
*
4-38
Pull W/R tubes and seals from rear of analytical chamber. Remove tubing from pump & discard.
4 Maintenance
12.
Loosen the white plugs and pull the W/R-tubing out of the back of the analyzer
compartment. See Figure 4.31.
DWG #5-0-043B
4. Maint.
Figure 4.31 Removing the W/R-Tubing From the Analytical Compartment
13.
Install new W pump tubing with seal at LEFT. Place section between T connectors in bypass valve,
Feed W tubing into analytical compartment & seat seal. Attach T connector to labeled W line.
14.
Press ENTER.
Install R line with seal at RIGHT. Feed R tubing into compartment & seat seal. Connect labeled R line
into pump fitting. Open door, attach tubing to reference. Close door.
15.
16.
Remove new W/R-tubing segments from their packages.

Find the W and R-holes in the back of the analyzer compartment. Push the new W
and R-tubing segments through the W and R-holes and fit the white plugs securely
into the holes. See Figure 4.32.
R
W
DWG #5-0-060B
Remove and discard the used tubing segments. Press ENTER.
Figure 4.32 Inserting the New Tubing Segments into the Back of the Analyzer
4-39

17.
Open the door and attach the W and R-tubes to the reference electrode. See Figure 4.33.
4. Maint.
DWG #7-0-016A
Figure 4.33 Installing the New W/R-Tubing on the Reference Electrode
18.
19.
Close the door.

Attach the exposed black fitting of the W-tubing segment to the W-line. See Figure 4.34
DWG #5-0-038C
Figure 4.34 Attaching the W-Tubing Segment to the W-Line
CAUTION: Do not overstretch the tubing segments in the steps that follow.
Overstretched tubing segments will give inadequate suction and may require replacement of the segment.
4-40
4 Maintenance
If you look carefully at the tubing segments you will notice a seam running
lengthwise. Make sure that the seam of the tubing is not twisted. It is important to keep the orientation of this line straight to avoid premature failure of
the segment.
20.
Connect the W-tubing as follows:

a.
Insert the W-bypass tubing segment into the bypass valve. Make sure the
bypass tubing sits fully into the groove of the bypass valve. See Figure 4.35.
c
b
R
W
4. Maint.
DWG #5-0-040B
Figure 4.35 Installing the New W-Tubing Segment
b.
c.
Attach the exposed black fitting of the R-tubing segment to the R-line. See Figure 4.36.
R TUBING SEGMENT
R
W
DWG #5-M-015B
21.
Slide the W-segment connector nearest the front of the analyzer into the
front, vertical slot of the support block.
Without overstretching the W-tubing, pull it around the pump and slide the
second connector into the bottom horizontal slot.
Position both tubing connectors (oblong shaped) so that the widest portion
is horizontal and the R-line connectors can fit above them.
R LINE
Figure 4.36 Attaching the New R-Tubing Segment to the R-Line
4-41

22.
Without overstretching the R-segment, pull it around the pump and insert the small
connector into the top horizontal slot of the support block. See Figure 4.37.
NOTE: Make sure the R-tubing is installed in the correct orientation. Incorrect installation of the R-tubing may lead to contamination of the reference
solution.
a
b
R
DWG #5-0-039B
4. Maint.
Figure 4.37 Installing the New R-Tubing Segment
23.
*
Press ENTER
Flow Path Prime in progress.

24.
Press CLEAR, CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Ready for Analysis screen.
4.4.10.1 Replacing the Tailpiece

The W/R-Replacement Tubing Segments (PN 07575) come with several extra tubing sections
that are used to connect the waste pump to the reference electrode. This tubing assembly is
referred to as the tailpiece (Figure 4.38). The tailpiece should be replaced on a monthly basis
to preclude flow problems due to protein buildup in the tubing (high volume users).
DWG #5-0-014A
Figure 4.38 The Tailpiece
4-42
4 Maintenance
To replace the tailpiece, first, disconnect the tailpiece from the front section of the
waste pump tube (Figure 4.39). Next, disconnect the rear section of the waste pump
tube and remove the tubing segment from the bypass valve. Finally, disconnect the
tailpiece from the reference electrode W-port (Figure 4.40). Discard the tailpiece.
R
W
4. Maint.
DWG #5-0-015B
Figure 4.39 Disconnecting the Tailpiece
DWG #7-0-014A
1.
Figure 4.40 Disconnecting the Tailpiece from the Reference Electrode W-Port
4-43

2.
Connect the new tailpiece to the front segment of the W-pump tube (Figure 4.41).
Next, connect the rear segment of the waste pump tube and install the bypass tubing
section into the bypass valve. Finally, connect the tailpiece segment to the W-port
of the reference electrode (Figure 4.42).
DWG #5-0-018B
4. Maint.
Figure 4.41 Connecting the New Tailpiece
DWG #7-0-015A
Figure 4.42 Connecting the Tailpiece Segment to the W-Port
4-44
4 Maintenance
4.4.11 W/R-Harness Replacement

instructions.
Replace the complete W/R-harness (including tubing segments) as follows. To replace the
tubing segments only, refer to Section 4.4.10.
1.

Menu. Press 2 to display the Tubing Replacement screen. Then press 3 to display
the W/R Harness Replacement Procedure screen.
Remove R straw from bottle.

2.
Press ENTER.
Remove 3 W/R tubing clips. Disconnect R line from pump fitting, W line from T connector. Discard tubing.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
*
Open the top cover. Remove the W-bypass tubing segment from the pump bypass
valve.
Open the door and disconnect the W/R-tubings from the reference electrode. Close
the door.
Loosen the white plugs and remove the tubing from the back of the analytical
compartment.
Stretch outward and lift the W/R-tubing collars from the horizontal slots in the
tubing support block. Remove the remaining tubing collars from the tubing support
block. The tubing segments should now be free of the pump.
Remove the W/R-tubing harness manifolds from the mounting pins.
Remove the W-line from the reagent pack waste bottle.
The old W/R-tubing harness is now free from the instrument and can be discarded.
Press ENTER.
Install new harness. Connect 3 tubing clips. Connect W line to T connector, R line to pump fitting. Insert
R/W straws in bottles.
4-45
4. Maint.
NOTE: Pay special attention to the diagrams in this procedure. Reverse

installation of the W and R-tubing is one of the most frequent operator
errors.

CAUTION: Do not overstretch the tubing segments in the steps that follow.
Overstretched tubing segments will give inadequate suction and will require
replacement of the segment.
If you look carefully at the tubing segments you will notice a seam running
lengthwise. Make sure that the seam of the tubing is not twisted. It is important to keep the orientation of this line straight to prevent premature failure
of the segment.
Position the W-pump segment of the new W/R-harness around the lower portion
of the pump assembly. Stretch the tubing slightly so that the collar closest to the
white plug fits into the front (vertical) retainer slot and the collar closest to the
reagent pack straw fits into the rear (horizontal) retainer slot. See Figure 4.43.
DWG #5-0-045C
4. Maint.
11.
Figure 4.43 Tubing Position Around Pump
12.
Insert the W-bypass tubing segment into the pump bypass valve.
NOTE: Be sure the W-bypass tubing segment is seated in the groove which is
at the bottom of the slot.
13.
Position the new R-pump segment around the upper portion of the pump assembly.
Stretch the tubing slightly so that the larger collar fits into the front retainer slot and
the smaller collar fits into the rear retainer slot.
NOTE: Make sure the R-tubing is installed in the correct orientation (see
Figure 4.43). Incorrect installation of the R-tubing may lead to contamination of the reference solution.
14.
15.
16.
4-46
Press the 3 small W/R-tubing manifold bars onto their pins, make sure that the
tubing feeds around smoothly and is not twisted.
Insert the W-line into the waste container opening and the R-straw into the R-bottle
opening, make sure the reagent line fittings seat snugly onto the reagent bottles.
Thread the other ends of the tubing harness through the appropriate openings into
the analyzers compartment and secure the white plugs. See Figure 4.44.
4 Maintenance
DWG #5-0-060B
Figure 4.44 W/R-Tubing White Plug Insertion
Open the analyzers door. Connect the W/R-lines to the W and R-ports on the
reference electrode. Close the door. Press ENTER.
Reference Prime in progress.

18.
Press CLEAR, CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Ready (Not Ready) for Analysis
screen. Close the cover.
4.4.12 Reagent/Septum Harness Maintenance and Replacement

Pinch Valve Tubing Repositioning
The tubing that passes through the pinch valve should be repositioned every 2 weeks to avoid
permanently crimping the tubing. Open the pinch bar, slide the tubing slightly so that uncrimped
portions of tubing will contact the pinch bar, and close the pinch bar. See Figure 4.46.

instructions.
Harness Replacement
1.

the Reagent/Septum Harness Replacement Procedure screen.
4-47
4. Maint.
17.

*
Remove F,C,D,A,B straws from reagents.

2.
3.
Open the top cover.

Remove the reagent straws from the F, C, D, A, and B reagent bottles.
NOTE: Leave the W and R-straws in place.

4.
*
Purging
Open pinch valve bar, remove tubing. Detach labeled tubing clips from pins.
5.
6.
7.
4. Maint.
Press ENTER.
Open the valve pinch bar and pull the tubing out from the valve tubing clips.
Remove the 5-tube manifold bar, located in front of the valve, by lifting it off the
mounting pins.
Press ENTER.
Open Door. Disconnect reagent tubing manifold from top of reagent preheater. Pull harness through
rear of analytical chamber. Discard tubing.
8.
Open the analyzers door and locate the manifold connector mounted on top of the
reagent preheater. See Figure 4.45. Lift the connector release lever to remove the
connector.
REAGENT PREHEATER
SOCKET
DWG #5-M-016A
CONNECTOR
RELEASE LEVER
HARNESS
COLLAR
MANIFOLD
CONNECTOR
Figure 4.45 Reagent Tubing Harness Manifold Connector
9.
10.
*
Disconnect septum harness from bottom of reagent preheater. Turn septum 1/4 turn clockwise and
remove with tubing. Unplug manifold connector & discard tubing.
11.
12.
13.
4-48
Locate the rubber harness collar in the back wall of the analytical compartment.
Pull the rubber harness collar out of the analyzers back wall and pull the tubing
harness out through the slot. Press ENTER.
Remove the septum harness manifold connector on the bottom of the preheater.
Disconnect the tubing manifold from the septum assembly.
Press ENTER.
4 Maintenance
*
Install new reagent harness through rear of analytical compartment & connect manifold to reagent
preheater. Reinstall tubing seal in opening.
14.
Feed the 5-tube manifold into the analyzers compartment through the slot in the
back of the compartment. Firmly seat the rubber harness collar into the analyzers
compartment slot.
Position tubing in pinch valve, close bar, reattach tubing clips.

15.
Position the C, D, A, and B-tubings on the pinch valve assembly and close the pinch
bar. Pull out on the knob and release the knob to lock the bar in place. Ensure that
the tubing is correctly positioned on the pinch valve assembly.
PINCH BAR
-023A
DWG #5-0
MANIFOLD BAR
Figure 4.46 Valve Tubing Positioning
16.
17.
*
Press the 5-tube manifold onto the mounting pins that are located between the
reagent pack and the pinch valve. Press the 5-tube manifold bar onto the mounting
pins located between the pinch valve and the analyzers compartment.
Press ENTER.
Connect notched end of septum harness to bottom of reagent preheater, other end to septum. Install
septum & tubing onto probe turning counterclockwise so tubing forms downward loop.
4-49
4. Maint.
PINCH VALVE

SEPTUM
ASSEMBLY
DWG #5-0-019D
REAGENT
PREHEATER
MANIFOLD
CONNECTOR
WITH NOTCH
KEYED
MANIFOLD
CONNECTOR
SEPTUM
HARNESS
SEPTUM
HARNESS
4. Maint.
Figure 4.47 Septum Harness Installation
18.
19.
20.
*
Wipe reagent straws with alcohol, dry and insert into proper bottle.
21.
22.
23.
The septum harness part number is PN 06517. Plug the keyed manifold connector
of the new harness into the septum assembly fitting.
Loop the septum harness below the sampler assembly and connect the other end to
the bottom of the reagent preheater. The manifold connector is notched with a
projection to allow only the correct fit into the reagent preheater.
Close door and press ENTER.
Wipe reagent straws with alcohol, dry, and insert the F, C, D, A, and B reagent
straws into the appropriate openings in the reagent pack. See Figure 4.50.
Press down on the reagent line bottle fittings to ensure a snug fit onto the reagent
bottles.
Close the cover and press ENTER.
Fluid Prime in progress.
4.4.13 Reagent Pack and Septum Assembly Replacement

RMS (Reagent Management System) is used to monitor reagent consumption. Actual
percentage of the reagent volume remaining may vary depending on flow times, sample
throughput, and other factors, including maintenance required.
Visual checking of the fluid lines at less than 20% reagent remaining is recommended.
Always replace the fluids pack when the message, < 10% Remaining in Reagent Pack, appears.
The septum assembly should be replaced with each reagent pack. Failure to replace the septum
assembly will result in worn, leaking septa and the possible intermixing of reagents.
4-50
4 Maintenance
1.

Menu. Press 3 to display the Reagent Pack Status screen.
REAGENT PACK
Reagent Pack No.:
Lot No.:
Expiration Date:
Fluid Gauge:
14678
4206
MAY 95
15%
CALIBRATION STANDARD
pH
7.384
Na+ 140.0
K+
4.0
Ca++/Cl- 1.0
Glu
80.0
Lac
2.0
BUN
10.0
CONCENTRATIONS
6.840
75.0
10.0
2.0
200.0
6.0
50.0
4. Maint.

Change Reagent Pack Procedure.
Reagent Pack Status Screen
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Then press ENTER to display the Reagent Pack Change Procedure screen.
Open the top cover.
Remove the reagent straws from the reagent pack. Dry the outside of each straw as
it is pulled from the pack.
Remove the RMS pod. Remove and discard the used reagent pack.
Remove the septum assembly by giving the assembly a 1/4-turn clockwise and by
pulling it out.
Disconnect the septum harness manifold connector from the septum assembly.
Plug the manifold connector into the new septum assembly.
Install the septum assembly by sliding the assembly over the end of the probe. See
Figure 4.48. The septum harness manifold connector should be to the lower left.
Turn the assembly 1/4-turn counterclockwise until snug. The septum harness
manifold should be at the lower right of the assembly (see Figure 4.53).
DWG #7-0-019A
2.
3.
Figure 4.48 Installing the Septum Assembly
4-51

10.
11.
Shake the new Reagent Pack and position the pack in the reagent pack bay so that
the RMS pod is in the back.
Plug the RMS pod into the socket located in the upper rear of the Reagent Pack Bay.
See Figure 4.49.
REAGENT MANAGEMENT
POD
47B
#5-0-0
DWG
SOCKET
4. Maint.
ATTACHED TO
REAGENT PACK
Figure 4.49 Reagent Management Pod Installation
12.
13.
Flip open the caps on the reagent bottles.

Wipe the outside of each straw with an alcohol wiper to prevent bacterial
contamination of the new reagent pack. After evaporation of the alcohol, insert the
color-coded straws into the appropriate colored bottle caps on the top of the reagent
pack and press the fittings down snugly onto the reagent bottles. See insert in Figure
4.50. The colored letter patches on the straw tubings correspond to the color patches
by the bottle caps on the reagent pack.
W
C
F
B
D
DWG #7-11-008C
Figure 4.50 Reagent Pack Tubing Positions
14.
15.
Close the analyzers door.

Press ENTER.
NOTE: If the message, Check Septum Assembly, appears on the screen, see
Section 5.2.2, Troubleshooting.
4-52
4 Maintenance
4.4.14 Sample Probe/S-line Replacement

instructions.
1.
Open door. Remove septum assembly from sampler.

2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect S-line from sample preheater.

6.
Disconnect the probe/S-line from the sample preheater by pulling the polyurethane tubing segment (on the end of the S-line) off of the sample preheater. See
Figure 4.51.
DWG #7-0-018A
Open the analyzers compartment door.

Using a screwdriver, loosen the screws holding the guard on the sampler. Remove
the guard.
Remove the septum assembly with the septum harness attached, by turning the
assembly 1/4-turn clockwise and pulling it out.
Press ENTER.
S-Line
Polyurethane Tubing
Figure 4.51 Probe/S-line Removal from Sample Preheater
7.
Press ENTER.
4-53
4. Maint.

the Probe/S-Line Replacement screen.

*
Using hex key, loosen probe socket screw. Remove probe by pulling up and out.
8.
Use the hex key to loosen the socket screw about 2-1/2 turns at the top of the probe. Then
grasp the probe mounting block and remove the probe/S-line unit. See Figure 4.52.
S-LINE
SOCKET SCREW
HEX KEY
4. Maint.
ADJUSTMENT
PLATE
SEPTUM
ASSEMBLY
OPENING
DWG #5-0-064A
MOUNTING
BLOCK
SAMPLE
PROBE
Figure 4.52 Probe/S-line Removal
9.
*
Press ENTER.
Insert tip of probe through opening in sampler and position mounting block behind hex screw. Verify
block is aligned with back plate & not angled. Tighten hex screw.
10.
Replace the Probe/S-line by first sliding the probe tip through the septum assembly
opening all the way to the mounting block. Then move the block back and around
the socket screw to hook it in place. Finally, use the hex key to tighten the socket
screw. Keep the probe aligned while you tighten it to the adjustment plate.
NOTE: Store the hex key inside the analyzers compartment under the sampler for future use.
11.
*
Install septum & tubing onto probe, turning counterclockwise so tubing forms downward loop.
12.
13.
*
4-54
Press ENTER.
To replace the septum assembly (with attached septum harness), slide the assembly
over the end of the probe so that the rectangular piece on the end fits into the septum
assembly opening in the baseplate of the sampler assembly. The septum harness
manifold connector should be to the lower left. Turn the assembly 1/4-turn
counterclockwise until snug. The septum harness manifold connector should now
be at the lower right of the assembly. See Figure 4.53.
Press ENTER.
Verify probe alignment using gauge. Refer to reference manual for details.
4 Maintenance
14.
Perform a probe placement test as follows:

a.
Slide the Probe Adjustment Tool (PN 07190) over the probe and hold it
firmly to the base of the sampler assembly so that the probe tip extends
toward the stepped end. The probe tip must be flush with the beginning of
the step (see Figure 4.53). If the alignment is correct, go to step 15.
b.
Using a Phillips head screwdriver, loosen the screw that holds the
sampler adjustment plate to the instrument.
c.
Advance the plate (with the probe) up or down as needed.
d.
Tighten the screw holding the probe securely.
e.
Verify that the probe tip is positioned flush with the beginning of the step.
f.
If necessary, repeat the procedure.
DWG #5-0-026B
4. Maint.
Probe Tip Flush

with the Beginning of the Step
Figure 4.53 Probe Adjustment
15.
*
Press ENTER.
Connect flexible end of S-line to preheater.

16.
Connect the probe/S-line to the connector on the bottom of the sample preheater.
Aspirating Flush solution. Check for air leaks in flow cell.
Close door.
17.
18.
19.
Check for leaks around the S-line connection. If a leak occurs, reseat the S-line on
the connector.
Reattach the guard onto the sampler.
Close the analyzers door.
4-55

4.4.15 Flow Cell Replacement

instructions.
Refer to Figure 4.54 throughout this procedure.
4. Maint.
1.
Open door. Remove W/R lines from Ref electrode. Rotate latch above electrode. Unplug & remove
all electrodes. Remove SO2 cable. Loosen flowcell retaining screws by turning counterclockwise &
remove flowcell. Do not lose interconnect tubing on either end.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
4-56

the Flow Cell Replacement Procedure screen.
Open the analyzers door.

At top of reference electrode, swing the retaining block out of the way.
Unplug reference electrode cable and remove electrode.
Remove the SO2% cable.
Unplug all electrode cables from the rack.
Turn the top thumbscrew 1/4-turn counterclockwise and lift the flow cell (with the
electrodes still inserted) off the sample preheater.
4 Maintenance
Retaining
Block
W
Reference
Electrode
Flow Cell
for Models
F, G, H
Electrode
Rack
Assembly
Cl
Na
K
BUN
Glu
Top Slotted
Retainer
Fastener
PCO2
PO2
SO2
Retainer
Screw
Flow Cell For Models
I, J, K
K
Electrical
Connector
Na
Ca
BUN
Glu
Lac
pH
SO2
Sample
Preheater
DWG #7-F-001A
PCO2
PO2
Figure 4.54 Flow Path Component Replacement
9.
10.
*
If the Flow Cell (PN 15857) is being replaced, remove the sodium electrode and
insert it into the new flow cell. Repeat this procedure for the other electrodes and
washers, avoiding any mix-up by replacing each washer and electrode immediately
upon removal.
Check the new flow cell for intact interconnect tubings. Press ENTER.
Install new flowcell seating interconnect tubing into opening at top of sample preheater. Tighten
retaining screws by turning clockwise.
4-57
4. Maint.
Lac
pH

11.
12.
*
Attach reference electrode, positioning interconnect tubing carefully. Reposition latch. Reattach W/
R tubing.
4. Maint.
13.
14.
15.
*
Reattach the flow cell to the sample preheater back plate as follows:
See Figure 4.54.
a.
Set the flow cell into the recess on the sample preheater, align the right
surface of the flow cell flush with the right side of the back plate. Ensure
that the flow cell interconnect tubing is seated properly on the sample
preheater top connector.
b.
Turn the top retainer screw 1/4-turn clockwise.
Plug all cables into the rack. Press ENTER.
Replace the reference electrode on top of the flow cell by placing the electrode on
top of the flow cell, align the electrode sides with the backplate sides. Insure that
the reference electrode connector is seated properly on the flow cell interconnect
tubing.
Center the retaining block in the depression on top of the electrode.
Attach W/R lines to the reference electrode. Press ENTER.
Plug in the electrodes & SO2 cable. Close the door.

16.
17.
Plug in the SO2% cable.

Close the door. Press ENTER.
Flow Check in progress. Watch flow path for proper flow.

18.
a.
b.
c.
*
4-58

retracts.
4 Maintenance
4.4.16 Preheater Replacement

instructions.
Refer to Figure 4.54 throughout this procedure.
the Preheater Replacement screen.
Open door. Remove W/R lines from Ref electrode. Rotate latch above electrode. Unplug all
electrodes. Remove SO2 cable. Loosen flowcell retaining screw(s) by turning counterclockwise.
Remove flowcell. Do not lose tubing on either end.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Pull sample preheater straight out.

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
*
Remove the preheater-flow cell-reference electrode assembly by first turning the

bottom retainer screw 1/4-turn counterclockwise. Then pull the assembly straight
off the guide pin and electrical connectors.
Located on top of the reference electrode, turn the retaining block to the side.
Lift the reference electrode up and out of the way of the flow cell.
Remove the flow cell (with the electrodes still inserted) by turning the retainer
screw 1/4-turn counterclockwise and by lifting it off the sample preheater.
Press ENTER.
Position new sample preheater, seat firmly.

12.

Unplug all electrode cables from the rack.
Remove the SO2 cable.
Disconnect the S-line from the sampler preheater. Press ENTER.
Press ENTER.
Reinstall flowcell seating interconnect tubing into opening at top of sample preheater. Tighten
retaining screw(s) by turning clockwise.
4-59
4. Maint.
1.

13.
14.
*
See Figure 4.54.
a.
surface of the flow cell flush with the right side of the back plate. Ensure
that the flow cell interconnect tubing is seated properly on the sample
preheater top connector.
b.
Press ENTER.
Attach reference electrode, positioning interconnect tubing carefully. Reposition latch. Reattach
W/R tubing. Plug in all electrodes. Reinstall SO2 cable. Close door.
Replace the reference electrode on top of the flow cell by placing the electrode on
top of the flow cell, align the electrode sides with the backplate sides. Ensure that
tubing.
16. Center the retaining block in the depression on top of the electrode.
17. Replace the preheater-flow cell-reference electrode assembly by aligning the guide
pin and by pressing the assembly onto the electrical connectors. Then turn the
bottom retainer screw 1/4-turn clockwise to engage the electrode rack assembly.
18. Plug all cables into the rack.
19. Plug the SO2 cable into the flow cell.
20. Reattach the S-line to the sample preheater.
21. Attach the W/R-lines to the reference electrode. Press ENTER.
4. Maint.
15.

22.
a.
b.
c.
*

retracts.
4.4.17 Printer Paper Replacement

When a colored line appears on the edge of the paper, the paper supply is low and should be
replaced as follows:
1.
4-60
Remove the printer cover.
4 Maintenance
5A
-05
3-0
G#
DW
Figure 4.55 Printer Cover Removal
UP
Open the printer platen. Gently move the lever to its opposing position and remove
the old roll of paper.
641
#10
log
Cata
per
a
P
ent
em
lac
Rep
1A
-05
3-0
G#
DW
Figure 4.56 Paper Release
Remove the paper holder from the old roll of paper. Discard the used roll.
Insert the paper holder into a new roll of paper (PN 10641). The loose end of the
paper should feed from the bottom of the roll.
DWG #3-0-016
3.
4.
Figure 4.57 Paper Holder Removal and Replacement
4-61
4. Maint.
2.

Install the paper holder with paper into the support collars. See Figure 4.58.
Tear the end of the paper into a point and push it through the printer slot. Pull the
paper through the outlet, while gently pushing from the roll side to prevent tension
on the paper which tends to make it stick on the roller.
UP
UP
5.
6.
641
#10
log
ata
rC
ape
nt P
e
em
lac
Rep
641
#10
log
ata
er C
p
a
P
ent
em
lac
Rep
3A
-05
3-0
G#
52
-0-0
DW
3
G#
4. Maint.
DW
Figure 4.58 Paper Installation
7.
8.
9.
10.
UP
11.
Center the paper and close the printer platen by moving the lever back to the original
position. See Figure 4.59.
Press the PAPER ADVANCE button on top of the analyzer. Tear off the paper.
Position the printer cover on top of the printer so that the cover's front rim touches
the front of the PAPER ADVANCE button.
Slide the cover forward (about 1/2-inch) until it falls into place. The PAPER
ADVANCE button will come through the square opening and the cover's tongue
will drop behind the silver bar.
Press the PAPER ADVANCE button to verify that paper advances through the
cover.
641
#10
log
ata
rC
ape
P
t
en
em
lac
Rep
1A
-05
4A
3-0
G#
DW
-05
3-0
G#
DW
Figure 4.59 Closing the Platen and Replacing the Cover
12.
13.
4-62
From the Ready For Analysis screen, press MENU, 5, 7, 4, 1 to obtain a character
printout to verify proper operation.
Press CLEAR, CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Ready For Analysis screen.
4 Maintenance
4.4.18 Gas Cylinders Replacement
1.
Turn the gas cylinders off using the tank wrench.
NOTE: In the following step, do not lose the valve-cylinder washer.

2.
3.
Remove the regulators from the cylinders and remove the empty cylinders from the
stands.
Place the new cylinder(s) (Cal. Gas A, PN 06586; Cal. Gas B, PN 06587) in the
Stands (PN 06546).
NOTE: When attaching the gas regulators, ensure proper alignment by

aligning the T-tightener with the small indentation.
4.
6.
7.
8.
NOTE: If the gas compositions of the new gas cylinders are different from the
previous cylinders, set new gas cal values. See Section 4.1.6.
9.
From the Maintenance Menu, press 3, 2 to calibrate the gas electrodes.
4.4.18.1 Gas Regulator Adjustment

With both gas cylinder regulators (PN 06545 Regulator) open, verify that the gas pressure is
at 5 to 7 psig and that the main regulator pressure is at about 2000 psig on a new gas tank.
If the gas pressure is incorrect, adjust the regulator as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Turn the central knob on the low pressure gauge (left valve): clockwise will
increase the pressure and counterclockwise will decrease the pressure.
From the Maintenance Menu, press 4 then 2 to perform a gas prime. Reverify low
gas pressure value during prime sequence.
Readjust as necessary.
Update to Rev. B 9/2000
4-63
4. Maint.
5.
Attach the regulator to the cylinder. Be sure to include the washer at the valvecylinder junction. Repeat for the other cylinder.
Turn the gas cylinder on with the Gas Wrench (PN 06547). The gas delivery must be
at 5 to 7 psig. If gas pressure is not in this range, adjust the regulators per the Gas
Regulator Adjustment procedure.
Check all junctions on the cylinder valve fittings for leaks with leak detecting agent.
If leaks are detected, turn off the tank, check the washer at the valve-cylinder
junction for proper seal, reposition the regulator on the tank, and tighten the fitting.
From the Maintenance Menu, press 4 then 2 to perform a gas prime. Reverify low
gas pressure value during prime sequence.
Verify that both humidifier wells exhibit bubbling.

4.4.18.2 Gas Filter Replacement
The gas filters should be replaced every 6 months or if clogged (rare). Inspect the filters for
clogs by removing each filter from the gas supply line as described below. If you cannot see
through the bore of the filter, it is clogged and should be replaced.
Replace the gas filters as follows:
1.
Shut off the gas supply of the filter to be replaced. Disconnect the hose from the gas
supply side of the filter. See Figure 4.60.
A
4. Maint.
B
Label Side
Towards Analyzer
24A
0-0
G
DW
#5-
Filter
Assembly
To Gas Supply
Figure 4.60 Gas Filter Assembly Replacement
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Disconnect the filter from the analyzer. Discard the filter.

Remove the dust protection cap from the tubing end of the new Filter Assembly (PN
08254) and connect the tubing to the analyzer.
Connect the supply hose to the input side of the filter.
Turn on the gas supply.
Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for the other filter as necessary.
4.4.18.3 Gas Hose Connection

NOTE: In order to ensure accurate gas calibration, the Stat Profile Ultra
instrument must be located within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of its A and B Gas
source. The length of tubing supplied (PN 06548) may be shortened but not
added to (see the following instructions for the installation). If a longer run
is required it must be made up with clean copper or stainless steel tubing,
e.g. 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) diameter, with metal to metal fittings at the regulator
output connection.
1.
4-64
Place the gas tanks approximately 5 feet or less from the gas input ports.
4 Maintenance
2.
Attach the gas regulators to the tanks and secure the tanks with stands.
NOTE: When attaching the gas regulators, ensure proper alignment by

aligning the T-tightener with the small indentation.
3.
4.
5.
Slide an end of a hose over the fitting on the gas tank regulator and secure the hose.
Repeat for the other hose and regulator.
Connect the hoses to the input sides of the filter assemblies.
Attach filter assemblies to the 2 gas ports on the right side of the instrument making
sure to attach hose A to fitting A and hose B to fitting B.
4.4.19 Fuse Replacement
Unplug the instrument.

Check the 2 external fuses. They are located at the rear of the instrument.
See Figure 4.61.
DWG #7-0-003A
1.
2.
Figure 4.61 External Fuse Access
3.
4.
Remove the fuses and check to see if one or both are blown. If fuse(s) is blown, note
the line voltage indicated on the serial number plate located next to the line cord and
replace with the fuse(s) indicated in Table 4.1. If the fuses are intact, contact Nova
Technical Service for assistance.
Unplug the glucose and lactate electrode cables from the rack by lifting the latch
up with 1 hand while pulling the connector out with the other hand.
4-65
4. Maint.
If the instrument status light is off and the instrument does not respond, but the cooling fan is
running, check the external fuse as follows:

____________________________________________________________________________________
Table 4.1 Fuses
Line Voltage
Fuse
100
4A SLO-BLO
120
4A SLO-BLO
220
2A SLO-BLO
240
2A SLO-BLO
____________________________________________________________________________________
4. Maint.
5.
6.
7.
Plug in the instrument.

Plug the glucose and lactate electrode cables into the rack.
See Section 2.2 for resuming normal operation.
NOTE: If the cooling fan is not running and the instrument status light is off,
the instrument is not receiving power from the receptacle.
4-66
5 Troubleshooting
5
Troubleshooting
This section describes the status screens, error codes, and Service Menu and explains the
troubleshooting procedures for the Stat Profile Ultra.
5.1
Error Codes and How to Display Them
SEQUENCE ERRORS
Analysis
25 Na+ INSTAB C
Others
A5 AB TEMP TOO HIGH
Sequence Errors Screen
The Sequence Errors screen displays errors which occur during an analysis or calibration cycle
and are mainly electrode or flow related. Press ENTER to display the System Errors screen.
5-1
5. T. Shoot
The system monitors and self-diagnoses the instrument for errors. If an error occurs, an error
code and the message, Check Status, will be displayed. There are 2 status screens, explained
as follows, for displaying error codes: the Sequence Errors screen and the System Errors
screen. From the Ready For Analysis screen, press STATUS and ENTER until the Sequence
Errors screen is displayed.

SYSTEM ERRORS
A5 AB TEMP TOO HIGH
Press 0 to Clear System Errors.

5. T. Shoot
System Errors Screen
5.2
Troubleshooting
The Stat Profile troubleshooting section is organized so that sequence error codes are listed
numerically and system error codes are listed alphabetically.
The recommended troubleshooting procedures use the most logical and direct steps to resolve
the error code. The solutions are set up in a block format which lists groups of steps to perform
in order to restore operation. The steps are also organized to prevent unnecessary parts
replacement, such as electrodes and tubing, until the more common causes for an error have
been checked.
In the case of multiple error codes, those errors which apply to flow are at the top of the
hierarchy. In most cases, when you resolve the flow error codes, the other errors will be
resolved as well.
At the bottom of each of the error code pages are important and helpful notes, which explain
some of the rationale for an error codes appearance and additional information on how the Stat
Profile functions.
The pages that follow also outline the Stat Profile Ultra 2-point calibration and the function of
each of the fluids and gases.
If the recommendations given here do not resolve the problem, contact Nova Technical
Services for troubleshooting assistance. It is helpful to have printed or written down the error
codes, flow times, and slope performance numbers.
FOR TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE, CALL TOLL FREE:

1-800-545-NOVA
5-2
5 Troubleshooting
5.2.1 Stat Profile Ultra 2-Point Calibration Sequence
The following is a summary of the Stat Profile Ultra 2-point calibration. A basic understanding
of the functions of each standard and gas and of the 2-point calibration sequence itself will be
especially helpful when you troubleshoot flow related problems.
The functions of each standard and gas are listed in Table 5.1.
Table 5.1 Calibration Standards and Gases and their Functions
Function
Standard A
Calibrate pH, Lac, and BUN linearity checks
Standard B
Calibrate pH, iCa, Hct, and air detectors 2 and 3
Standard C
Calibrate Na+, K+, Cl-, glucose, lactate,BUN, air detectors 2 and 3,

and Hct
Standard D
Calibrate Na+, K+, Cl-, glucose, BUN, lactate
Gas A
Calibrate P CO 2 and P O 2. Also used for sample preheater

cleaning check
Gas B
Calibrate PCO2 and PO2
Flush
Washout between standards and samples and Calibrate iCa
When you troubleshoot flow problems, it is important to view the system as a whole. This
means that you must consider all of the various components that interact in order to transport
fluids throughout the system. These components include the pump, sampler probe, bypass
valve, pinch valve, septa assembly, and tubing.
The information in this section, along with an understanding of the flow path components and
their functions, will give you the knowledge and tools you will need to resolve most of the
problems you will encounter.
The calibration sequence is outlined in Table 5.2 according to the order in which the various
calibration standards and gases are brought into the system for slope determination, flow
checks, membrane checks, and so on. The times that are listed are approximate.
5-3
5. T. Shoot
Standard/Gas

Table 5.2 Stat Profile Ultra 2-Point Calibration Sequence
5. T. Shoot
Time Remaining
(seconds) Fluid/Gas
584
............................
515
Std B ...................
448
Flush ...................
376
Std A ...................
314
Gas A ..................
5-4
235
157
Gas B ..................
Std D ...................
46
Std C ...................
20
............................
Function
Sequence Start
Standard B reading for AD2, AD3, Hct, iCa, and pH
Flush readings for iCa
Standard A reading for pH, Lac, and BUN linearity check
Gas A reading for PO2 and PCO2, sample preheater
check AD2, AD3
Gas B reading for PO2 and PCO2
Calibration flow check and Standard D reading
for electrolytes, glucose, lactate, BUN
Standard C reading for electrolytes, glucose, lactate, BUN
AD2, AD3, and Hct
Electrode Slopes are calculated
AD thresholds are calculated
Cal Drifts are calculated
Initialization
End Calibration
5 Troubleshooting
Rapid Reference Guide for Resolving Problems with Stat Profile Ultra Results
pH
Results High
Results Low
Check for low electrode slope (<9.5)

Condition with Na+/pH Conditioning Solution
Check for low fluid pack
Condition flow cell with whole blood
Check for low fluid pack
Check for air leak in system

Verify Gas Cal values in system
Clean probe/preheater
Clean bypass for restrictions
Check waste line for restrictions
pO2
Results High
Results Low
ClResults High
Check for low slope

Change Cl- cap
Results Low
Whole blood condition flow cell and recalibrate
pCO2
Results High
Check for low slope

Change membrane
Change electrode
Debubble electrode
Whole blood condition flow cell
Run Gas Cal
5. T. Shoot
Results Low
Na+
Results High
Clean flow cell

Check reference flow and electrode
Results Low
Condition sensor with Na+/pH Conditioning Solution
Glucose/Lactate/BUN
Results High
Check for contaminated fluid pack
Results Low
Replace membrane
K+
Results High

Replace electrode
Results Low

Replace electrode
Ca++
Results High
Results Low

Replace electrode
Replace electrode
Combination Problems
pH and Na+ both out
Check R solution flow.

Check reference electrode
Gases low/pH low on controls
Confirm controls temp is not > 25C
Gases high/pH low on controls
Confirm controls temp is not < 25C
Gases consistently out
Check barometer
Check system Gas Cal values
Overloads on a single channel are often due to a broken electrode wire
5-5

Table 5.3 lists the analyzers error codes and the pages they appear on in this section.
Table 5.3 Stat Profile Ultra Error Codes and Page Numbers
5. T. Shoot
Error
Code Description
Page
0A Lac Overload A/C ............................... 5-49

0C BUN Overload A/C ............................ 5-49
0D SO2% Overload 1/F ............................ 5-26
01 pH Overload A/C ................................... 5-9
1A Lac Overload D/S ............................... 5-49
1C BUN Overload D/S ............................. 5-49
1D SO2% Overload 2/S ............................ 5-27
02 PO2 Overload A .................................. 5-61
2A Lac Instab A/C .................................... 5-50
2C BUN Instab A/C .................................. 5-50
2D SO2% Instab 1/F ................................. 5-28
03 PCO2 Overload A ................................ 5-62
3A Lac Instab D/S .................................... 5-50
3C BUN Instab D/S .................................. 5-50
3D SO2% Instab 2/S ................................. 5-28
04 Hct Overload C .................................... 5-63
4A Lac Slope Error ................................... 5-51
4C BUN Slope Error ................................ 5-52
4D SO2% Slope Error ............................... 5-29
05 Na+ Overload C .................................... 5-64
5A E-Zero Drift Lac ................................. 5-53
5C E-Zero Drift BUN ............................... 5-53
5D E-Zero Drift SO2% ............................. 5-30
06 K+ Overload C ..................................... 5-65
6A Glucose Out of Range ......................... 5-66
6B Glucose Result Too High .................... 5-67
6C Lac Out of Range ................................ 5-54
6D Lac Result Too High ........................... 5-55
6E BUN Out of Range .............................. 5-68
6F BUN Result Too High ......................... 5-56
07 Cl- Overload C ..................................... 5-65
7A A to A Drift Lac .................................. 5-57
7C A to A Drift BUN ............................... 5-57
08 Ca++ Overload F ................................... 5-65
8F BUN Membrane FAIL ........................ 5-76
5-6
Error
Code Description
Page
09 Glucose Overload C............................. 5-49

9A Glucose Background High .................. 5-58
9B Math Queue Overflow ........................ 5-73
9C Insufficient Sample ............................. 5-69
9D Lac Background High ......................... 5-58
9E Lac Standard A Hi ............................... 5-59
9F Lac Standard A Lo .............................. 5-60
10 Program Logic Error ............................ 5-73
11 pH Overload B/S ................................... 5-9
12 PO2 Overload B/S ............................... 5-61
13 PCO2 Overload B/S ............................. 5-62
14 Hct Overload B/S ................................ 5-63
15 Na+ Overload D/S ................................ 5-64
16 K+ Overload D/S .................................. 5-65
17 Cl- Overload D/S ................................. 5-65
18 Ca++ Overload B/S ............................... 5-65
19 Glucose Overload D/S ......................... 5-49
20 Control Table Error ............................. 5-73
21 pH Instability A/C ............................... 5-10
22 PO2 Instability A ................................. 5-15
23 PCO2 Instability A .............................. 5-20
24 Hct Instability C .................................. 5-36
25 Na+ Instability C .................................. 5-42
26 K+ Instability C .................................... 5-46
27 Cl- Instability C .................................... 5-46
28 Ca++ Instability F .................................. 5-46
29 Glucose Instability C ........................... 5-50
30 Math Error ........................................... 5-73
31 pH Instability B/S ................................ 5-10
32 PO2 Instability B/S .............................. 5-15
33 PCO2 Instability B/S ........................... 5-20
34 Hct Instability B/S ............................... 5-36
35 Na+ Instability D/S ............................... 5-42
5 Troubleshooting
Table 5.3 (continued) Stat Profile Ultra Error Codes and Page Numbers
Error
Code Description
Page
36 K+ Instability D/S................................. 5-46

37 Cl- Instability D/S ................................ 5-46
38 Ca++ Instability B/S .............................. 5-46
39 Glucose Instability D/S ........................ 5-50
40 Sampler On Error................................. 5-73
61 pH Out of Range .................................. 5-13

62 PO2 Out of Range ................................ 5-18
63 PCO2 Out of Range ............................. 5-23
64 Hct Too Low ........................................ 5-39
65 Hct Too High ....................................... 5-40
66 Na+ Out of Range. ................................ 5-43
67 K+ Out of Range .................................. 5-43
68 Cl- Out of Range .................................. 5-43
69 Ca++ Out of Range................................ 5-43
70 Hct Calculation Error, Na+ ................................ 5-41
Page
71 A to A Drift pH .................................... 5-14

74 A to A Drift Hct ................................... 5-38
75 A to A Drift Na+ ............................................................ 5-44
76 A to A Drift K+ ............................................................... 5-45
77 A to A Drift Cl- .............................................................. 5-45
78 A to A Drift Ca++ .......................................................... 5-45
79 A to A Drift Glu .................................. 5-57
80 SO2% Out of Range ............................. 5-31
82 PO2 Membrane Overload .................... 5-19
83 PCO2 Membrane Overload ................. 5-24
84 Delta Millivolts Air Detector 1 ............ 5-71
87 SO2% Too High ................................... 5-32
88 Flow Rate Slow ................................... 5-72
89 Flow Rate Fast ..................................... 5-72
90 No Air When Required ........................ 5-72
91 No Sample When Required ................. 5-72
92 No PCO2 Endpoint .............................. 5-25
94 Hi K+ Hemolysis .................................. 5-33
99 Software Program ................................ 5-73
A0 Air Bath Thermistor Open Error......... 5-73
A1 Air Bath Thermistor Shorted .............. 5-73
A2 Air Bath DAC Upper Limit ................ 5-73
A3 Air Bath DAC Lower Limit ................ 5-73
A4 Air Bath Temperature Too Low ......... 5-73
A5 Air Bath Temperature Too High......... 5-73
A6 Air Bath Response Slow ..................... 5-73
A7 Blower Motor Failure ......................... 5-73
F3 Security Code Error ............................. 5-73
F4 Pod Not Present ................................... 5-73
F5 Pod Prom CRC Error ........................... 5-73
F7 EEProm Full ........................................ 5-73
F8 Pack Number Not Found ..................... 5-73
F9 Pack Gauge Value Greater .................. 5-73
5-7
5. T. Shoot
41 pH Slope Error ..................................... 5-11

42 PO2 Slope Error ................................... 5-16
43 PCO2 Slope Error ................................ 5-21
44 Hct Slope Error .................................... 5-35
45 Na+ Slope Error .................................... 5-47
46 K+ Slope Error ..................................... 5-47
47 Cl_ Slope Error ..................................... 5-47
48 Ca++ Slope Error................................... 5-47
49 Glucose Slope Error............................. 5-51
50 Air Program Error ................................ 5-73
51 E-Zero Drift pH ................................... 5-12
52 E-Zero Drift PO2 ................................. 5-17
53 E-Zero Drift PCO2 .............................. 5-22
54 E-Zero Drift Hct .................................. 5-37
55 E-Zero Drift Na+ .................................. 5-48
56 E-Zero Drift K+ .................................... 5-48
57 E-Zero Drift Cl- ................................... 5-48
58 E-Zero Drift Ca++ ................................. 5-48
59 E-Zero Drift Glucose ........................... 5-53
60 Bypass Value Bad ................................ 5-70
Error
Code Description

Table 5.3 (continued) Stat Profile Ultra Error Codes and Page Numbers
Error
Code Description
Page
FA EE Prom Program Error ..................... 5-73

FB RMS Error .......................................... 5-73
FC Invalid Reagent Pack .......................... 5-73
5. T. Shoot
G0 No Gas A When Required .................. 5-72

G1 No Gas B When Required .................. 5-72
H0 Clock Interrupt Too Long ................... 5-73
H1 Program Fail Error .............................. 5-73
H2 Stack Overflow ................................... 5-73
H3 Barometer Failure ............................... 5-74
H4 ADC Not Ready Error ........................ 5-73
H5 Glu Amp Failure ................................. 5-73
H6 Lac Amp Failure ................................. 5-73
H7 QC RAM Data Loss ........................... 5-73
H8 SO2% CHAN/SAMPLE ..................... 5-34
P1 Printer Timeout ................................... 5-73
P2 Printer Head Up ................................... 5-73
P3 Printer Paper Out ................................. 5-73
P4 QC ROM Data Loss ............................ 5-73
R0 No Standard A When Required .......... 5-72
R1 No Standard B When Required........... 5-72
R3 No Standard C When Required........... 5-72
R4 No Standard D When Required .......... 5-72
R5 No Flush When Required ................... 5-72
S0 Sample Preheater Therm Open Error ..... 5-75
S1 Sample Preheater Thermistor Shorted .... 5-75
S2 Sample Preheater DAC Upper Limit ..... 5-75
S3 Sample Preheater DAC Lower Limit ..... 5-75
S4 Spl Preheater Temperature Too Low ..... 5-75
S5 Spl Preheater Temperature Too High..... 5-75
5-8
5 Troubleshooting
Error Codes
01 pH Overload A/C
11 pH Overload B/S
Description:
A pH electrode overload occurs when the voltage of the pH electrode exceeds the limits
of the analyzer.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. Make sure the electrode is plugged in.

2. Shake the electrode down like a thermometer to move air bubbles within the glass to
the rear of the electrode.
3. Replace the pH washer after cleaning and
drying the flow cell chamber.
1. Replace the electrode.

2 Condition the new electrode as described in
Section 4, Maintenance.
5. T. Shoot
If these solutions do not resolve the problem, call Nova Technical Services
Notes:
An electrode overload is the second highest level error code in the troubleshooting hierarchy. If
the overload code is accompanied by a flow error code, resolve the flow error first and the electrode
overload should disappear.
Electrode slope error codes will also appear when an electrode overload exists. Once you resolve
the electrode overload error, the electrode slope errors should disappear.
If an electrode overload exists on more than 1 electrode, the problem may stem from an improperly
attached rack. Remember to power the system down before you reattach the rack.
Error code 30, Math Error, may appear when an overload error occurs. Once you resolve the
electrode overload, the math error should disappear.
Electrode overload errors typically stem from either a faulty electrode or an electronic problem.
Nova Technical Services 1-800-545-NOVA

5-9

Error Codes
21 pH Instability A/C
31 pH Instability B/S
Description:
An instability error occurs during calibration or analysis cycles if the electrodes

response fluctuates excessively while the reading is being taken.
Solution Block B
1. Make sure the electrode tip does not have a

blood clot stuck on it.
2. Clean and dry the flow cell chamber with
deionized water and a lint-free tissue.
3. Replace the pH sealing washer.
4. Perform a flow cell conditioning procedure
from the Maintenance Menu.
5. Perform a pH/Hct Calibration.
1. Replace the electrode and condition it as

described in Section 4, Maintenance.
2. If multiple electrodes have instability problems, the reference electrode might be the
cause.
a. Flush the reference electrode as described in Section 5, Troubleshooting.
b. Perform a fluid prime.
c. Perform a calibration.
d. If multiple instabilities persist, replace
the reference electrode described in
3. If the problem recurs, contact Nova
Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
If the instability code is accompanied by flow error codes or slope error codes, resolve these error
codes first and the instability codes should disappear.
Instabilities on patient samples may occur randomly from time to time as a result of interfering
species within the sample, such as drugs.
The pH washer is thin with a small hole.
Make sure reference pump tubing is correctly installed.

5-10
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
41 pH Slope Error
Description:
A pH slope error occurs when the difference (delta) between the calibration Standard
A and Standard B readings is not within the acceptable limits of the analyzer.
Solution Block B
1. Perform electrode conditioning with sodium/pH conditioning solution for 2

minutes as described in Section 4, Maintenance.
3. Remove the electrode washer, clean the
flow cell chamber with deionized water,
and dry it with a lint-free tissue.
4. Replace the electrode chamber washer (it is
thin with a small hole).
5. Perform a flow cell conditioning cycle.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
An electrode slope error is the third highest level error code in the troubleshooting hierarchy. If the
slope code is accompanied by a flow error code or overload error, resolve these errors first and the
electrode slope error code should disappear.
If multiple slope errors occur and no flow problems are evident, the problem may stem from an
R-line flow problem.
If the slope sign appears converse (i.e. -10.0 instead of +10.0), the problem may stem from reversed
A and B-lines in the fluid pack bottles, or from reversed A and B-bottles in the fluid pack.
pH relies on the reference electrode.

5-11
5. T. Shoot

Error Codes
51 E-Zero Drift pH
Description:
An E-zero drift error occurs during the time between a 1-point calibration check and
the last 2-point calibration, when the electrode millivolts for Standard C drift more than
is allowed by the limits of the electrode.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. If flow errors also appear, resolve the flow

errors first (see notes below).
2. If the pH electrode is new, make sure it has
been conditioned properly and allowed to
temperature equilibrate as described in Section 4, Maintenance.
3. Clean the flow cell with deionized water and
dry it with a lint-free tissue. Replace the pH
washer.
4. Perform flow cell conditioning.
6. If E-zero drifts occur for multiple electrodes,
the reference electrode might be at fault.
a. Check the R-solution level in the reagent
pack and replace the pack if necessary.
b. Flush the reference electrode as described
in Section 5, Troubleshooting.
c. Calibrate the analyzer.
7. If Multiple E-zero drift errors recur after
running samples, replace the reference electrode.
1. Replace the pH electrode (after you condition it according to the procedure in Section
4, Maintenance).
2. Run a flow cell conditioning cycle.
3. If the problem persists after running samples,
contact Nova Technical Services.
Notes:
An E-zero drift is the second highest level error code in the troubleshooting hierarchy. If the E-zero
drift appears with a flow error code, resolve the flow error code first and the E-zero drift error
should disappear.
The amount of drift will be printed in mph units for Standard C if this calibration option was
selected under the Operation Menu.
pH relies on the reference electrode.
5-12
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
61 pH Out of Range (Sample Analysis)
Description:
This error code appears when a given sample analyzed falls outside the measurable
range of the analyzer for the analyte in question (pH).
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. Make sure the sample is either whole blood,

plasma, serum, or Stat Profile aqueous control material.
2. Rerun the sample in question.
1. If the error code persists, contact Nova

Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
The measurable range for pH is 6.50 to 8.00.

When this error code appears, results will print out with a question mark.

5-13
5. T. Shoot

Error Code
71 A to A Drift pH
Description:
A pH A to A (analysis to analysis) drift error occurs when the electrodes voltage for
Standard A drifts more than the analyzers limits.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. Repeat the sample analysis.

2. If flow errors also appear, resolve them
first.
If error recurs after analyzing samples,
continue with step 5.
4. Replace the pH washer and clean the flow
cell chamber.
5. Perform flow cell conditioning with
whole blood.
7. If the error recurs after analyzing samples,
proceed to Solution Block B.
1. Open the door, display the System Test

screen to extend the probe to position #9.
Remove the W-tube. Use a syringe to flush
deionized water through the W-port of the
reference electrode; fluid should exit from
the probe tip.
2. Remove and flush the reference electrode
as described in Section 5, Troubleshooting.
3. Replace the W/R-tubing segments and perform a full calibration.
4. Condition the pH electrode with Na+/pH
conditioning solution, as described in Section 4, Maintenance. Perform 2 pH/Hct
Calibrations and analyze samples. If the
problem persists, proceed to step 5.
5. Replace the pH electrode as described in
6. Contact Nova Technical Services.
Notes:
A pH A to A drift is the second highest level error code in the troubleshooting hierarchy. If the A
to A drift appears with a flow error code, resolve the flow error first and the A to A drift error should
disappear.
pH is reference electrode dependent.

5-14
5 Troubleshooting
Error Codes
22 PO2 Instability A
32 PO2 Instability B/S
Description:
An instability error occurs during calibration or analysis cycles if the PO2 electrodes
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. If the membrane cap is new or if you have

just performed a PO2 maintenance procedure, make sure you have allowed the
necessary electrode equilibration time (10
to 15 minutes).
2. Shake the electrode down to remove any
bubbles from behind the membrane.
3. Perform a Gas Calibration.
1. Replace the PO2 membrane cap as described in Section 4, Maintenance.

3. Clean and dry the PO2 flow cell chamber
and washer or replace the washer.
4. Allow the necessary electrode equilibration time.
5. Be sure not to overfill the membrane cap
with PO2 solution.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
The PO2 washer is thick with a large hole (PN 09798).
PO2 is temperature sensitive, and it may take 10 to 15 minutes for the internal filling solution and
electrode to equilibrate to 37C.

5-15

Error Code
42 PO2 Slope Error
Description:
A PO2 slope error occurs when the difference (delta) between the calibration Gas A and
Gas B readings is not within the acceptable limits of the analyzer.
Solution Block B

2. Check the gas calibration values.
3. Polish the electrode with polishing paper
and replace the membrane cap as described
in Section 4, Maintenance.
1. An electrode slope error with a highly

negative slope (i.e. -22.0) indicates a ruptured membrane cap.
2. Loosen the PO2 membrane cap on the
electrode body by turning it 1/4-turn counterclockwise then retighten it.
3. Make sure the filling solution inside the
electrode is PO2 Electrolyte Solution (PN
06554).
4. Perform a Gas Calibration.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
PO2 is temperature sensitive, and it may take 10 to 15 minutes for the internal filling
solution and electrode to equilibrate to 37C.
The PO2 electrode requires a temperature equilibration time of 5 to 10 minutes.
An electrode slope of approximately 0.0 indicates a faulty base electrode.
A PO2 slope error that occurs along with a PCO2 slope error could indicate that there is a
problem in the gas cylinders or that the gas lines are backwards.
PO2 does not rely on the reference electrode.
Be sure not to overfill the membrane cap with PO2 solution.

5-16
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
Description:
52 E-Zero Drift PO2

An E-zero drift PO2 error occurs during the time between a 1-point gas calibration I
and the last gas calibration I, or the last full gas calibration (whichever occurred last).
An E-zero drift PO2 error indicates that the electrode millivolts for Gas A have drifted
outside the acceptable limits of the analyzer.
Solution Block B
1. See if the gas cylinders are low or empty

(< 500 psig).
2. If the electrode was just serviced, wait 10 to
15 minutes for the electrode to temperature
equilibrate and perform a Gas Calibration.
If the error recurs after the next Gas Cal I,
continue with Step 3.
3. Polish the electrode tip with polishing paper and replace the membrane cap, as
4. Clean the flow cell chamber with deionized
water and dry it with a lint-free tissue.
5. Run a Gas Calibration.
1. If E-zero drift occurs after the first Gas Cal

I, after the new membrane is put in service,
perform a 2-point gas calibration. If the
problem recurs during the next Gas Cal I,
replace the electrode and its cap as described in Section 4, Maintenance.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
should disappear.
Failure to allow enough time for the electrode to temperature equilibrate after servicing is a
common cause of E-zero drift for PO2.
PO2 is temperature sensitive, and it may take 10 to 15 minutes for the internal filling solution and
the electrode to equilibrate to 37C.
The amount of drift will be printed in mmHg for Gas A if this calibration option was selected under
the Operation Menu.
The PO2 electrode does not rely on the reference electrode.

5-17

Error Code
62 PO2 Out of Range (Sample Analysis)
Description:
This error code appears when a sample is outside the measurable range of the analyzer
for PO2.
Solution Block B
1. Make sure the sample is either whole

blood, expired air, or Stat Profile aqueous
control material.

Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
The measurable range for PO2 is 0 to 800 mmHg.


5-18
5 Troubleshooting
Error Codes
82 PO2 Membrane Overload
Description:
A PO2 membrane overload error occurs when the membrane checks that occur during
the calibration and analysis sequences detect the presence of moisture in the flow cell
chamber.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. Clean the PO2 flow cell and washer with

deionized water.
2. Dry the flow cell chamber thoroughly with
a lint-free tissue and a cotton swab.
3. Dry the washer thoroughly with a
lint-free tissue.
4. Dry the electrode body thoroughly with a
lint-free tissue.
5. Allow a 10 to 15 minute equilibration time
and then perform a Gas Calibration.
1. Replace the PO2 membrane cap as described in Section 4, Maintenance.

2. Clean the PO2 flow cell chamber with
deionized water.
4. Replace the PO2 flow cell washer.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
The PO2 electrode membrane test helps you determine if a membrane has ruptured. The membrane
test fails, however, if the flow cell chamber is wet when the electrode is inserted into it or if a salt
bridge develops within the chamber.
To avoid problems with membrane failure codes, be sure to keep the flow cell chamber clean and
dry before you insert the PO2 electrode.
Error code 30, Math Error, may appear when a PO2 membrane error occurs. Resolve the PO2
membrane error first and the math error should disappear.
Be careful not to overfill the membrane cap with PO2 solution.

5-19

Error Codes
23 PCO2 Instability A
33 PCO2 Instability B/S
Description:
An instability error occurs during calibration or analysis cycles if the PCO2 electrodes
Solution Block B
1. If the membrane cap is new or if you have

just performed maintenance on the electrode, make sure you have allowed the
necessary electrode equilibration time.
1. Replace the PCO2 membrane cap and perform flow cell conditioning with whole
blood as described in Section 4, Maintenance.
3. Clean and dry the PCO2 flow cell chamber
and washer or replace the washer.
4. Allow the necessary electrode equilibration time.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
The PCO2 washer is thick with a small hole.
PCO2 is temperature sensitive, and it may take 10 to 15 minutes for the internal filling solution and
PCO2 does not use the reference electrode.

5-20
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
43 PCO2 Slope Error
Description:
A PCO2 slope error occurs when the difference (delta) between the calibration Gas A
and Gas B readings is not within acceptable limits of the analyzer.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. Make sure the PCO2 electrode is plugged

in.
2. Check the gas calibration values.
3. If the membrane is new, perform a flow cell
conditioning procedure.
and washer.
6. If the membrane is old, replace it, as described in Section 4, Maintenance.
1a. Condition the PCO2 electrode with PCO2

conditioning solution as per Section 4, Maintenance.
1b. Replace the PCO2 membrane as per Section
4, Maintenance.
2. If the slope error persists, replace the electrode.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
The PCO2 electrode may require a temperature equilibration time of 10 to 15 minutes

after it has been serviced.
An electrode slope of approximately 0.0 indicates a faulty base electrode.
If the PCO2 slope error is occurring on a new electrode, make sure the electrode has been
preconditioned according to the instructions in Section 4, Maintenance.
A PCO2 slope error that occurs along with PO2 slope error could indicate a problem in the
gas cylinders or that the gas lines are backwards.
PCO2 does not rely on the reference electrode.

5-21

Error Code
Description:
53 E-Zero Drift PCO2

An E-zero drift PCO2 error occurs during the time between a 1-point gas calibration I
5. T. Shoot
and the last gas calibration I or the last full gas calibration (whichever occurred last).
An E-zero drift PCO2 error indicates that the electrode millivolts for Gas A have drifted
outside the acceptable limits of the analyzer.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. See if the gas cylinders are low or empty

(< 500 psig).
2. If the electrode was just serviced, wait 10 to
15 minutes for the electrode to temperature
equilibrate and run a Gas Calibration. If the
error recurs at the next Gas Cal I, continue
with Step 3.
Replace the washer.
4. Replace the membrane cap. If the electrode
is new and has not been conditioned, perform the electrode conditioning procedure
as described in Section 4, Maintenance.
5. Run a flow cell conditioning.
1. If E-zero drift occurs after the first Gas Cal

I, after the new membrane is put in service,
perform a 2-point gas calibration. If the
problem recurs during the next Gas Cal I,
replace the electrode and its cap as described in Section 4, Maintenance.
Notes:
should disappear.
Failure to allow enough time for the electrode to temperature equilibrate after servicing is a
common cause of E-zero drift for PCO2.
PCO2 is temperature sensitive, and it may take 10 to 15 minutes for the internal filling solution and
The amount of drift will be printed in millimeters of Hg for Gas A, if this calibration option was
selected under the Operation Menu.
PCO2 is not reference dependent.

5-22
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
63 PCO2 Out of Range (Sample Analysis)
Description:
This error code appears when a sample is outside the measurable range of the electrode
for PCO2.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. Make sure the sample is either whole

blood, expired air, or Stat Profile aqueous
control material.

Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
The measurable range for PCO2 is 3.0 to 200 mmHg.


5-23

Error Codes
83 PCO2 Membrane Overload
Description:
A PCO2 membrane overload error occurs when the membrane checks, which occur in
the calibration and analysis sequences, detect the presence of moisture on the flow cell
chamber.
Solution Block B
1. Clean the PCO2 flow cell and washer with

deionized water.
3. Dry the washer thoroughly with a
lint-free tissue.
4. Dry the electrode body thoroughly with a
lint-free tissue.
1. Replace the PCO2 membrane cap as described in Section 4, Maintenance.

2. Clean the PCO2 flow cell chamber with
deionized water.
4. Replace the PCO2 flow cell washer.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
The PCO2 electrode membrane test helps you know if a membrane has ruptured. The membrane
test fails, however, if the flow cell chamber is wet when the electrode is inserted into it or if a salt
bridge develops within the chamber.
To avoid problems with membrane failure codes, always make sure that the flow cell chamber is
clean and dry before you insert the PCO2 electrode into it.
Error code 30, Math Error, may appear when a PCO2 membrane error occurs. Resolve the PCO2
membrane error first and the math error should disappear.

5-24
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
92 PCO2 No End Point
Description:
At the normal Gas A calibration read time, the software determines if additional time
is needed to reach the electrode endpoint. If required, Gas A will continue to flow until
the endpoint is reached. If no endpoint is reached after 60 seconds of additional gas, this
error code is displayed and the PCO2 electrode becomes uncalibrated.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. Replace the PCO2 membrane as described

5. T. Shoot
Notes:

5-25

Error Code
0D SO2% Overload 1/F
Description:
This overload error occurs if the millivolt readings exceed the acceptable limit when
the analyzer is taking readings for SO2% Calibrator Level 1 or flush.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
5. T. Shoot
Notes:

5-26
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
1D SO2% Overload 2/S
Description:
This overload error occurs if the millivolt readings exceed the acceptable limit when
the analyzer is taking readings for SO2% Calibrator Level 2 or the sample.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
5. T. Shoot
Notes:

5-27

Error Code
2D, 3D SO2% Instab 1/F, 2/S
Description:
An instability error occurs during calibration or analysis cycles when the electrode's
response fluctuates while the electrode response reading is being taken.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
5. T. Shoot
1. Recalibrate the channel or rerun the sample

(where applicable).
2. If problem persists, contact Nova Technical Services.
Notes:

5-28
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
4D SO2% Slope Error
Description:
No mV difference was observed between the calibrator standards or between the blank
and standard readings.
Solution Block B
1. Verify that 2 different levels of calibrator

standard are used for the SO2% Calibration
option.
2. Verify that the fiber optic cable is firmly
seated into the flow cell and that the light is
on (when you look at the cable, you should
see a red light at the tip). If not, call Nova
Technical Services.
3. Gently clean the end of the fiber optic cable
with a lint-free tissue that is soaked in
bleach. Rinse with deionized water. Reinstall into the flow cell. Recalibrate using
the SO2% Calibration option.
1. Call Nova Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:

5-29

Error Code
5D E-Zero Drift SO2%
Description:
An E-zero drift occurs if the mV for flush drift more than allowed by the limits of the
SO2% channel.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
5. T. Shoot
1. Recalibrate using the SO2% Calibration

Sequence.
Notes:
If the fiber optic cable is removed from the flow cell or if it is disturbed by moving the flow cell/
preheater/rack, the flush mV will show drift and SO2% MUST be recalibrated.

5-30
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
80 SO2% Out of Range
Description:
This error code appears when a sample is outside the measurable range of the analyzer
for SO2%.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. The measurable range for SO2% is 30100%.

2. Make sure the sample is whole blood,

Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:

5-31

Error Code
87 SO2% Too High
Description:
This error code appears when a sample falls above the allowable lower limit for SO2%.
Solution Block B

Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:

5-32
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
94 Hi K+ Hemolysis
Description:
This error code appears when K+ is too high for a concentration to be calculated by
SO2%.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B


Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
The measurable range for K+ is 1.0 to 20.0 mmol/L.

5-33

Error Code
H8 SO2% Chan/Sample
Description:
This error indicates a problem with the LED during sample analysis, but does not
indicate an error when running controls.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
5. T. Shoot
Notes:

5-34
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
44 Hct Slope Error
Description:
A hematocrit slope error occurs when the difference (delta) between the calibration
Standard B and Standard C readings is not within the acceptable limits of the hematocrit
sensor.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. If the error code occurs alone, contact Nova

Technical Services immediately.
2. If the error code appears along with other
error codes, resolve the other error codes
first, and the hematocrit error codes should
disappear.
1. Clean the sample preheater with 50%

bleach solution as described in Section 4,
Maintenance.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
Hematocrit slope errors typically result from a flow problem in the system. If the analyzer displays
flow error codes, resolve the flow errors first and the hematocrit slope error should disappear.
Hematocrit slope errors could result from coated air detectors in a dirty sample preheater.
A hematocrit slope error that appears alone usually stems from a failing sample preheater or
an electronic problem.

5-35

Error Codes
24 Hct Instability C
34 Hct Instability B/S
Description:
An instability error occurs during calibration or analysis cycles when the electrodes
response fluctuates excessively while the reading is taken.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
5. T. Shoot
1. If this is the only error code displayed, call

Nova Technical Services.
Notes:
Error code 34 often occurs with error code 9C, Insufficient Sample. Resolve the error code,
Insufficient Sample, first and the Hct Instability error code should disappear.

5-36
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
54 E-Zero Drift Hct
Description:
An E-zero drift Hct error occurs during the time between a 1-point calibration check
and the last 2-point calibration. An E-Zero Drift Hct error indicates that the Hct
impedance electrode (air detector #3 in the sample preheater) millivolts for Standard
C have drifted outside the acceptable limits of the analyzer.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. Perform a sample preheater cleaning cycle

2. Calibrate the analyzer.
3. If the error recurs, soak the sample preheater with a 50% bleach solution as
described in Section 5, Troubleshooting.
1. If the error code persists, call Nova Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
should disappear.

5-37

Error Code
74 A to A Drift Hct
Description:
A Hct A to A (analysis to analysis) drift error occurs when the Hct impedance electrode,
air detector (oscillator) #3, located in the sample preheater, drifts in millivolts for
Standard C more than the analyzers acceptable limits. The analyzer periodically
performs a 1-point calibration to check the Standard C millivolts for drift.
Solution Block B

1. Remove the sample preheater and flush it

with a 50% bleach solution. Allow it to sit
for 10 minutes. Then flush it with deionized water. Finally, flush it with air. Install
the sample preheater and wait for it to
temperature equilibrate before you perform
a full calibration cycle.
2. If the error persists after you run more
samples, contact Nova Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
Since the Hct impedance electrode, air detector #3, located in the sample preheater, performs best
when the preheater is kept clean, the frequency of sample preheater cleaning based on sample
volume may prevent this error code from occurring.
Refer to Section 4, Maintenance, or to the Stat Profile Maintenance Logbook for the sample preheater
cleaning frequency.

5-38
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
64 Hct Too Low (Sample Analysis)
Description:
This error code appears when a sample is below the analyzers lower limit for Hct.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. If the sample is aqueous control, you may

ignore this error code.
2. If the sample is whole blood, make sure it
is well mixed before the analysis.

Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
The measurable range for Hct is 12 to 70%.

If the sample was not properly mixed before it was analyzed, the decrease in volume could
adversely affect the Hct reading.

5-39

Error Code
65 Hct Too High (Sample Analysis)
Description:
This error code appears when a sample is above the analyzers upper limit for Hct.
Solution Block B
1. If the sample is whole blood, make sure it is

well mixed before the analysis.

Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
The measurable range for Hct is 12 to 70%.

If the sample was not properly mixed before it was analyzed, the decrease in volume could
adversely affect the Hct reading.

5-40
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
70 Hct Calculation Error, Na+
Description:
The sodium concentration of the sample (which is used to calculate hematocrit)

is outside of the allowable range because of a high sample concentration or
sodium error.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B


Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
If the error is accompanied by a Na+ error code, resolve this error code first and the Hct error
condition might also be resolved.
The measurable range for Na+ is 80 to 200 mmol/L.

5-41

Error Codes
25 Na+ Instability C
35 Na+ Instability D/S
Description:
response fluctuates excessively while the electrode response reading is being taken.
Solution Block B
1. Make sure the electrode tip does not have a

blood clot stuck to it.
2. Clean and dry the flow cell chamber with
deionized water and a lint-free tissue.
3. Run a flow cell conditioning cycle from the
Maintenance Menu.
4. Run an Electrolyte Calibration.
1. Replace the electrode and condition

the electrode as described in Section 4, Maintenance.
2. If multiple electrodes have instability
problems, the reference electrode might
be the cause.
b. Run a fluid prime.
c. Run a calibration.
the reference electrode as described in
3. If the problem recurs, call Nova Technical
Services.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
codes first, and the instability codes should disappear.
Na+ electrode uses the reference electrode.

5-42
5 Troubleshooting
Error Codes
66, 67, 68, 69 Na+, K+, Cl-, Ca++ Out of Range (Sample Analysis)
Description:
These error codes appear when a sample is outside the measurement range of the
electrode for Na+, K+, Cl-, Ca++.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B


Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
The measurable range for Na+ is 80 to 200 mmol/L.

The measurable range for K+ is 1.0 to 20.0 mmol/L.
The measurable range for iCa is 0.1 to 4.9 mmol/L.
The measurable range for Cl- is 50 to 200 mmol/L.
When these error codes appear, results will print out with a question mark.

5-43

Error Code
75 A to A Drift Na+
Description:
A sodium A to A (analysis to analysis) drift error occurs when the voltage for Standard
C drifts outside the analyzers acceptable limits. The analyzer periodically performs a
1-point calibration to check the Standard C millivolts for drift.
Solution Block B
1. Perform an Electrolyte Calibration. If the

error persists after the next Cal I, continue
to step 2.
2. Condition the sodium electrode with sodium conditioning solution, as described in
3. Clean the sodium chamber of the flow cell
with distilled water and dry it thoroughly.
4. Perform an Electrode Calibration.
5. Proceed to Solution Block B.
1. Open the analytical compartment door, access the System Test screen, and extend the
probe to position #9. Remove the W-tube.
Use a syringe to flush deionized water
through the W-port of the reference electrode; fluid should exit from the probe tip.
as described in Section 5, Troubleshooting,
then perform an Electrolyte Calibration. If
the error persists after the next Cal I, continue with Step 3.
3. Replace the W/R-tubing segments as described in Section 4, Maintenance. Perform a
full calibration. If the error code persists
after the next Cal I, continue with Step 4.
4. Replace the sodium electrode as described
in Section 4, Maintenance, and perform an
Electrolyte Calibration.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
Na+ is reference dependent.

5-44
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
76, 77, 78, K+, Cl-, Ca++ A to A Drift
Description:
A potassium, chloride, or calcium A to A (analysis to analysis) drift error occurs when

the voltage for Standard C drifts outside the electrodes acceptable limits. The analyzer
periodically performs a 1-point calibration to check the Standard C millivolts for
electrode drift.
Solution Block B
1. Perform an Electrolyte Calibration. If the

error persists after the next Cal I, continue
to step 2.
2. Remove the electrode and debubble it as
3. Replace the flow cell washer and if the
potassium or calcium electrode is new, perform a flow cell conditioning procedure
with whole blood.
4. Perform an Electrolyte Calibration.
1. Open the door, display the System Test

screen, and extend the probe to position #9.
Remove the W-tube. Use a syringe to flush
deionized water through the W-port of the
reference electrode; fluid should exit from
the probe tip.
as described in Section 5, Troubleshooting,
then run a full calibration.
3. Replace the W/R-tubing segments and perform a full calibration. If the error persists
after the next Cal I, continue to step 4.
4. Replace the electrode in question and perform a flow cell conditioning cycle with
whole blood.
Notes:
These electrodes rely on the reference electrode.

5-45
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A

Error Codes
26, 27 K+, Cl- Instability C, 28 Ca++ Instability F

36, 37 K+, Cl- Instability D/S, 38 Ca++ Instability B/S
Description:
response fluctuates while the reading is being taken.
Solution Block B
1. Make sure the electrode does not have a

blood clot stuck on it.
2. Shake the electrode down to remove any air
bubbles from behind the electrode.
3. Clean and dry the electrode flow cell chamber and washer with deionized water.
Replace the washer if it is worn (thin washer
with a large hole).
4. Perform a flow cell conditioning procedure
1. If the error recurs on only the K+ or Ca++

electrode, replace the individual electrode.
If the error recurs on only the Cl- electrode,
replace the Cl- membrane cap.
2. If multiple electrodes have instability
problems, the reference electrode might
be the cause.
a. Flush the reference electrode as
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
Instabilities on patient samples may occur randomly from time to time as a result of interfering
species within the sample, such as drugs.
This electrode relies on the reference electrode.

5-46
5 Troubleshooting
Error Codes
45, 46, 47, 48 Na+, K+, Cl-, Ca++ Slope Error
Description:
A slope error occurs when the difference (delta) between the calibration Standard C and
Standard D readings is not within acceptable limits of the analyzer.
Solution Block B
1. If the problem is on the Na+ electrode,

perform the electrode conditioning procedure as described in Section 4, Maintenance.
2. For any electrode, shake the electrode down
like a thermometer to move air bubbles
inside to the rear of the electrode.
3. Remove the electrode washer. Clean the
flow cell chamber with deionized water
and dry it with a lint-free tissue.
4. Replace the electrode chamber washer. The
potassium, chloride, and calcium electrodes
use a thin, large holed washer, and the
sodium electrode has no washer.
5. Perform a flow cell conditioning cycle.
1. If the slope error recurs for sodium, potassium, or calcium, replace the appropriate
electrode. If the slope error recurs for chloride, replace the membrane cap.
2. If multiple electrode slope errors occur, the
reference electrode might be at fault.
a. Check the R-solution level in the reagent pack window. Replace the pack
if necessary.
b. Flush the reference electrode as described in Section 5, Troubleshooting.
3. If multiple electrode slope errors recur,
replace the reference electrode.
Notes:
An electrode slope error is the third highest level error code in the troubleshooting hierarchy.
If the slope code is accompanied by a flow error code or an overload error code, resolve the
flow or overload error codes first and the electrode slope error code should disappear.
If multiple slope errors appear and no flow problems are evident, the problem may stem from
a faulty R-line, an R-line flow problem, or a faulty fluids pack.
If the slope sign appears negative, the problem may stem from reversed C and D-lines in the reagent
bottles or from reversed bottles in the fluids pack.
The sodium electrode does not have a flow cell chamber washer.
The potassium and calcium electrodes require a thin washer with a large hole (PN 08153).

5-47
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
5. T. Shoot

Error Codes
55, 56, 57, 58 E-Zero Drift Na+, K+ , Cl- , Ca++
Description:
the last 2-point calibration. An E-zero drift error indicates that the electrode millivolts
for Standard C have drifted more than the acceptable operational limits of the electrode.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. If flow errors also occur, resolve the flow

2. Calibrate the analyzer. If the error recurs
after the next Cal I, proceed to step 3.
3. Shake the electrode down like a thermometer to move air bubbles inside it to the rear
of the electrode. If the E-zero drift occurs
for the sodium electrode, condition the
electrode as described in Section 4, Maintenance.
5. Replace the electrode chamber washer. The
potassium, chloride, and calcium electrodes
have a thin, large holed washer (the sodium
electrode has no washer).
6 Perform an Electrolyte Calibration.
1. If the error code persists on only the chloride electrode, replace the chloride cap as
described in Section 4, Maintenance. If the
error code persists only on the Na+, K+, or
Ca++ electrode, replace the electrode as described in Section 4, Maintenance.
2. If E-zero drifts occur for multiple electrodes, the reference electrode might be at
fault.
a. Check the R-solution level in the
reagent pack and replace the pack if
necessary.
b. Flush the reference electrode as
3. If multiple E-zero drift errors recur after the
next Cal I, replace the reference electrode.
Notes:
should disappear.
The amount of drift will be printed in milligrams per deciliter for Standard C, if this calibration
option was selected under the Operation Menu.
These electrodes are all reference dependent.

5-48
5 Troubleshooting
Error Codes
0A, 1A, 09, 19, 0C, 1C Lactate, Glucose, BUN Overload (A/C, D/S)
Description:
A lactate overload occurs when the voltage for Standards A, C, D, or S exceeds the
limits of the analyzer or if the sample concentration is very high.
A glucose overload occurs when the millivolt readings for Standard C, D, or S exceeds
the limits of the analyzer.
A BUN overload occurs when the voltage for Standards A, C, or D exceeds the
Solution Block A acceptable limits of the analyzer.
Solution Block B
Solution Block B
1. These errors may occur with extremely

high glucose samples (outside the measuring range of the analyzer). You may have to
dilute the sample as described in Section
1.3.3, Dilution of Whole Blood Samples for
Measurement of Elevated Glucose, and rerun
the sample.
2. Make sure the electrode is plugged in properly.
3. Replace the BUN membrane as described
1. Replace the BUN electrode as described in

2. If multiple electrodes have overload problems, the reference electrode can be the
cause.
d. If multiple overloads persist, replace
Notes:
the electrode overload error, the electrode slope errors should disappear.
If an electrode overload exists on more than 1 electrode, the problem may stem from an improperly attached
rack. Remember to power the system down before you reattach the rack. The BUN electrode uses the
reference electrode common to pH, Na+, K+, and Cl-. If any of these channels are also experiencing
problems, flush or replace the Reference electrode as described in Section 5, Troubleshooting.
Error code 30, Math Error, may appear when an overload error occurs. Once you resolve the
electrode overload, the math error should disappear.
Lactate is not dependent on the reference electrode.
5-49
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A

Error Codes
2A, 3A Lactate Instab (A/C, D/S); 29, 39 Glucose Instability (C, D/S);
2C, 3C BUN Instab (A/C, D/S)
Description:
An instability error occurs during calibration or analysis cycles when the glucose.
lactate, or BUN electrodes response fluctuates excessively while the reading is taken.
Solution Block B
1. Rerun the analysis or calibration to see if

the error recurs.
2. Replace the glucose or lactate membrane as
1. Replace the BUN electrode as described in

2. If multiple electrodes have instability problems, the reference electrode might be the
cause.
b. Run a fluid prime.
3. If the problem recurs, call Nova Technical
Services.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
If the instability error code is accompanied by flow error codes or slope error codes, resolve these
errors first and the instability codes should disappear.
The glucose electrode may exhibit an unstable reading on samples that have a glucose content
greater than the 500 mg/dL measurable range.
The BUN electrode uses the reference electrode common to pH, Na+, K+, and Cl-. If multiple
channels are experiencing problems, flush or replace the reference electrode.
Glucose does not rely on the reference electrode.

5-50
5 Troubleshooting
Error Codes
4A, 49 Lactate, Glucose Slope Error
Description:
A lactate or glucose slope error occurs when the difference (delta) between the
calibration Standard C and Standard D readings is not within acceptable limits of the
analyzer.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B

2. Make sure the C, D, and A (lactate) reagent
lines are not pinched.
3. Perform a Metabolite Calibration.
1. Replace the lactate or glucose membrane

2. If multiple membranes fail for low slope,
polish and soak the electrode as described
in Section 4, Maintenance, then change the
membrane.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
Glucose electrode slope errors typically occur either when a membrane cap is new and needs to
equilibrate as described in Section 4, Maintenance, or when the membrane is new and needs to be
replaced.
Nova Biomedical recommends that the analyzer be operated in single mode for 1 hour whenever
the electrode or membrane is replaced.
The lactate and glucose electrodes do not depend on the reference electrode, so you should not
suspect the reference electrode as the cause of a glucose slope error.

5-51

Error Code
4C BUN Slope
Description:
A BUN slope error occurs when the difference (delta) between the calibration Standard
C and Standard D voltages is not within the analyzers acceptable limits.
Solution Block B

2. Make sure the A, B, C, and D-reagent lines
have not been pinched.
3. Perform a Metabolite Calibration. If the
error recurs, continue with Solution Block
B.
1. Replace the BUN membrane as described

2. If BUN Slope error is a chronic problem,
replace the BUN base electrode as described
3. If multiple electrode slope errors occur, the
reference electrode might be at fault.
a. Check the R-solution level in the reagent pack window. Replace the pack if
necessary.
b. Flush the reference electrode as described in Section 5, Troubleshooting.
4. If multiple electrode slope errors recur,
replace the reference electrode.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
The BUN electrode uses the reference electrode common to pH, Na+, K+, and Cl-. If multiple
channels are experiencing problems, flush or replace the reference electrode as described in Section
4, Maintenance.

5-52
5 Troubleshooting
Error Codes
5A, 5C, 59 E-Zero Drift Lactate, BUN, Glucose
Description:
the last 2-point calibration. An E-zero drift error indicates that the electrode millivolts
for Standard C have drifted outside the acceptable limits of the analyzer.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. If flow errors also occur, resolve the flow

2. Perform a Metabolite Calibration. If the
error recurs after running samples, continue
with Solution Block B.
1. Replace the membrane as described in Section 4, Maintenance.

2. Run 2 full calibrations.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
should disappear.
The amount of drift will be printed in milligrams per deciliter for Standard C, if this calibration
option was selected under the Operation Menu.
The glucose electrode does not depend on the reference electrode.
These error codes may occur for very high lactate or glucose samples (outside the measuring
range). Resolve the out of range error first, and the E-zero drift error should disappear.

5-53

Error Code
6C Lactate Measurement Out of Range
Description:
An out of range error occurs when an analysis is performed on a sample and the result
for an analyte is calculated to be above or below the acceptable range for the electrode.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
5. T. Shoot
1. Make sure you are running whole blood,

plasma, or serum as a sample.
2. Rerun the sample.
3. Refer to the acceptable measurement range
for the parameter.
4. Dilute the sample as described in Section 1,
Introduction.
Notes:
The measurable range for lactate is 0 to 20 mmol/L. Lactate values between 20-23 will be displayed
with a question mark. Results greater than 23 will not be displayed and sample dilution is required.
An estimated lactate value will be displayed in reverse video on the Metabolites screen (MENU,
5,1,3). Use extreme caution when you view this value and use it only as a guideline for dilution
purposes. Dilution procedure is described in Section 1, Introduction.

5-54
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
6D Lactate Result Too High
Description:
A result too high error occurs when an analysis is performed on a sample and the result
is calculated to be above or equal to 23 mmol/L.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B

Introduction.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
The measurable range for lactate is 0 to 20 mmol/L.

Results above or equal to 23 mmol/L will not be displayed. An estimated lactate value will appear
in reverse video on the Metabolites screen (MENU 5,1,3). Use extreme caution when you view this
value and use it only as a guideline for dilution purposes. Samples may be diluted and rerun as
described in Section 1, Introduction.

5-55

Error Code
6F BUN Result Too High
Description:
A result too high error occurs when an analysis is performed on a sample and the result
is calculated to be greater than 110 mg/dL.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
5. T. Shoot

Introduction.
Notes:
The measurable range for BUN is 3 to 100 mg/dL.

BUN values above or equal to 110 mg/dL will not be displayed. An estimated BUN value will be
displayed in reverse video on the Metabolites screen (MENU, 5,1,3). Use extreme caution when
you view this value and use it only as a guideline for dilution purposes. Samples may be diluted
and rerun as described in Section 1, Introduction.

5-56
5 Troubleshooting
Error Codes
7A, 7C, 79 A to A Drift Lac, BUN, Glu
Description:
A lactate, BUN, or glucose A to A (analysis to analysis) drift error occurs when the
voltage for Standard C drifts more than the analyzers acceptable limits. The analyzer
periodically performs a 1-point calibration to check the Standard C millivolts for drift.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. Repeat the sample.

2. If the membrane is new, make sure that the
membrane has been conditioned for 15
minutes in flush solution as described in
3. Perform a Metabolite Calibration.
4. If the error persists after you analyze more
samples, continue to Solution Block B.
1. Replace the membrane as described in

5. T. Shoot
Notes:
Lactate and glucose electrodes A to A drifts typically occur either when a membrane cap is new
or when the membrane is failing and needs to be replaced.
Nova Biomedical recommends that you operate the analyzer in single mode for 1 hour whenever
the membrane or electrode is replaced.

5-57

Error Codes
9A, 9D Glucose, Lactate Background High
Description:
These error codes is usually membrane related.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. If the glucose membrane is new, make sure

it has been soaked in flush solution for 15
minutes as described in Section 4, Maintenance (membrane equilibration) and
recalibrate. If the error persists, continue
with Step 2.
If the lactate membrane is new, make sure
the mV reading with fluid in the flow cell is
less than 10 mV and allow 15 minutes to
equilibrate. Recalibrate; if error persists,
continue with step 2.
2. Polish the electrode and remembrane as
Notes:

5-58
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
9E Lactate Standard A High
Description:
Lactate A solution high errors usually occur with a new lactate membrane that needs
additional equilibration. Recovery on Standard A (15 mmol/L) is high.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. If the electrode membrane is new, make

sure that the flush mV is below 10.
2. Run a full calibration.
1. If the error code persists after 2 full calibrations, replace the membrane as described in
5. T. Shoot
Notes:

5-59

Error Code
9F Lactate Standard A Low
Description:
This error usually occurs when a lactate membrane is no longer linear. Recovery on
Standard A (15 mmol/L) is low.
Solution Block B
1. Massage the A-line tubing in the pinch

valve. Then perform a Metabolite Calibration. If the error recurs, continue with step 2.
3. Allow the membrane to equilibrate (so that
flush millivolts are less than 10) as described in Section 4, Maintenance.
1. Polish the electrode and replace the membrane as described in Section 4, Maintenance.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:

5-60
5 Troubleshooting
Error Codes
02, 12 PO2 Overload (A, B/S)
Description:
A PO2 electrode overload occurs when the voltage readings exceed the acceptable
limits of the analyzer.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B

2. Polish the electrode with polishing paper.
3. Replace the membrane cap as described in
4. Clean and dry the PO2 flow cell chamber
and washer with deionized water. Dry
the flow cell chamber with a lint-free tissue
and cotton swabs. If the washer is worn,
replace it.
1. Replace the PO2 electrode as described in

5. T. Shoot
Notes:
A PO2 electrode overload is the second highest level error code in the troubleshooting hierarchy.
Resolve the overload error code and all of the other PO2 error codes (such as slope error codes)
should disappear.
the electrode overload, the electrode slope errors should disappear.
If the problem is occurring on multiple electrodes, it may result from an improperly attached rack.
Remember to power the system down before you reattach the rack.
Error code 30, Math Error, may appear when a PO2 overload error occurs. The math errors should
disappear when you resolve the electrode overload errors.
The oxygen electrode does not rely on the reference electrode.
5-61

Error Codes
03, 13 PCO2 Overload (A, B/S)
Description:
A PCO2 overload occurs when the voltage readings exceed the acceptable limits of
the analyzer.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. Replace the PCO2 electrode.
2. Condition the new electrode as described
5. T. Shoot

2. Condition the electrode with PCO2 conditioning solution as described in Section 4,
Maintenance.
3. Replace the membrane cap as described in
and washer with deionized water. If the
washer is worn, replace it.
Notes:
A PCO2 overload is the second highest level error code in the troubleshooting hierarchy. If the
overload code is accompanied by a flow error, resolve the flow error and the overload error should
disappear.
the overload, the slope errors should disappear.
If the problem is occurring on multiple electrodes including the PCO2, it may result from an
improperly attached rack. Remember to unplug the power cord before you reattach the rack.
Error code 30, Math Error, may appear when a PCO2 overload occurs. The math errors should
disappear when you resolve the electrode overload.
The PCO2 electrode is not dependent on the reference electrode.
5-62
5 Troubleshooting
Error Codes
04, 14 Hct Overload (C, B/S)
Description:
An Hct overload occurs when the voltage readings exceed the acceptable limits of the
analyzer.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. If this is the only error code displayed,

5. T. Shoot
Notes:
The Hct impedance electrode is located in the sample preheater and is also an air detector or air
oscillator #3.
This error code typically results from an electronic problem.
If the error code is accompanied by a flow error code, resolve the flow error code first and the
electrode overload error should disappear.

5-63

Error Codes
05, 15 Na+ Overload (C, D/S)
Description:
A sodium electrode overload occurs when the voltage readings exceed the acceptable
limits of the analyzer.
Solution Block B

4. If multiple electrodes have overloads:
a. Make sure the reference electrode is
plugged in.
b. Perform an R-solution flow check as
described in Section 5.3.1.9.

2 Condition the new electrode as described
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
the overload, the electrode slope errors should disappear.
If an electrode overload exists on more than 1 electrode, the problem may stem from an improperly
attached rack.
Error code 30, Math Error, may appear when a Na+ overload error occurs. Once you resolve the
overload, the math error should disappear.

5-64
5 Troubleshooting
Error Codes
06, 07, 08 K+, Cl-, Ca++ Overload C, F

16, 17, 18 K+, Cl-, Ca++ Overload D/S, B/S
Description:
Electrode overload error occurs when the voltage readings exceed the acceptable limits
of the analyzer.
Solution Block B

2. Shake the electrode down like a thermometer to move air bubbles inside of it to the
rear of the electrode.
3. Replace the electrode chamber washer (it is
a thin washer with a large hole), as described in Section 4, Maintenance.
4. Make sure the reference electrode is
plugged in.
6. If multiple electrodes have overloads:
a. Make sure reference electrode is
plugged in.
b. Perform an R-solution flow check as
described in Section 5.3.1.9.
1. If the error is coming from the K+ or Ca++

electrode, replace the electrode as described
2. If the error is coming from the Cl- electrode,
replace the chloride cap as described in
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
An electrode overload is the second highest level error code in the troubleshooting hierarchy.
If the overload code is accompanied by a flow error code, resolve the flow error code and the
overload error should disappear.
Electrode slope errors will appear if an overload occurs.
If the problem occurs on multiple electrodes, it may stem from an improperly attached
rack. Remember to unplug the power cord before reattaching the rack.
Error code 30, Math Error, may appear when an electrode overload occurs. When you resolve the
overload, the math error should disappear.

5-65

Error Code
6A Glucose Out of Range
Description:
An out of range error occurs when an analysis is performed on a sample and the
result for an analyte is calculated to be above or below the acceptable range of the
electrode.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
5. T. Shoot

3. If the glucose is greater than 500 mg/dL,
dilute the sample as described in Section 1,
Introduction.
Notes:
The measurable range for glucose is 15 to 500 mg/dL.

Any results that fall between 500 mg/dL and 700 mg/dL will display with a question mark.
Samples may be diluted and rerun as described in Section 1, Introduction.
Glucose does not use the reference electrode.

5-66
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
6B Glucose Result Too High
Description:
A result too high error occurs when an analysis is performed on a sample, and the result
is calculated to be above or equal to 700 mg/dL.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B

Introduction.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
The measurable range for glucose is 15 to 500 mg/dL.

Results above or equal to 700 mg/dL will not be displayed. An estimated glucose value will appear
in reverse video on the Metabolites screen (MENU 5, 3). Use extreme caution when you view this
value and use it only as a guideline for dilution purposes. Samples may be diluted and rerun as

5-67

Error Code
6E BUN Out of Range
Description:
An out of range error occurs when an analysis is performed on a sample and the result
for an analyte is calculated to be above or below the acceptable linear range of the
electrode.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
5. T. Shoot

3. Refer to the acceptable measurement range
for the parameter.
Introduction.
Notes:
The measurable range for BUN is 3 to 100 mg/dL.

BUN values between 100-110 mg/dL will be displayed with a question mark. Results greater than
110 will not be displayed and sample dilution is required. An estimated BUN value will be
displayed in reverse video on the Metabolites screen (MENU, 5,1,3). Use extreme caution when
you view this value and use it only as a guideline for dilution purposes. Dilution procedure is

5-68
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
9C Insufficient Sample
Description:
This error code occurs when air detector 3 (also called air oscillator 3), located in the
sample preheater, detects air at the trailing edge of the sample during an analysis. This
error code usually stems from a short sample or flow problem, but could also stem from
a high hematocrit sample (>70%).
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. Make sure the sample size is at least 210 L.

2. Make sure you are not pressing the probe
against the syringe plunger during aspiration of the sample.
3. Repeat the sample analysis if enough sample
is available.
4. Perform the pump bypass valve test as
5. Reposition the W-line bypass tubing segment as described in Section 4, Maintenance.

2. Perform the flow test found in Section 5.2.2
of this chapter.
3. Replace the W/R-molded tubing segments
4. Remove the sample preheater and perform
a sample preheater flush with 50% bleach
as described in Section 5, Troubleshooting.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
If the error code is accompanied by a flow error code, resolve the flow error code first, and the
insufficient sample code should disappear.
This error code may appear with high Hct samples (greater than 70%) because the air detector 3
(which is also the Hct impedance electrode) confuses the sample with air.
Results generated with this error code will print out along with a question mark.
If this error code persists after multiple samples, it is most likely caused by a dirty preheater. See
Section 4, Maintenance (Sample Preheater Cleaning), for preheater cleaning procedure.

5-69

Error Code
60 Bypass Valve
Description:
The bypass valve monitors the potassium channel to make sure the reference solution
does not backflow into the flow cell.
Solution Block B
1. Perform the bypass valve test in

Section 5.3.1.8 of this chapter.
2. Reposition the bypass valve tubing segment (see notes below).
1. Replace the W/R-pump tubing segment as

5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
When the bypass valve fails to pinch off the bypass tubing completely, reference solution can
migrate down the flow path into the flow cell chamber and affect the K+ results.
When you position the bypass valve tubing, make sure it is seated inside the notch at the bottom
of the tubing slot. On some bypass valve assemblies, this notch is located half way down the tubing
slot.

5-70
5 Troubleshooting
Error Codes
84, 85, 86 Delta Millivolts Air Detector 1, 2, or 3
Description:
A delta millivolt error code appears when the measured millivolt difference between
the standards used to calibrate the air detectors (Standard A and flush) is not within
acceptable limits.
Solution Block B
1. Reposition and massage the pinch

valve segments.
2. Access the System Test screen and extend
the probe to position #9. Remove the W-tube
from the reference electrode. Attach a syringe with deionized water to the W-port of
the reference electrode and flush the flow
path. Fluid should exit out of the probe tip.
Repeat the flush procedure with air.
3. Perform a full calibration. If the problem
persists, continue to Step 4.
and then perform a full calibration cycle.
5. Replace the W/R-tubing segments and perform a full calibration.
1. Remove the sample preheater and flush it

with a 50% bleach solution. Allow it to sit
for 10 minutes. Then flush it with deionized water. Finally, flush it with air. Install
the sample preheater and wait for it to
temperature equilibrate before you perform
a full calibration cycle. If the problem persists, continue to Step 2.
2. Replace the septum assembly and perform
a full calibration.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
Most of the problems you encounter with delta millivolt errors will stem from restrictions in the
flow path. Over time, the sample preheater may develop a protein buildup which you should be
able to remove with the bleach solution as described above (Solution Block B, Step 1).

5-71

Error Codes
88
89
90
91
G0
Solution Block A G1
R0
R1
R3
R4
R5
Flow Rate Slow

Flow Rate Fast
No Air When Required
No Sample When Required
No Gas A When Required
No Gas B When Required (occursSolution
duringBlock
a fullB 2-point calibration)
No Standard A When Required
No Standard B When Required
No Standard C When Required
No Standard D When Required
No Flush When Required
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. Run the flow test found in Section 5.2.2 of

this chapter.
Notes:

5-72
5 Troubleshooting
Error Codes
Solution Block A
5. T. Shoot
9B Math Queue Overflow

10 Program Logic Error
20 Control Table Error
30 Math Error
40 Sampler On Error
50 Air Program Error
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
99 Software Program
A0, A1 Air Bath Thermistor Open/Shorted
A2, A3 Air Bath DAC Upper/Lower Limit
A4, A5 Air Bath Temperature Too Low/High
A6 Air Bath Response Slow
A7 Blower Motor Failure
F3 Security Code Error
F4, F5 Pod Not Present, Pod Prom CRC Error
F7 EE Prom Full
F8, F9 Pack Number Not Found, Gauge Value Greater
FA EE Prom Program Error
FB RMS Error
FC Invalid Reagent Pack
H0, H1 Clock Interrupt Too Long, Program Fail Error
H2, H4 Stack Overflow, ADC Not Ready Error
H5, H6, H7 Glu Amp Failure, Lac Amp Failure, QC RAM Data Loss
P1, P2 Printer Timeout, Printer Head Up
P3, P4 Printer Paper Out, QC ROM Data Loss
Solution Block B
1. Call Nova Technical Services.
Notes:

5-73

Error Code
H3 Barometer Failure
Description:
This error code usually stems from a hardware failure of the barometer.
Solution Block B
1. Access the Manual/Auto Modes option of

the Set Up Menu.
2. Change the Barometric Pressure from
Manual to Auto.
3. Wait 2 minutes while you monitor the
Manual/Auto Modes screen.
4. If the barometric pressure automatically
reverts back to Manual mode, proceed to
Solution Block B. If the barometric pressure remains in Auto mode, the problem is
solved.
1. Unplug the analyzer and reseat the

rack assembly.
2. Access the Manual/Auto Modes option
of the Set Up Menu.
3. Change the barometric pressure from
Manual to Auto.
4. Wait 2 minutes while you monitor the
Manual/Auto Modes screen.
5. If the barometric pressure automatically
reverts back to Manual mode, proceed to
step 6. If the barometric pressure remains in
Auto mode, the problem is solved.
6. Access the Barometric Pressure screen
from the Operation Menu.
7. Obtain the correct barometric pressure
from a laboratory barometer or a local
weather station and manually enter the barometric pressure.
8. Contact Nova Technical Services to have
the barometric pressure module replaced.
5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
When a hard failure of the barometer occurs, the message, Check Barometric Pressure, appears in
the Ready/Not Ready for Analysis screen.
A hard failure of the barometer causes the barometric pressure section of the operation configuration (in the Set Up Menu) to automatically switch to Entered.
If a hard failure of the barometer occurs, the analyzer can still be run by manually entering the
barometric pressure in the Operation Configuration Menu.
If you have to manually enter the barometric pressure in the Operation Menu, Nova recommends
that you check the barometric pressure during each shift and adjust it accordingly until the new
barometric pressure module is installed.

5-74
5 Troubleshooting
Error Code
S0 Sample Preheater Thermistor Open, S1 Sample Preheater Thermistor Shorted

S2 Sample Preheater DAC Upper Limit, S3 Sample Preheater DAC Lower Limit
S4 Sample Preheater Temperature Too Low, S5 Sample Preheater Temperature Too High
Description:
These error codes are hardware related.
Solution Block A
Solution Block B
1. Clear the System Error Code screen. If the

error reappears, proceed to Step 2.
2. Unplug the analyzer and reattach the rack.
3. After reattaching the rack, reseat the sampler preheater.
4. Plug the analyzer back in and see if the
error code reappears.
5. If the error code reappears, contact Nova
Technical Services.
5. T. Shoot
Notes:
After you unplug the analyzer and reattach the rack and sample preheater, it may take several
minutes for the air bath and sample preheater to reach 37C.
The power should always be removed from the analyzer before you reattach the rack, to prevent
the sensor board from being damaged.

5-75

Error Code
8F BUN Membrane Fail
Description:
This error occurs when a BUN membrane is no longer linear. Recovery on

Standard A is not within the excepted range.
Solution Block B
1. Massage the A-line tubing in the pinch

valve. Then perform a Metabolite Calibration. If the error recurs, continue with step 2.
1. Replace the membrane as described in

5. T. Shoot
Solution Block A
Notes:
This is an internal check for BUN membrane linearity during calibration. Therefore, it is not
necessary to run BUN over-range solution.

5-76
5 Troubleshooting
5.2.2 The Stat Profile Ultra Flow Test
The Stat Profile Ultra flow test is used to troubleshoot error codes such as:
No gas when required (G0, G1)

No reagent codes (R1, R2, R3, R4)
Flow slow (88)
Insufficient sample (9C)
What you will need to do this test:
4.
5.
A sample cup, 25 mL medicine cup, or 25 mL beaker.

Distilled or deionized water.
Syringe with blunt needle and silicone tubing (Stat Profile probe cleaning kit or
equivalent).
A blunt hemostat or a tubing clamp.
Lint-free tissue or gauze.
5.2.2.1 Water Test

The water test verifies that fluid can be pulled through the system from the probe. If water
cannot be pulled through the system, a clog or leak exists.
1.
Using the menu button, access the service screen (press MENU then 5, 1).
5-77
5. T. Shoot
1.
2.
3.

Version 123
SYSTEM TEST #1
Revision 123.456
pH
+ 047.43
PCO2
-082.12
PO2
-0051.20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Na+
+008.56
K+
+017.35
++
Ca /Cl +074.43
Millivolt Display
PCO2 Membrane
O2 Gain
Air Oscillators
Pump
Sampler Position
Valve Position
Gas
Pump Bypass Valve
SO2% LEDs
Glu
Lac
BUN
+042.32
-023.23
-047.76
Multiple
Off
Low
Off
0-Off
0
Std C
0-Off
Closed
Off
System Test #1 Screen
5. T. Shoot
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open the door.

Extend the sample probe by selecting 6, Sampler Position, then press 9. The probe
will extend. Confirm that the pump bypass valve is CLOSED.
Turn on the pump to high speed by selecting 5, Pump, then press 4. Confirm that
the pump is turning.
Immerse the probe in the small cup of distilled water. Within 3 to 6 seconds you
should see the fluid travel through the flow cell. If you are not sure, try taking the
cup of water away from the probe for a second or two and bringing it back. The flow
of water should be rapid and smooth. If you do see flow, turn the pump off by
pressing 5, 0 and retract the probe by pressing 6, 0.
If fluid suction is observed go directly to Section 5.2.2.4, Gas Pressure Test.
If fluid suction is not observed or is uneven, continue with Section 5.2.2.2, Pump
Aspiration Test.
5.2.2.2 Pump Aspiration Test

The purpose of the pump test is to verify that the pump and bypass valve are working properly,
and are capable of providing suction to the flow cell, preheater, and probe.
1.
Check the pumps aspiration by first turning the pump on. From System Test select
5, Pump, then press 4, High Speed.
2.
Disconnect the W-line from the top of the reference electrode. Be prepared to blot up
any fluid that comes out of the reference electrode with the lint-free wipes or gauze.
3.
Bring the cup of distilled water to the free end of the W-line. You should see fluid
move rapidly and smoothly up the W-line. If you are unsure, try taking the cup away
for a second or so and bringing it back to the W-line. When you have confirmed
flow, turn the pump off by selecting Pump then pressing 0.
5-78
5 Troubleshooting
If no suction is observed here, the problem is with the pump, bypass valve, or W-line. Correct the
problem as outlined below.
Correcting Pump Problems:
a.
b.
Check that the W-line bypass tubing segment is correctly positioned in the
bypass valve. Incorrectly positioned tubing will prevent the pump from
developing any draw. Split tubing or a pinhole leak can also cause this
problem.
Check that the bypass valve is closed. Press 9 repeatedly on the system test
screen and watch to see that the bypass valve actually opens and closes.
(You should see the valve piston move in and out.) Contact Nova service
if the bypass valve has failed.
Flush or replace the W-pump tubing segment and the waste line. The waste
path from the W-line to the waste bottle may be clogged.
c.
If the W-line is pulling water and the system failed the water test (no suction at the probe), there
is a blockage or leak in the flow path. Proceed with the Flow Path Flush Procedure below.
To flush the entire flow path with air or water, perform Steps 1 through 6 of the Flow Path Flush
procedure. For a flush of the flow path starting at the sample preheater, open the analyzers
door, detach the S-line from the sample preheater, attach the probe cleaning syringe tubing
directly to the bottom of the sample preheater, access the System Test #1 screen, and continue
with Step 4. When the procedure has been completed, reattach the S-line to the sample
preheater.
For individual components of the flow path, perform the appropriate procedure per the
Individual Component procedures.
CAUTION: Do not open or close the analyzers door when the probe is in
position 9 (extended). Probe damage will occur.
Flow Path Flush
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

From the Ready For Analysis screen, press MENU, 5, 1, 6, 9 to move the sample
probe to the sample aspiration position.
Pull back on the plunger of a Probe Cleaning Syringe (PN 02702) fitted with a
length of tubing and attach the tubing to the sample probe tip.
Press 9 to open the pump bypass valve.
Push air through the flow path. See Figure 5.1. If a flow blockage is encountered
and not eliminated, perform the following flushing procedures for the suspected
component.
5-79
5. T. Shoot
5.2.2.3 Flow Path and Component Flushing
DWG #5-0-046B
5. T. Shoot
Figure 5.1 Flow Path Air Flush
6.
If other components need flushing, continue with the Individual Component Flush
as follows. If no other components need flushing, press 9, 6, 0, CLEAR, CLEAR
to return to the Main Menu and close the analyzers door.
Individual Component Flush
Sample Probe Flush

Check the probe for blockage and flush if necessary as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5-80
Open the analyzers door. Remove the S-line from the sample preheater.
From the Ready For Analysis screen, press MENU, 5, 1, 6, 9 to move the sample
probe out of the septum assembly. Attach the flexible tubing of a syringe filled with
deionized water to the sample probe. Position a beaker underneath the S-line.
Push the deionized water through the probe.
If little or no flow occurs, there is probably a blood clot in the sample probe. Force
deionized water through the probe to dislodge the blood clot. If this is not
successful, draw some Cleaning Solution (PN 11802) into the syringe and after
letting the solution sit on the clot, force the remaining solution through the clot.
Again attach a deionized water-filled syringe to the probe and push water through
the probe.
If, after performing Step 5, a steady stream of water does not leave the S-line,
remove the probe, see Section 5.3.14, and inspect for a bent sample probe. A bent
probe will reduce flow and should be replaced.
5 Troubleshooting
6.
7.
If no other components need flushing, reattach the S-line to the sample preheater.
Press 0, CLEAR, CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Main Menu and close the
analyzers door.
Press CAL, ENTER to calibrate.
Preheater, Flow Cell, and Reference Electrode Flush

Perform Steps 1 through 9, then proceed to the appropriate component(s). Refer to Figure 5.2
throughout this procedure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
7.
8.
9.
5-81
5. T. Shoot
5.
6.
From the Ready For Analysis screen press MENU, 5 to access the Service Menu.
Press 6 to display the Fluid/Gas Prime Options screen. Then press 8 to purge the
flow cell. Wait for the gas flow to stop.
Clamp and disconnect the W/R-lines from the reference electrode.
Unplug all electrode cables from the electrode rack assembly.
Remove the glucose, lactate, and BUN electrodes from the flow cell. Position the
electrodes so that the membrane will not be damaged. Insert the electrode blanks
in both the glucose, lactate, and BUN channels.
Disconnect the S-line from the sampler preheater.
Remove the preheater-flow cell-reference electrode assembly by first turning the
bottom retainer screw 1/4-turn counterclockwise, then pull the assembly straight
off the guide pin and electrical connectors.
Loosen the thumbscrew located on top of the reference electrode, turn the retaining
block to the side, and retighten the thumbscrew.
Lift the reference electrode up and out of the way of the flow cell.
If the blocked component is known, flush it according to the proper procedure.
Otherwise, continue with Step 10.
Retaining
Block
W
Reference
Electrode
Flow Cell
for Models
F, G, H
Electrode
Rack
Assembly
Cl
Na
K
BUN
Glu
Lac
pH
Top Slotted
Retainer
Fastener
PCO2
PO2
SO2
5. T. Shoot
Retainer
Screw
Flow Cell For Models
I, J, K
K
Electrical
Connector
Na
Ca
BUN
Glu
Lac
pH
PO2
Sample
Preheater
SO2
DWG #7-F-001A
PCO2
Figure 5.2 Preheater-Flow Cell-Reference Installation
Reference Electrode Flush

10.
5-82
Attach a syringe containing deionized water to the W-port and, while covering the
R-port, push water through the electrode so that the water flows out of the flow cell
port. See Figure 5.3.
5 Troubleshooting
Water
R
-0
-0
#5
W Port
(R Port Is
Covered)
A
55
DW
Figure 5.3 Flushing the Reference Electrode
11.
12.
Repeat Step 10, attach the syringe to the R-port and cover the W-port.
If flushing the flow cell or the sample preheater is not needed, continue with Step
20. Otherwise, turn the top thumbscrew 1/4-turn counterclockwise and lift the flow
cell with the electrodes still inserted off the sample preheater connector. Continue
with the appropriate component.
13.
Insert the blunt tip needle (from probe cleaning kit) of a syringe filled with
deionized water into an interconnect tubing on the flow cell and push deionized
water through the flow cell. See Figure 5.4.
Cl
K
Na
Na
K
N
BU
u
Gl
c
La
pH
O
PC
2
PO
N
BU
u
Gl
c
La
pH
O2
PC
2
PO
2
SO
2
SO
02
01
-0
-0
F
7-
Ca
J
7-
DW
DW
Stat Profile Ultra F, G, H
Stat Profile Ultra I, J, K
Figure 5.4 Flushing the Flow Cell
5-83
5. T. Shoot
Flow Cell Flush

14.
15.
16.
Repeat Step 13, flush the flow cell in the opposite direction by inserting the syringe
into the other flow cell interconnect tubing.
Inspect the flow cell for cracks and other physical damage.
Check the interconnect tubing attached to the flow cell for leaks or breaks. Replace
it if necessary (PN 07161).
Sample Preheater Flush

17.
DWG #5-0-057A
18.
If the flow cell is still on the sample preheater, remove by turning the top retainer
screw 1/4-turn counterclockwise.
Attach the tubing of a cleaning syringe filled with deionized water to the top
connector and push water through the sample preheater. Then attach the tubing to
the bottom connector and flush the preheater in the opposite direction. See Figure
5.5.
5. T. Shoot
WATER
Figure 5.5 Flushing the Sample Preheater
19.
5-84
If additional cleaning is required, flush the sample preheater with 50% bleach and
let sit for 10 minutes. Then rinse the preheater with deionized water.
5 Troubleshooting
Reassembly Procedure
20.
5.2.2.4 Gas Pressure Test

This procedure will find a leak in the flow path by pressurizing the system to 5 psig.
(It will not harm membranes or other components.)
An analyzer with no blockages may pass the water and pump tests, but can still have a leak that
will cause the flow errors, Insufficient Sample, No Reagent, or No Gas, to appear. To check
for leaks, use the gas pressure test.
5-85
5. T. Shoot
a.
surface of the flow cell with the right side of the back plate. Ensure that the
flow cell interconnect tubing is seated properly on the sample preheater top
connector.
b.
21. Replace the reference electrode on top of the flow cell by placing the electrode on
top of the flow cell, align the electrode sides with the backplate sides. Ensure that
tubing.
22. Loosen the retaining block thumbscrew, center the retaining block in the depression on top of the electrode, and retighten the thumbscrew.
23. Replace the preheater-flow cell-reference electrode assembly by aligning the guide
pin, pressing the assembly onto the electrical connectors, then turning the bottom
retainer screw 1/4-turn clockwise to engage the electrode rack assembly.
24. Remove the electrode blanks and insert the glucose, lactate, and BUN electrodes
into the flow cell.
25. Plug all cables into the rack assembly.
26. Reconnect the S-line to the sample preheater.
27. Attach the W/R-lines to the reference electrode.
28. Close the analyzers door and wait 5 minutes for the compartment to come to
temperature.
29. Verify flow of solution as follows:
a.
From the Ready For Analysis screen press Menu, 5, 6, 1; immediately
observe the waste-line flow for 5 seconds.
b.
If the flow is impeded, check the interconnections between the S-line
preheater, preheater flow cell, and flow cell reference electrode, and
check that the W/R-tubings are properly connected.
30. Once the analyzers compartment has stabilized to 37 C for at least 10 minutes,
press CALIBRATE to perform a 2-point calibration. Press CALIBRATE again to
perform a second 2-point calibration.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
5. T. Shoot
7.
Using the menu button, access the system test screen by pressing MENU, 5, 1.
Open the analytical compartment door.
Select 8, Gas. (Visually confirm that the bypass valve is closed.)
Select 3, A-Hi.
Look at the gas humidifier. See if bubbles start to flow through the humidifier. If
no bubbles appear, listen to make sure the gas metering module is running as
evidenced by a continuous ticking sound. If the gas meter module is not ticking, a
hardware failure has occurred (this is rare). Contact Nova Technical Services.
If the gas metering module is running, but no gas appears in the humidifier, check
the gas supply and the lines connecting the gas supply to the analyzer. If these are
OK, the gas connection to the humidifier may be loose. Remove the humidifier and
check. If this connection is OK, an internal line has come loose (rare). Contact Nova
Technical Services is this occurs.
Within about 30 seconds, the bubbles should get smaller and slow down to almost
a complete stop (1 bubble every 5 seconds or so is acceptable) as the entire system
pressurizes to 5 psig (the regulator setting). Failure of the gas to slow down indicates
a flow path leak. Stop here and isolate the leak using the hemostat or clamp.
a.
Clamp the W-line just above the reference electrode and check the bubbles.
If the bubbles stop, the leak exists between the pump, bypass valve, or waste
line. If the bubbles do not stop, proceed with b.
b.
Clamp the soft tubing at the end of the S-line where it connects to the
preheater and observe whether the bubbles stop. If the bubbles stop, the leak
is somewhere between the reference electrode and the preheater.
Sources of flow path leaks:
8.
9.
Missing or incorrectly installed interconnect tubing

Missing sealing washer in one of the electrode chambers
Broken membrane
Loose connection between preheater and S-line
If the bubbling still has not stopped, clamp the rearmost tubing on the septum
harness and observe whether the bubbles stop. If the bubbles stop here, a faulty
septum assembly or a faulty connection between the septum harness and the septum
assembly is the problem.
If the bubbling does not stop when the rearmost line of the septum harness is
clamped off, the following must be checked.
Leaks in the humidifier area:
5-86
Confirm that the humidifier caps are finger tight, and that the o-ring on the
cap is not missing or damaged.
5 Troubleshooting
Remove the humidifier and check to make sure the gas line tubing is
securely connected to the humidifier ports and the T-fitting at the humidifier outlet.
Virtually all flow problems are detected by the above procedures. However, if these tests fail
to locate the problem, it will also be necessary to do a probe alignment check. See the probe
alignment procedure in Section 5.3.1.5.
5.2.3 Troubleshooting Results
5.2.3.1 Problems with Aqueous Controls

Opened Ampules:
NOTE: The composition of room air (20.9% oxygen and 0.03% carbon
dioxide) results in a PO2 of about 150 mmHg and a PCO2 of nearly
0 mmHg.
The net effect of room air is to raise control PO2 values and depress the PCO2 value. As carbon
dioxide is lost, the pH will begin to rise. Eventually the pH rise will reduce ionized calcium.
Storage Temperature:
Recovery of gas values (and to some extent pH results) in aqueous controls is affected by their
temperature. The area where the controls are stored prior to analysis must be temperature
controlled. Stat Profile Ultra controls are manufactured for use at 25 C. Your results will be
noticeably different if the temperature of the control is significantly above or below this
reference point. Therefore, DO NOT store controls on top of the analyzer, near a heating or airconditioning duct, radiator, window, etc.
Oxygen shows the effects of temperature most clearly. For example, the recovered PO2 will
vary 1% for every degree centigrade change away from 25 C. The change will be in the
OPPOSITE direction from the temperature shift. As the temperature goes up, the PO2 falls, and
vice versa, since the solubility of gases increases as the temperature of the solvent decreases.
The pH FOLLOWS temperature. In an extremely cool room (like some O.R.s) pH will recover
low compared to the assay range.
Variation in temperature can account for poor precision in your quality assurance results versus
peer group. Equilibrium of control to a stable temperature will eliminate this problem.
5-87
5. T. Shoot
Once opened, an ampule of control material must be analyzed immediately. In less than 1 minute,
equilibrium with room air begins to affect PO2, PCO2, pH, and ionized calcium results.

5.2.3.2 Altitude and Barometric Pressure Effects
5. T. Shoot
Altitude contributes to the recovery of gas results (most notably oxygen) in controls. Stat
Profile Ultra controls are assayed at sea level. Therefore, recovery of PO2 will decrease as
elevation increases. This is generally not noticeable until elevation exceeds 3000 feet, but a
convenient rule of thumb is to expect a 0.5% decrease in recovered oxygen for every 1000 feet
of elevation. If your lab is above 3000 feet, you should take this factor into consideration when
evaluating PO2 performance.
Similarly, if an incorrect barometric pressure has been entered on the analyzer, it can
compromise both control and patient blood gas results. This can be easily checked by comparing
the barometric pressure that appears on the printout or the Status screen with the analyzers
internal barometric output. To check the barometric output first press the MENU key then
select the Service screen (#3). From the Service screen, select Analog Input Subsystem.
Channel #13 is the barometer output. If the reading from this channel is significantly different
from the barometric pressure displayed on the Status screen, an offset has probably been
entered by an operator. Before correcting the value (under the Operation Menu selection),
check the barometric pressure with a reference such as a mercury barometer.
5.2.3.3 Calibration Gas Values

The calibration gas values are the concentrations printed on the gas tanks which are used to
calibrate the Stat Profile Ultra gas channels. The exact values must be entered into the system,
in order for proper calibration of the gas channels. If Nova gases are used, these values will
always be the same and match the factory settings.
If alternative calibration gas sources are used, the correct values must be entered via the
Calibration Gases option of the Operation Menu. Even if Nova gases are in use, verifying this
information takes only seconds and can save unnecessary electrode and fluidic troubleshooting.
5.2.3.4 Multiple Parameter Control Failures

When faced with more than one QC failure at a time, it is useful to determine whether the
affected parameters have anything in common which could be affecting the performance.
1.
5-88
Several electrodes (pH, Na+, K+, Ca++, Cl-) depend on the common reference
electrode. If several of these analytes are simultaneously out of control, clean and
inspect the reference electrode. Also confirm that reference (R) solution is being
delivered to the reference electrode. Poor reference solution flow can cause
calibration problems with all of the electrodes mentioned, but not usually all of
them simultaneously. It is common to see 1 or 2 on this list involved at first, and
5 Troubleshooting
2.
3.
4.
5.
if the situation is not corrected, other electrodes will go in and out of calibration or
control.
Recall the function of the reagents in the pack: Standards A and B are for pH;
Standards C and D are for electrolytes/glucose/lactate/BUN; B and Flush are for
iCa. Determine whether problems arose upon installation of a new reagent pack,
or if some other component was changed which could explain the problem.
If one or both of the gas channels is involved, check for leaks in the gas path (Gas
Test). Look for a loose connection to the preheater, loose humidifier caps, etc.
Check for incorrectly entered calibration gas values which may be causing the
problem.
Unimpeded flow of reagents, gases, and specimens through the analyzer is critical.
Check and track calibration and analysis flow rates. If they are changing rapidly or
are near the extremes of their ranges, this is a signal for preemptive maintenance
(usually tubing replacement or cleaning).
5.2.3.5 Single Parameter Control Failures
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The life of an electrode can vary significantly with each analyte. Check the
electrode warranty information or call Nova if you have a question.
Check how much time has elapsed or how many samples have been run using the
sensor since maintenance was last performed. Refer to Chapter 4, Maintenance, for
corrective maintenance steps involving individual parameters. If the suggestive
maintenance procedures fail to correct the problem, contact Nova for advice.
Any sensor close to the limits of its slope range or a sensor that is exhibiting unstable
slope (varies greatly from calibration to calibration) indicates a need for maintenance.
Foreign material present in the flow path will adversely impact performance.
Inspect the flow path for evidence of micro-clots, fibrin, bacterial growth, or
coating on the sensors by other materials such as the dyes present in some controls.
Check or change the washer in use with the sensor. Confirm that it is the correct
thickness and diameter. Replace any washer that is torn, has a ragged edge, or is
misshaped.
A newly remembraned gas electrode MUST be conditioned with whole blood and
must be allowed time for temperature equilibration before calibrating and running
controls. ALWAYS TAKE THESE STEPS.
The use of offsets to correlate the Stat Profile Ultra analyzer with some other
instrument in the laboratory will also affect QC ranges. If you use offsets, you must
either recalculate the QC ranges to take this into account or designate every control
sample as a QC Sample Type on the Patient Data screen.
5-89
5. T. Shoot
Troubleshooting a single parameter failure uses a different approach. A number of factors need
to be considered.

QC sample selection must be made within the first 30 seconds of initiating an analysis, or the
analyzer will not accept the designation. A common error is for some QC data to reflect offsets,
while another portion does not. This can lead to great confusion, unnecessary troubleshooting,
and statistics that show artificially high imprecision.
5.2.4 Problems with Patient Specimens

Many of the above mentioned factors affecting QC results can be applied to problems with
blood specimen results. Additionally, blood has unique and changing characteristics.
Fluidics:
5. T. Shoot
Whole blood is significantly more viscous than the aqueous solutions used for analyzer
calibration and QC. The higher the patients hematocrit, the more viscous the sample, and the
slower the flow through the analyzer. This is why the range for analysis flow is greater than
that allowed for calibration. Flow times will change with every sample.
To understand how this can impact results, consider a situation where a tiny clot or
accumulation of fibrin occurs around the tip of an electrode. Calibration may still be successful,
and reasonable aqueous QC results can be obtained if the blockage is not severe. Whole blood
results may be first to reflect a disturbance of this type. To avoid this type of problem, make
visual inspection of the flow cell a routine part of maintenance.
Matrix Effects/Interferences:
Nova instruments are designed for clinical environments to analyze actual patient specimens,
not modified blood samples. Specimens removed from the patient, anticoagulated appropriately, and promptly analyzed are the only type of sample for which where the measurement
results will be reliable. Matrix effects/interferences can occur when patient specimens are
removed from the body, modified and then measured on a Nova instrument. For example,
matrix effects have been seen on Nova analyzers when attempting to analyze samples collected
from cell savers used in various surgical procedures. Also, evaluation laboratories run
specimens from patients with a wide variety of pathologies and from patients who are being
treated with a broad spectrum of therapeutic and pharmacological agents. Despite extensive
clinical trials, it is not possible to anticipate every possible combination of transfused blood
products, crystalloids, and drugs (or their metabolites) that may be present in a blood sample.
As a result, some users have found that their particular patient mix has necessitated making
adjustments to maintenance. For example, a high number of cardiopulmonary bypass pump or
ECMO (extracorporeal membrane oxygenation) samples result in a need for increased
analyzer maintenance. If you are experiencing excessive downtime, you may need to modify
your own maintenance schedules. Novas Clinical Applications Group will assist you in
tailoring a maintenance program to meet these needs.
5-90
Update to Rev. B 9/2000
5 Troubleshooting
5.2.5 Sample Handling
Contamination by Room Air:
As previously noted, room air has a PO2 of about 150 mmHg and PCO2 of nearly 0 mmHg.
Should a large air bubble or several smaller ones remain in an ABG collection syringe for any
length of time, the sample blood gases will equilibrate with the air bubble. The patients gas
values may be raised or lowered, and the measured values will not be representative of the
patients in vivo state.
Delays in Transit:
1.
2.
3.
For all the above reasons, it is always preferable to analyze the specimen quickly. If a delay
cannot be avoided, icing of the syringe is the next best choice.
Amount and Type of Anticoagulant Used:
For whole blood and plasma analysis, sodium heparin at a level of 15 to 20 I.U. per mL of blood
collected is optimal for most patient populations. Some patient subpopulations may require
slightly more heparin (such as neonatal capillary samples), and some may require slightly less
(preheparinized blood in cardiopulmonary bypass). At levels much higher or lower than
suggested above, the sample and its results may be compromised.
Too little heparin results in a variety of problems from buildup of protein on sensors to microclots in the system to outright blockage of the flow path. This has been observed in O.R.s
where the patients blood has been partially heparinized for cardiopulmonary bypass. These
samples must still be collected with heparinized syringes to avoid clotting problems.
Too much heparin will bind ionized calcium in the patients blood and lead to falsely low
results. This is commonly seen when a high dose of lyophilized heparin is used in an ABG
syringe, and the syringe is subsequently under filled.
If preheparinized syringes are in use, select the least amount of heparin necessary and make
sure that all staff members have been educated in the correct fill volume, as well as mixing and
capping techniques.
5-91
5. T. Shoot
4.
Glucose will drop by about 5% per hour when a heparinized whole blood specimen
is stored at room temperature.
Potassium can increase by as much as 0.2 mmol/L in less than an hour when an
ABG specimen is held on ice.
Oxygen, carbon dioxide, and pH are all susceptible to changes based on room air
contact which can diffuse through the walls of a plastic syringe or even to
metabolism taking place within the specimen with long delays.
Red cells will settle out of the plasma as a function of time. In many disease states
this process is accelerated. For accurate measurement of hematocrit, it is imperative that the ABG syringe be carefully and thoroughly mixed prior to analysis.

As previously mentioned, sodium heparin is the preferred anticoagulant for the Stat Profile
Ultra analyzer. Lithium heparin has been successfully used, although at higher concentrations
its tendency to bind ionized calcium is more pronounced. Electrolyte or glucose values should
not be reported on a sample collected with sodium fluoride.
5.2.6 Check Septum Assembly Message

During the flush cycle of an analysis sequence, the analyzer checks for the presence
of the flush solution. The analyzer pumps until it detects solution or for a maximum of 45
seconds. If flush solution is not detected within 10 seconds, the message, Check Septum Assy,
is displayed on the Analysis In Progress screen, but the analysis continues. This message will
clear at the start of another sequence. If the flush solution is not detected within 45 seconds,
the system pump shuts off, the analysis is aborted, and the error, No Flush When Required, is
displayed.
5. T. Shoot
NOTE: The message, Time to Completion, varies depending on how long it

takes to complete each segment of a sequence. If the flush solution takes
longer to reach the flow path, the time to completion will be longer.
Troubleshooting
A delay (of 10 seconds or more) in the flow of flush solution is usually caused by a worn septum
assembly or a bent probe. To restore the system to operating condition, check the probe (replace
it if necessary) and replace the septum assembly. It is generally not sufficient to replace the
septum assembly alone, as a bent probe will quickly damage a new septum assembly.
5.2.7 Clean Sample Preheater Message

The message, Clean Sample Preheater, is not an error and serves as an indicator to the operator
that the sample preheater needs cleaning due to protein buildup. The frequency of sample
preheater cleaning is directly related to sample throughput.
During a full 2-point calibration sequence, the analyzer will bubble gas A and monitor the
millivolts measured on air detectors 1, 2, and 3.
If the millivolts obtained from any of these air detectors drops below the internal threshold
contained within the operating software, the analyzer will display the message, Clean Sample
Preheater.
The operator should keep in mind that the generation of this message is dependent on flow. If
the message, Clean Sample Preheater, keeps occurring, then other indicators of good flow
should be checked before taking further action in the sample preheater area. These indicators
are calibration and analysis or both: Flow Times, Slow Flow (88), No Reagent errors, and Air
Detector Test Millivolt readings.
5-92
5 Troubleshooting
The message, Clean Sample Preheater, will clear from the Ready for Analysis screen only
following a full 2-point calibration sequence (successful). If the message recurs, clean the
preheater with deproteinizing solution (see Section 4.1.5.2).
5.3
Performing Troubleshooting and Service Functions with the Service Menu

The Service Menu contains screens to allow you to:
Manually operate the mechanical subassemblies of the analyzer

Obtain temperature information and millivolt information for all electrode
and analog channels
Troubleshoot
Access the Service Menu as follows:

From the Ready for Analysis screen, press MENU to access the Main Menu screen.
Press 5 to access the Service Menu screen.
See Sections 5.3.1 to 5.3.10 to perform the appropriate servicing. If you wish to exit
any service function, press CLEAR to return to the Service Menu screen. Press
CLEAR again to return to the Main Menu screen. Press CLEAR once more to
return to Ready (Not Ready) For Analysis screen.
SERVICE MENU
1 System Test
2 Analog Input Signal Data
3 Analysis/Calibration Signal Data
4 Temperature Control Signal Data
5 System Error Log
6 Fluid/Gas Prime Menu
7 I/O Devices Menu

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Service Menu Screen
5-93
5. T. Shoot
1.
2.
3.

5.3.1 System Test
The System Test screens are used to test electrode and mechanical subsystems of the Stat
Profile Ultra. Following an explanation of how to access the Subsystem Test screens, Sections
5.3.1.1 through 5.3.1.10 explain how to use the screen functions in the electrode and
mechanical subsystem tests.
NOTE: Using system test screens will cause a 30 minute flush or

autocalibration cycle delay. This 30 minute cycle delay feature is used
during maintenance to stop unwanted fluid and gas flow.
NOTE: When you exit System Test, the analyzer automatically flushes for 30
seconds and restores itself to ready condition.
5.3.1.1 System Test Functions

5. T. Shoot
Access the System Test screens as follows:

1.
From the Service Menu, press 1 to access the System Test #1 screen. The System
Test #1 screen displays multiple millivolt readings for electrodes and air detectors
at the top of the screen, in addition to displaying the system test functions.
Version 123
SYSTEM TEST #1
Revision 123.456
pH
+ 047.43
PCO2
-082.12
PO2
-0051.20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Na+
+008.56
K+
+017.35
Ca++/Cl- +074.43
Millivolt Display
PCO2 Membrane
O2 Gain
Air Oscillators
Pump
Sampler Position
Valve Position
Gas
Pump Bypass Valve
SO2% LEDs
Multiple
Off
Low
Off
0-Off
0
1
0-Off
Closed
Off
5-94
Glu
Lac
BUN
+042.32
-023.23
-047.76
5 Troubleshooting
2.
To monitor a single analog channel continuously, the System Test screen exists in
a second form. The System Test #2 screen, which is accessed from the System Test
#1 screen, displays mV readings from 1 of 32 channels. Press 1 to change the
millivolt display to the System Test #2 screen, as shown below.
To move to higher channel numbers, press ENTER repeatedly. To move to lower
channel numbers, press the dash (-) repeatedly.
Version 123
SYSTEM TEST # 2
Revision 123.456
Channel 1
- 008.61 mV
Press ENTER to Advance Channel Number.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Millivolt Display
PCO2 Membrane
O2 Gain
Air Oscillators
Pump
Sampler Position
Valve Position
Gas
Pump Bypass Valve
SO2% LEDs
Multiple
Off
Low
Off
0-Off
0
1
0-Off
Closed
Off
3.
4.
Perform a subsystem test as in Sections 5.3.1.2 through 5.3.1.10.

To exit the System Test screens, press CLEAR to return to the Service Menu screen.
Press CLEAR again to return to the Main Menu screen. Press CLEAR once more
to return to Ready (Not Ready) For Analysis screen.
5.3.1.2 Shorting Jumper Test

The Shorting Jumper Test helps to distinguish an apparent electrode problem as either a system
electronics or electrode problem.
1.
2.
Open the door.

Disconnect the electrode cables (except glucose, lactate, and PO2) from the rack.
5-95
5. T. Shoot

Shorting
Jumper
Shorting
Jumper
R
Cl
Na
K
BUN
Glu
Lac
pH
PCO2
PO2
SO2
d
e
e
REF
Note:
Electrode cables and
tubing are
not shown here
for clarity.
K
Na
Ca
BUN
Glu
Lac
pH
PCO2
PO2
SO2
PCO2
REF
PCO2
PO2
PO2
Glu
Glu
Electrode
Rack
Assembly
Electrode
Rack
Assembly
S
DWG #7-J-002A
5. T. Shoot
DWG #7-F-003A
Stat Profile Ultra F, G, H
Stat Profile Ultra I, J, K

Figure 5.6 Placement of Shorting Jumper
CAUTION: Do not plug the shorting jumper into the PO2, glucose, or lactate
sockets.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Plug the Shorting Jumper (PN 09931) into all sockets (excluding PO2 , glucose, and
lactate) in the rack as shown in Figure 5.6.
From the System Test #1 screen (press MENU, 5, 1), press CALIBRATE. Ignore
all error codes, except for instability codes. If any of these error codes are displayed,
The millivolt readings at the top of the screen should stay between -2.0 and
+2.0 mV for Na +, K + , Cl -, iCa, BUN, pH, and P CO 2. If any readings are
outside this range, contact Nova Technical Services.
Unplug the shorting jumpers. Connect the electrode cables to the rack.
Wait 5 minutes then press CALIBRATE. After the first calibration is finished,
press CALIBRATE again.
5.3.1.3 Air Detector Test

By turning the air detectors on and off, you can determine if there is a malfunction in an air
detector circuit or if the air detectors (located in the flow path) have excess protein coating.
5-96
5 Troubleshooting
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press MENU, 5, 1, 6, 8, 5, 4 to aspirate air into the flow path.

Press 4 to turn the air detectors on. (Pressing 4 toggles between the on and off
options of the air detector.)
Press CLEAR, 2 to access the Analog Input screen.
The mV reading for channels 17 and 18 should be greater than 800 millivolts. If the
millivolts are less than this, clean the preheater with cleaning solution as per
Section 4.1.5.
Press CLEAR 1, 5, 0, 6, 0 to shut off the pump and return the probe to the home
position.
5.3.1.4 Pump Test

The Pump Test is controlled by the System Test screen. The pump has 4 speeds which can be
changed manually.
1.
0 - Off
1 - Low
2 - MLo
3 - MHi
4 - High
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press 0. The sampler pump should not operate.

Press 5, 1. The pump operates at LOW speed.
Press 5, 2. The pump operates at MEDIUM LOW speed.
Press 5, 3. The pump operates at MEDIUM HIGH speed.
Press 5, 4. The pump operates at HIGH speed.
Press 0 to turn the pump off.
5.3.1.5 Sample Probe Position Test

The 10 Sample Probe positions are monitored by a solid state optical detector on the sampler
board. The detector consists of an infrared emitter and an infrared light detector. When a
position flag blocks the emitter/detector junction, the microcomputer interprets this as home
position (position 0) for the sample probe. All other sampler positions are then found by a
stepper motor which steps the probe to the proper position. The System Test sampler position
function allows manual control of the sampler from the 0 position (fully retracted) through
position 9, the sample aspiration position (fully extended). See Figure 5.7.
5-97
5. T. Shoot
From the System Test #1 screen (press MENU, 5, 1), press 5 to display all 5 speeds
next to the pump function. (The current state of the pump is shown before pressing
5.) These speeds are:

CAUTION: Do not open or close the door when the sample probe is in position 9. Probe damage will occur.
SAMPLE
PROBE
PROBE POSITIONS
5. T. Shoot
DWG #5-0-048A
SEPTUM
ASSEMBLY
GAS
FLUSH
STD C
STD D
STD A
STD B
5
6
SEPTUM
AIR
AIR
SAMPLE
Figure 5.7 Sample Probe Positions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
5-98
From the System Test #1 screen (press MENU, 5, 1), press 6 to display all 10
options next to the Sampler function. (The current state of the sample probe is
shown before pressing 6.)
Press 0. The sample probe does not move (Gas position).
Press 6, 1. The sample probe moves DOWN to position 1 (Flush).
Press 6, 2. The sample probe moves DOWN to position 2 (Std./C).
Press 6, 3. The sample probe moves DOWN to position 3 (Std./D).
Press 6, 4. The sample probe moves DOWN to position 4 (Std. A).
Press 6, 5. The sample probe moves DOWN to position 5 (Std. B).
Press 6, 6. The sample probe moves DOWN to position 6. (Probe tip is buried in
the bottom septum of the septum assembly.)
Press 6, 7. The sample probe moves DOWN to position 7. (Probe tip is just visible
in the depression at the bottom of the septum assembly.)
Press 6, 8. The sample probe moves DOWN to position 8. (Probe tip extends
1/8 inch (3mm) out of septum retainer.)
Press 6, 9. The sample probe moves DOWN to position 9. (Probe tip extends
11/2 inch (38 mm) out of septum assembly for sample aspiration.)
Press 6, 0. The sample probe moves UP to position 0, the home position.
Perform the Probe Septum Assembly Placement Test as follows.
5 Troubleshooting
Probe Placement Test
Proper probe position in the septum assembly is critical for error-free reagent delivery and
analysis. Verify proper probe position as follows:
1.
From the System Test #1 screen (press MENU, 5, 1), press 6, 9 to move the probe
to position 9.
CAUTION: Do not open or close the door when the probe is in position 9.
Probe damage will occur.
2.
Slide the probe adjustment tool (See Figure 5.8) over the probe and hold it firmly
to the base of the sampler assembly so that the probe tip extends toward the stepped
end. The probe tip should be flush with the beginning of the step. If the probe tip
is not flush, adjust as follows.
Probe Position Adjustment

3.
Loosen the screw that holds the sample probe adjustment plate to the sampler
assembly. See Figure 5.8.
5. T. Shoot
DWG #5-0-026B
Probe Tip Flush with the

Beginning of the Step
Figure 5.8 Probe Adjustment
5-99

4.
5.
6.
7.
Move the adjustment plate as needed to position the sample probe flush with the
beginning of the adjustment step. See Figure 5.8.
Tighten the adjustment plate screw to lock the sample probe into position.
Verify that the probe tip is properly adjusted by moving the sampler position to 0
then back to position 9. Use the sample probe adjustment probe to verify the correct
positioning of the sample probe. Repeat the procedure if positioning is not correct.
Press 6, 0 to return the probe to the home position.
5.3.1.6 Valve Test

The pinch valve contains 4 tubing pinch stations which are controlled by a motor-driven cam.
The valve regulates the flow of Standards A, B, C, and D from the reagent pack. Although there
are only 4 valve positions, the motor can move the cam in the forward or the reverse direction.
To allow for testing the valve in both directions, the function numbers 1 through 8 are used to
specify the valve position: 1 through 4 specify the corresponding positions in the forward
direction, and 5 through 8 specify positions 1 through 4 in the reverse direction.
5. T. Shoot
1.
From the System Test #1 screen (press MENU, 5, 1), press 7 to display the 8 valve
options. See Figure 5.9.
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
B
Position 4
1
49A
DWG
#5-0-0
Figure 5.9 Valve Positions
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
5-100
Press 1. The motor does not move, and the valve stays in position 1.
Press 7, 2. The motor moves in the forward direction, moving the valve to position 2.
Press 7, 5. The motor moves in the reverse direction, moving the valve to position 1.
5 Troubleshooting
7.
8.
9.
10.
Press 7, 1. The motor moves in the forward direction, moving the valve to position 1,
the idle position.
5.3.1.7 Gas Test

The gas function allows manual control of the flow of Cal Gas A and Cal Gas B at low, medium,
and high flow rates. Test the gas flow sequence as follows.
CAUTION: The pump bypass valve must always be opened when the gas is
manually turned on (Step 2 below and see Section 5.3.1.8) for gas to flow.
Press 9 to open the pump bypass valve.
Press 8, displaying the 7 gas choices.
Press 0. The gas is off.
Press 8, 1. Gas A bubbles through the humidifier at a slow rate.
Press 8, 2. Gas A bubbles through the humidifier at a medium rate.
Press 8, 3. Gas A bubbles through the humidifier at a fast rate.
Press 8, 4. Gas B bubbles through the humidifier at a slow rate.
Press 8, 5. Gas B bubbles through the humidifier at a medium rate.
Press 8, 6. Gas B bubbles through the humidifier at a fast rate.
Press 8, 0 to shut off the gas.
Press 9 to close the pump bypass valve.
5. T. Shoot
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
5.3.1.8 Pump Bypass Valve Test

Confirm Pump Bypass Valve function as follows:
1.
2.
3.
From the System Test #1 screen (press MENU, 5, 1), press 9 while observing the
bypass valve pinch bar. The pinch bar should retract, opening the W-bypass tubing
segment. See Figure 5.10
Press 6, 9 to extend the sample probe.
Pull back on the plunger of a syringe fitted with a length of tubing and attach the
tubing to the sample probe tip.
5-101

4.
Push air through the flow path. If air does not flow freely, remove the tubing from
the probe cleaning syringe, disconnect the W-line from the reference electrode, and
repeat Steps 3 and 4 with the probe cleaning syringe attached to the W-tubing. If
the air now flows freely, clean the flow path per Section 4.1.5. If the air did not flow
freely, contact Nova Technical Services for assistance.
5. T. Shoot
DWG #5-M-020B
Figure 5.10 Pump Bypass Valve
5.
6.
Press 9 again to extend the pinch bar and pinch the W-bypass tubing closed. If the
valve does not function properly, contact Nova Technical Services for assistance.
Press 6, 0 to return the probe to the home position.
5.3.1.9 Reference Solution Flow Check

The reference solution flow check is useful to determine whether flow to the reference
electrode is blocked or slow, which could cause Na+, K+, Ca++, Cl-, BUN, and pH electrode
slope, drift, or instability errors.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5-102
Press MENU, 5, 1, 6, 0 to enter system test and move the probe to the air position.
Open the door and disconnect the R-line from the reference electrode. Hold the
R-line over a piece of gauze or a sample cup to catch any solution that may flow
in the following steps.
Press 5, 4 to operate the pump at high speed.
Reference solution should flow from the R-line tubing at a minimum of 4 drops per
10 seconds.
5 Troubleshooting
5.
6.
7.
After determining if there is flow, press 5, 0 to turn the pump off.

If the reference solution flow is blocked or slow, flush the reference electrode as
described in Section 5.2.2.3, Flow Path and Component Flushing.
If there is good flow through the reference electrode, the W/R-segments may need
to be replaced as described in Section 4.4, Component Replacement.
5.3.2 Analog Input Data

This screen displays 28 analog channels of real time mV activity. Channel 21 continuously
cycles through 4 of its 8 available subchannels. These channels are useful for advanced
troubleshooting.
Access the analog input as follows:
1.
2.
From the Service Menu, Press 2 to display the Analog Input screen.
Press CLEAR to return to the Ready For Analysis screen.
ANALOG INPUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
mV
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
Chan
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
mV
Chan
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
5. T. Shoot
Chan
mV
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Analog Input Screen
5-103

5.3.3 Analysis/Calibration Signal Data
These channels are useful for advanced troubleshooting.
Access the analog input as follows:
1.
2.
From the Service Menu, Press 3 to display the Analysis/Calibration Signal Data
screens.
Press CLEAR, CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Ready For Analysis screen.
5.3.3.1 Subsystem Test Blood Gases + pH

This screen allows you to check:
5. T. Shoot
Stability of the PO2, PCO2, and pH electrode readings during analysis and
calibration as shown by the Stability (Stab) Factors. Significant increases
in the factors (towards the high single numbers) indicate that electrode
maintenance is needed.
Millivolt readings for the last calibration and the last analysis.
Drift from the calibration value.
Results (Conc) of the last analysis (not temperature corrected). In the event
of a major error, concentration is displayed in reverse video here, but not
displayed on the results screen. Extreme caution is advised should the
choice be made to utilize these results.
Slope Performance Numbers for the last calibration. The Slope Performance Limits are listed in Table 5.4.
Table 5.4 Blood Gases and pH Slope Limits
pH
9.1 - 11.2
PCO2
7.9 - 12.2
PO2
(-15.0) - (-1.6)
This screen is useful for diagnosing a poorly performing electrode. Access this screen as
follows:
1.
2.
5-104
From the Service Menu, press 3. Then continuously press ENTER until the Blood
Gases and pH screen appears.
Press CLEAR to leave this screen.
5 Troubleshooting
BLOOD GASES & pH
Gas B/Std B
Gas A/Std A/Std C
mVStabmVStab Slope
pH
-21.6
0.4
-53.3
0.4
+10.1
pH
-53.3
0.4
+10.1
+127.6
0.4
+111.3
1.3
+9.3
PCO2
PO2
-4.0
0.0
-224.1
0.0
-4.0
Sample
Gas A/Std C
mVStabmVStabConc
pH
-64.7
0.4
-57.1
0.4
7.568
PCO2
-91.9
0.9
+110.5
8.3
18.8
-228.4
0.0
-231.5
0.0
155.1
PO2
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Blood Gases and pH Screen
This screen is useful for diagnosing a poorly performing electrode and allows you to check:
Stability of Na+, K+, Cl-, and iCa electrode readings for analysis and
calibration as shown by the Stability (Stab) Factors. Significant increases
in the factors (towards the high single numbers) indicate that electrode
Results (Conc) of the last analysis. In the event of a major error, concentration is displayed in reverse video here, but not displayed on the results
screen. Extreme caution is advised should the choice be made to utilize
these results.
Table 5.5 Electrolyte Slope Limits
Na+
K+
Ca++
Cl-
8.8
8.6
8.9
7.7
10.7
10.9
11.6
12.2
5-105
5. T. Shoot
5.3.3.2 Subsystem Test Electrolytes

Access this screen as follows:
1.
2.
From the Service Menu, press 3. Then continuously press ENTER until the
Electrolytes screen appears.
Press CLEAR to exit this screen.
ELECTROLYTES
Std D/Std B
Std C/Flush
mVStabmVStabSlope
Na+
-180.3
2.9
-165.5
1.8
+9.2
+42.1
0.4
+0.6
0.0
+10.2
K+
Cl-/Ca++ +0.6
0.1
-8.5
0.3
+10.4
Sample
Std C/Flush
mVStabmVStabConc
Na+
-166.3
2.5
-160.5
0.2
133.0
K+
+0.2
0.1
+0.3
0.3
3.94
Cl-/Ca++ -5.5
0.2
-8.5
0.2
1.27
5. T. Shoot

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Electrolytes Screen
5.3.3.3 Subsystem Test Glucose, Lactate, and BUN

This screen is useful for diagnosing a poorly performing glucose or lactate electrode, and the
screen allows you to check:
5-106
Stability of glucose, lactate, and BUN electrode readings for analysis and calibration as shown by the Stability (Stab) Factors. Significant increases in the factors
(towards the high single numbers) indicate that electrode maintenance is needed.
Results (Conc) of the last analysis. In the event of a major error, concentration is
displayed in reverse video here, but not displayed on the results screen. Extreme
caution is advised should the choice be made to utilize these results.
Slopes from the last calibration. The slope limits are listed in Table 5.6.
5 Troubleshooting
Table 5.6 Glucose , Lactate, and BUN Slope Limits
Glucose
5.0
45.0
Lactate
6.0
100.0
BUN
8.9
12.2

1.
2.
From the Service Menu, press 3. Then continuously press ENTER until the
Metabolites screen appears.
METABOLITES
5. T. Shoot
Std D
Std C/Std A
mVStabmVStabSlope
Glu
+33.9
0.0
+12.6
0.5
+17.8
Lac
+39.9
0.1
+14.8
0.3
+41.7
Lac
+70.2
0.6
BUN
-9.0
0.8
-39.1
0.2
+10.6
BUN
+3.3
0.8
Sample
Std C
mVStabmVStabConc
Glu
+13.7
0.0
+12.4
0.4
86.4
Lac
+5.8
0.1
+13.4
0.0
0.7
BUN
-37.7
0.1
-39.1
0.3
10.6
30 Apr 94
11:45:45
Metabolites Screen
5.3.3.4 Subsystem Test Air Detectors and Hct

This screen is useful for diagnosing a poorly performing air detector and allows you to check:
Air detector millivolt differences on calibration.

Millivolt readings for the last calibration and the last analysis for the Hct
Impedance electrode.
Stability of the Hct impedance electrode both on last analysis and last
calibration as shown by the Stability (Stab) Factor. A significant increase
in the factor towards the high single numbers indicates that electrode
Drift from the calibration value for the Hct Impedance electrode.
5-107
Table 5.7 Hematocrit Slope Limits
Hct
40.0
98.0

1.
2.
From the Service Menu, press 5. Then continuously press ENTER until the Air
Detectors & Hct screen appears.
AIR DETECTORS & Hct
5. T. Shoot
Std BStd C
AD2
+196.5
+126.4
AD3
+314.3
+273.0
mV
+70.1
+41.3
Std C
Std B
mVStabmVStabSlope
Hct
+314.3
0.4
+273.0
0.1
+66.4
Sample
Std C
mVStabmVStab Conc
Hct
+270.2
0.0
+272.1
0.5
48

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Air Detectors and Hct Screen
5-108
5 Troubleshooting
5.3.3.5 Oxygen Saturation
This screen is useful for diagnosing a poorly performing SO2% and allowing you to check:
SO2% millivolt differences on calibration.

Millivolt readings for the last calibration and the last analysis for the SO2%
reflectance electrode

1.
2.
From the Service Menu, press 3. Then continuously press ENTER until the Oxygen
Saturation screen appears.
OXYGEN SATURATION
Std 1
mVStab
LED 1 +123.4
12.3
LED 3 +123.4
12.3
LED 1
LED 3
Dark
mVStab
+123.4
12.3
+123.4
12.3
5. T. Shoot
Flush
mVStab
LED 1 +123.4
12.3
LED 3 +123.4
12.3
Std 2
mVStabSlope
+123.4
12.3
+12.3
+123.4
12.3
+12.3
Sample
mVStabConc
+123.4
12.3
123.4
+123.4
12.3

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Oxygen Saturation Screen
5-109

5.3.4 Subsystem Temperature Control
This screen allows you to observe analyzer temperature readings. It is used by the Service
Representative for system diagnostics. Observe the analyzer temperature as follows:
1.
2.
From the Service Menu, press 4, Temperature Control Signal Data, to display the
Temperature Control screen.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
AB BLR MTR
SP REMOVED
Temperature
Air Bath
37.0 C
Preheater
37.1 C
Thermistor
Current
+0004.30 mV
+ 566.68 mV
+0080.10 mV
+ 50.99 mV
DAC
5. T. Shoot
DOOR OPEN
Controller
119
On
Off
134
On
Off
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Temperature Control Screen
5-110
5 Troubleshooting
5.3.5 Fluid/Gas Prime
This screen allows you to prime all the solutions and gases individually. Also the flow path can
be purged with this screen displayed. Display the screen as follows:
1.
2.
3.
From the Service Menu, press 6 to display the Fluid/Gas Prime Options screen.
Press the number corresponding to the solution or gas that you want to prime or
pump or press 8 to purge the flow path.
FLUID / GAS PRIME OPTIONS
Prime
Prime
Prime
Prime
Prime
Prime
Prime
Purge
Flush
Std. A
Std. B
Std. C
Std. D
Gas A
Gas B
Flow Path
5. T. Shoot
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Fluid/Gas Prime Options Screen
5.3.6 I/O Devices

This screen is used to transmit results and calibration data. It also allows access to the bar code
wand port test, printer subsystem, external parallel port, communications tests, and disk drive
utilities.
1.
2.
3.
4.
From the Service Menu, press 7 to display the I/O Devices Menu.
Press 1 to 2 to transmit last results or calibration data.
To access options 3 through 7 see Sections 5.3.6.1 to 5.3.6.4.
Press CLEAR to exit the I/O Devices Menu.
5-111

I/O DEVICES MENU
Data Transmission in Progress
1
2
3
Transmit Last Results

Transmit Calibration Data
Bar Code Wand Port Test
4
5
6
7
Printer Subsystem
External Parallel Port
Communications Tests
Disk Drive Utilities
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
I/O Devices Menu Screen
5. T. Shoot
5.3.6.1
This screen is used primarily by Nova Service Technicians to test the bar code wand port. A
test fixture is necessary to test the port.
1.
2.
Press 3 to display the Bar Code Wand Port Test screen.
3.
If performing the test, install the test fixture onto the port and press ENTER.
If not performing the test, press CLEAR to exit the I/O Devices Menu.
BAR CODE WAND PORT TEST
Install test fixture on port
Press ENTER to Start testing

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Bar Code Wand Port Test Screen
5-112
5 Troubleshooting
Testing Completed After 123 Passes
Data
Timeouts
Parity
Framing
Overrun
Errors
1
0
0
103
196
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Bar Code Wand Port Test Screen
Printer Subsystem
This screen allows you to:
Test print head function
Print out setup parameters
Print out system parameters
Print system error log
Terminate lengthy printouts
Enable or disable the printer

The NOVA factory-set value of 127 DAC units prints medium print darkness. Increasing the
DAC value gives darker print but correspondingly decreases the life of the print head.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Press 4 to display the Printer Subsystem screen.
Press 1 to print a character set (prints all possible characters).
Press 2 to print system dump (yields all millivolt, slope, setup, and other system
parameters).
Press 3 to print the setup parameters (causes a printout of all setup parameters,
modes, and values).
Press 4 to print the system error log.
Press 5 to abort the printout (stops any printing operation).
Press 6 to enable or disable the printer.
Press CLEAR to exit the I/O Devices Menu.
5-113
5. T. Shoot
5.3.6.2

PRINTER SUBSYSTEM
Character Set Test
2
3
4
Print System Dump

Print Set-Up Parameter
Print System Error Log
Cancel Print-out
Printer Enabled
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Printer Subsystem Screen
5. T. Shoot
5.3.6.3 External Parallel Port

This screen is used primarily by Nova Service Technicians to test the external printer port. A
test fixture is necessary to test the port.
1.
2.
Press 5 to display the External Parallel Port Test screen.
3.
If performing the test, press 1. Install the test fixture onto the port and press ENTER
to start testing.
If not performing the test, press CLEAR to exit the I/O Devices Menu.
EXTERNAL PARALLEL PORT TEST

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
External Parallel Port Screen
5-114
5 Troubleshooting
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
External Parallel Port Test Screen
5. T. Shoot
5.3.6.4 Subsystem Test Communications

This screen enables the following:
Manual transfer of test results to external devices

ASCII character transmission to verify transmitter functioning
End-of-Line delay adjustments
Test results may be transmitted manually at any time after the analysis has been completed and
the results have been displayed. If the Manual Transmit mode has been selected in the Set Up
Menu, this is the only way to transmit results (see Section 2.2.1). The Transmitter Test and Endof-Line Delay Adjust functions are useful for setting up and troubleshooting communications
links. Note that once the End-of-Line Delay has been determined on this screen, the value
should be programmed into the system as a setup parameter. For more information on the
Communications Subsystem, see Section 6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
From the I/O Devices Menu, press 6 to display the Communications Test screen.
Press 1 to select communication port test.
Press 2 to run a Transmitter Test, printing out an ASCII character sequence for
transmitter verification.
Press 3 to do a loop-back test.
5-115

COMMUNICATIONS TEST
COM Port to Test
Transmit Test Characters
Digital Loop-Back Test
COM1
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Communications Test Screen
Press 2 to display the Transmitter Test screen.

5. T. Shoot
TRANSMITTER TEST
These characters will be transmitted

continuously until the Clear key is pressed.
------------------------------------------------The Brown Fox Jumped Over...
The Brown Fox Jumped Over...

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
5-116
5 Troubleshooting
Press 3, to display the Digital Loop-Back Test screen.
DIGITAL LOOP-BACK TEST
Install test fixture on COM1

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
5. T. Shoot
Testing Pass 123
Errors
TXD
RXD
DSR
DTR
DCD
CTS
RTS
RI
123
123
123
123
123
Press CLEAR to Stop Test.
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Digital Loop-Back Test Screens
5-117

Errors
TXD
RXD
DSR
DTR
DCD
CTS
RTS
RI
123
123
123
123
123
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
5. T. Shoot
Digital Loop-Back Test Screen
5.3.6.5 Disk Drive Utilities

CAUTION: Do Not place disk on top of or beside the analyzer box. The door
and box contain a magnetic loop.
After loading the software, all stored results and setup selections will be deleted, and the analyzer will need to be calibrated.
First print the current setup parameters:
1.
From the Main Menu, press 5 to display the Service Menu.
2.
From the Service Menu, press 7 to display the I/O Devices Menu screen.
3.
Select 4, the Internal Printer Subsystem option.
4.
Select 3, the Print Set-up Parameters option.
Now, load the software as follows:
1.
Insert the software disk into the disk drive.
2.
Press CLEAR (after printing the setup parameters).
3.
Press 7 to display the Disk Operations screen.
5-118
5 Troubleshooting
DISK OPERATIONS
SYSTEM BUSY
Program Reload
30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Disk Operations Screen
Press 1 to load the software.

The Program Reload screen will appear with a warning. Press ENTER to load
software.
PROGRAM RELOAD
Warning! All Stored Results Will be Deleted.
Insert program disk in drive.

30 Apr 95
11:45:45
Program Reload Screen
6.
7.
Document the date of the software update (if new version).

To confirm the software version, press MENU, 5 (Service Menu), enter your
password, then press 1 (System Test). The top line of the System Test screen
displays the version and revision number of the running software.
5-119
5. T. Shoot
4.
5.

8.
9.
10.
11.
5.4
Review the setup parameters of the previous software from the printout.
Make the appropriate setup selections.
Calibrate the analyzer.
Upon completion of the QC setup, an optional printout of the setup parameters may
be made and saved for future reference. The software disk may remain in the
analyzer or stored in a secure location for emergency use.
Analyzer Reset
Can occur under some circumstances if the laboratory has a power supply
or grounding problem.
Can also be initiated by the key operator (if the lab has forgotten the setup
password or needs to solve a rare software-related condition).
The analyzer will lose all battery-protected setup selections and certain
operations menu selections as well.
All selected options revert to the factory defaults.
5. T. Shoot
To reset the analyzer:

1.
Turn power switch (located in back above power cord) off then on.
2.
When the Power Self Test message appears on the screen, immediately press the
CLEAR key.
The analyzer is now reset.
5-120
6 Computer/Peripheral
6.0 Stat Profile Ultra Communications Interface
The following are guidelines for the implementation of the Nova Stat Profile Ultra Communications System to the ASTM E 1394-91 and ASTM E 1381-91 Standards.
6.1 Introduction
This chapter describes how the Ultra transmits data to an external computer. Data transmission
involves a low-level protocol and a high-level protocol.
The low-level protocol is concerned with establishing communication, detecting errors, and
sending and receiving messages. It is not concerned with message content.
The high-level protocol is concerned with message content.
The protocols used by Ultra are designed to conform to specifications published by the
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). Copies of the specifications can be
obtained by contacting ASTM:
ASTM
100 Barr Harbor Drive
West Conshohocken, PA USA 19428-2959
USA
6. Computer
Phone:
FAX:
(610) 832-9585
(610) 832-9555
6.2 Low-Level Protocol

The low-level protocol used by Ultra is designed to conform to ASTM E1381-91.
NOTE: You can configure the Ultra so that ACK/NAK responses are not
required. When Ultra is configured in this way, the frame structure conforms to ASTM E1381-91, but the low-level protocol as a whole does not.
The Ultra can receive only ACK and NAK responses from the external computer; it cannot
receive messages from the external computer. In other words, the Ultra is always the sender.
In the description of the low-level protocol, italic numbers in parentheses refer to sections of
the ASTM E1381-91 specification. For example, (6.5.2.4) means that more information can
be found in section 6.5.2.4 of ASTM E1381-91.
6-1

6.2.1 Communication States
The Ultra will, at any time, be in one of 4 possible states. These 4 states, which are listed in the
sequential order as they will occur, are:
IDLE State
LINK ESTABLISHMENT State
TRANSFER State
LINK TERMINATION State

With one exception, each of the 4 states may be entered only after leaving the state immediately
preceding it. The exception is a state transition from the LINK ESTABLISHMENT state to the
LINK TERMINATION state. (LINK TERMINATION is considered to precede IDLE; in
other words, the list is circular.)
6.2.1.1 Idle State

IDLE state is the state that Ultra remains in until a session is to take place. After a session is
completed, Ultra returns to the IDLE state.
6. Computer
6.2.1.2 Link Establishment State

The Link Establishment State determines the direction of data flow and defines which
instrument is to be the sender and which instrument is to be the receiver.
NOTE: Ultra cannot be the receiver.

Ultra notifies the receiver that information is available and initiates transmission by sending
an <ENQ> character. The receiver has 15 seconds to determine if it is ready to receive the
information and reply with an <ACK> (if ready) or <NAK> (if not ready) transmission control
character. An <ACK> response from the receiver will send both instruments into the Transfer
State; if the receiver responds with a <NAK> control character (or any other character except
<ACK>), Ultra will decide that communication cannot be established. If no character is
received by Ultra within the 15 second period, Ultra will send another <ENQ>; if no response
is received to the second <ENQ> within 15 seconds or if any response other than <ACK> is
received, Ultra will decide that communication cannot be established. When Ultra decides that
communication cannot be established, it enters Link Termination State and displays a message
to inform the Ultra operator that communication could not be established.
6-2
6.2.1.3 Transfer State
During the Transfer State, the Ultra transmits messages to the receiver. The Ultra continues in
this state until all messages are transmitted or an abnormal exit condition arises.
The Transfer State is entered by both instruments after a successful link bid occurs. After
entering this state, the Ultra has 30 seconds to send the first frame. If no frame or <EOT> is
received within the specified time period, the receiver should proceed to the Link Termination
State. (6.5.2.4)
After receiving a frame, the receiver has 15 seconds to respond with an acknowledgment
control character (ACK/NAK). If the receiver responds with a <NAK> control character, Ultra
will transmit the same frame again within a 30 second time period. Ultra will transmit the same
frame 6 times before giving up and entering the Link Termination State. If the receiver
responds with an <ACK> control character, the next frame should be expected to arrive within
a 30 second time period. (6.5.2.3, 6.5.2.4)
Messages are sent in frames. Frames are described in sections 6.3.1 through 6.3.3.3 of
ASTM E1381-91. Ultra does not transmit messages of more than 240 characters; this means
that Ultra does not use the <ETB> transmission control character.
Frame acknowledgment is described in sections 6.3.4 through 6.3.4.4 of ASTM E1381-91.
Ultra does not honor receiver interrupt requests. (6.3.4.4 ,6.3.5.3)
6.2.1.4Link Termination State
6.3 High-Level Protocol

The High-Level Protocol used by Ultra is designed to conform to ASTM E1394-91.
The tables that follow describe the data records that are sent by Ultra. The column ASTM REF
lists the section of the ASTM E1394-91 specification that defines the field. The column
ASTM NAME lists the field name that appears in the ASTM specification.
Unless otherwise noted, any field that involves date and time conforms to section 6.6.2 of
ASTM 1394-91.
Each record ends with a carriage return.
6-3
6. Computer
The Link Termination State returns the data link to the Idle State. The Ultra transmits an
<EOT> character to notify the receiver that all frames have been sent and the session is
terminated. Upon reception of the <EOT> character, the receiver should immediately enter the
Idle State.
6. Computer
6.3.1 Header Record

ASTM REF ASTM NAME
ULTRA IMPLEMENTATION
7.1.1
Record Type ID
Single character: H
7.1.2
Delimiter Definition
Standard delimiters: | \ ^ &
7.1.3
Message Control ID
Not Used
7.1.4
Access Password
Not used
7.1.5
Sender Name or ID
NOVAÛLTRA x^vv..vv^dd
Where x is A for Ultra A, B for Ultra B,
etc., vv..vv is version of Ultra software, and
dd is an Analyzer Identification # set by the
Ultra operator.
NOTE: For early versions of Ultra C, "ULTRA11"
will be sent instead of ULTRA C.
7.1.6
Sender Street Address
Not used
7.1.7
Reserved
Not used
7.1.8
Sender Tel. Number
Not used
7.1.9
Characteristics of sender
Not used
7.1.10
Receiver ID
Not used
7.1.11
Comment or Special Instruction
Not used
7.1.12
Processing ID
Not used
7.1.13
Version No.
Version of ASTM Specification, single

character: 1.
7.1.14
Date and Time of Message
Date and time at which message was transmitted. (This is not the time of the analysis or
calibration.)
6-4
6.3.2 Patient Information Record
8.1.1
Record Type
Single character: P
8.1.2
Sequence Number
Single character: 1. (This will always be 1

because there will be only one patient record per
message.)
NOTE: This is NOT the Frame Number (FN)
referred to in ASTM E1381-91.
8.1.3
Practice Assigned Patient ID
Not used
8.1.4
Laboratory Assigned Patient ID
Patient ID # if available; otherwise, blank. (Patient ID # is available if and only if it was entered
by Ultra operator.) For cals, this will be blank.
For QC samples, this will be the lot number of
the control material. NOTE: This is the last field
that is used in this record.
8.1.5
Patient ID No. 3
Not used
8.1.6
Patient Name
Not used
8.1.7
Mothers Maiden Name
Not used
8.1.8
Birthdate
Not used
8.1.9
Patient Sex
Not used
8.1.10
Patient Race-Ethnic Origin
Not used
8.1.11
Patient Address
Not used
8.1.12
Reserved Field
Not used
8.1.13
Patient Telephone Number
Not used
8.1.14
Attending Physician ID
Not used
8.1.15
Special Field 1
Not used
6. Computer
ASTM REF ASTM NAME
6-5
6. Computer

ASTM REF ASTM NAME
8.1.16
Special Field 2
Not used
8.1.17
Patient Height
Not used
8.1.18
Patient Weight
Not used
8.1.19
Patients Known or Suspected Diagnosis Not used
8.1.20
Patient Active Medications
Not used
8.1.21
Patients Diet
Not used
8.1.22
Practice Field No. 1
Not used
8.1.23
Practice Field No. 2
Not used
8.1.24
Admission and Discharge Dates
Not used
8.1.25
Admission Status
Not used
8.1.26
Location
Not used
8.1.27
Nature of Alternative Diagnostic Code

and Classifier
Not used
8.1.28
Alternative Diagnostic Code

and Classification
Not used
8.1.30
Marital Status
Not used
8.1.31
Isolation Status
Not used
8.1.32
Language
Not used
8.1.33
Hospital Service
Not used
8.1.34
Hospital Institution
Not used
8.1.35
Dosage Category
Not used
6-6
6.3.3 Test Order Record
9.4.1
Record Type ID
Single character: O
9.4.2
Sequence Number
Single character: 1. (This will always be 1

because Ultra will send only one order record
for each patient record.)
9.4.3
Specimen ID
Accession # if available; otherwise, blank. For

patient samples, Accession # is available if and
only if it was entered by Ultra operator and
consists solely of decimal digits. For QC analyses, the Accession # begins with the characters
QC and may contain spaces and alphanumeric
characters. For cals, the Accession # is blank.
9.4.4
Instrument Specimen ID
Sample Number from Ultras Sample Number

Counter. For cals, this will be blank.
NOTE: The operator can alter the sample number
after any sample. Therefore, two samples could have
the same sample number, and it is possible that
two consecutive samples would not have consecutive sample numbers.
9.4.5
Universal Test ID
Not used
9.4.6
Priority
Not used
9.4.7
Requested/Ordered Date and Time
Not used
9.4.8
Specimen Collection Date and Time
Time drawn, if available; otherwise, blank. (Time

drawn is available if and only if it was entered by
Ultra operator.) For cals, this will be blank.
NOTE: Since time drawn is a string that is
entered by the operator, its format may not
conform to Section 6.6.2 of ASTM E1394-91.
For example, time drawn may contain a decimal point.
6-7
6. Computer
ASTM REF ASTM NAME
6. Computer

ASTM REF ASTM NAME
9.4.9
Collection End Time
Not used
9.4.10
Collection Volume
Not used
9.4.11
Collector ID
Not used
9.4.12
Action Code
Not used
9.4.13
Danger Code
Not used
9.4.14
Relevant Clinical Information
Not used
9.4.15
Date/Time Specimen Received
Not used
9.4.16
Specimen Descriptor
Arterial, Expired Gas, "Control", etc. For

cals, this will be Cal.
9.4.17
Ordering Physician
Not used
9.4.18
Physicians Telephone Number
Not used
9.4.19
User Field No. 1
Not used
9.4.20
User Field No. 2
Not used
9.4.21
Laboratory Field No. 1
Not used
9.4.22
Laboratory Field No. 2
Not used
9.4.23
Day/Time Results Reported/Last Modified Not used
9.4.24
Instrument Charge to Computer System Not used
9.4.25
Instrument Section ID
6-8
Not used
ASTM REF ASTM NAME
9.4.26
Report Types
P - preliminary results (Results require remote

review.)
F - final results (Results do not require remote
review.)
NOTE: P means that remote review was enabled and the operator ID requires remote
review. Remote review can be used ONLY with
a NOVA PDMS.
NOTE: This is the last field that is used in this record.
9.4.27
Reserved Field
Not used
9.4.28
Location of Ward of Specimen Collection Not used
9.4.29
Nosocomial Infection Flag
Not used
9.4.30
Specimen Service
Not used
9.4.31
Specimen Institution
Not used
6. Computer
6.3.4 Result Record

ASTM REF ASTM NAME
10.1.1
Record Type
Single character: R
10.1.2
Sequence Number
Counts the parameters sent for this order; 1 for

the first parameter, 2 for the second, etc.
10.1.3
Universal Test ID
Four or five components: the first three are not

used (see E1394 6.6.1.1-6.6.1.3); the fourth is a
parameter name to be assigned by NOVA; the
fifth will be the parameter type and will be one
of the following:
C - Calculated D - Default E - Entered
M - Measured T - Temperature Corrected
NOTE: Parameter names are listed elsewhere in
this document.
6-9
6. Computer

ASTM REF ASTM NAME
10.1.4
Data or Measurement Value
Value of the parameter as an ASCII string. If

there was an error that prevented display of the
value, the three-character string ERR will be
used instead of the value. If Ultra could not
format the result for display because there were
too many digits to the left of the decimal point, the
result (including the decimal point, if any) will be
replaced by asterisks (e.g., ****). If Ultra
could not format the result for display because the
result was positive overload, negative overload,
or negative when only positive is allowed, then
the result (including the decimal point, if any)
will be replaced by question marks (e.g., ????).
If there was an error that did not prevent display,
the value will be preceded by a ? (e.g. ?140.4).
If the channel is uncalibrated, the result will be
replaced by a string of the form uc .
NOTE: This value may include leading spaces.
Also, values that begin with a sign character
(+ or -) may have one or more spaces between the sign and the first digit.
10.1.5
Units
Abbreviation of units.
10.1.6
Reference Ranges
Not used
10.1.7
Result Abnormal Flags
HH - Above High Panic value

H - Above High Reference value
L - Below Low Reference value
LL - Below Low Panic value
When a slope is sent, this field will be one of the
following:
A - (abnormal) channel is not calibrated
N - (normal) channel is calibrated
NOTE: When this field is blank, at least one of the
following is true:
a. A reference range has been set, and the
measurement is within the reference range.
b. A reference range has not been set, but a
panic range has been set, and the measurement
is within the panic range.
c. Neither a reference range nor a panic range
has been set.
d. The sample is a Q.C. sample.
6-10
10.1.8
Nature of Abnormality Testing
Not used
10.1.9
Result Status
P - preliminary result (Result requires remote

review.)
F - final result (Result does not require remote
review.)
NOTE: P means that remote review was enabled and the operator ID requires remote
review. Remote review can be used ONLY with
a NOVA PDMS.
10.1.10
Date of Change of Instrument

Normative Values or Units
Not used
10.1.11
Operator Identification
User ID#
NOTE: If more than one result is sent for an order
(as will typically be the case), this field will be
used only in the first result record.
10.1.12
Date/Time Test Started
Date and Time at which the analysis started.

NOTE: If more than one result is sent for an order
(as will typically be the case), this field will be
used only in the first result record.
10.1.13
Date/Time Test Completed
Not used
10.1.14
Instrument Identification
Not used
6-11
6. Computer
ASTM REF ASTM NAME

6.3.5 Comment Record for Error
6. Computer
Comment Record(s) will immediately follow a Test of Record if and only if there were any
errors during sample analysis. There will be one Comment record for each error.
ASTM REF ASTM NAME
11.1.1
Record Type
Single character: C
11.1.2
Sequence Number
Counts the comments sent for this order; 1 for

the first comment, 2 for the second, etc.
11.1.3
Comment Source
Single character: I
11.1.4
Comment Text
An error code followed by descriptive text.

(e.g., 25 Na Unstable).
11.1.5
Comment Type
Single character: I
6.3.6 Message Terminator Record

ASTM REF ASTM NAME
13.1.1
Record Type
Single character: L
13.1.2
Sequence Number
For this record type this is always 1.

13.1.3
Termination Code
One of the following:

N - normal termination
T - sender aborted
6-12
6.4 Parameter Names
The parameter names listed here are used as Manufacturers or Local Code (see ASTM E139491 sec. 6.6.1.4). They are used to create the Universal Test ID field of the result record (see
Result Record above and see ASTM E1394-91 sec. 10.1.3).
Only a subset of these parameters will be transmitted. No single Ultra model reports all of the
parameters listed here. Also, during setup the operator can disable transmission of any or all
of the following:
Analysis millivolt data

Analysis drift data
Calibration slope and millivolt data
Calibration drift data
NOTE: When transmission of analysis millivolt data is enabled, slopes from

the last calibration are also transmitted.
Individual parameters that have been suppressed will not be transmitted. Also, calculated
results that depend on suppressed results will not be transmitted.
Units
Description
Na+
mmol/L
Sodium Concentration
Na+_M1
mV
Sodium Millivolts #1
Na+_M2
mV
Sodium Millivolts #2
Na+_SL
None
Sodium Slope
Na+_D1
None
Sodium Drift #1
Na+_D2
None
Sodium Drift #2
Na+_V1
None
Sodium Calibration Std. Value #1
Na+_V2
None
Sodium Calibration Std. Value #2
K+
mmol/L
Potassium Concentration
K+_M1
mV
Potassium Millivolts #1
6. Computer
Parameter Name
6-13
6. Computer

Parameter Name
Units
Description
K+_M2
mV
Potassium Millivolts #2
K+_SL
None
Potassium Slope
K+_D1
None
Potassium Drift #1
K+_D2
None
Potassium Drift #2
K+_V1
None
Potassium Calibration Std. Value #1
K+_V2
None
Potassium Calibration Std. Value #2
Cl-
mmol/L
Chloride Concentration
Cl-_M1
mV
Chloride Millivolts #1
Cl-_M2
mV
Chloride Millivolts #2
Cl-_SL
None
Chloride Slope
Cl-_D1
None
Chloride Drift #1
Cl-_D2
None
Chloride Drift #2
Cl-_V1
None
Chloride Calibration Std. Value #1
Cl-_V2
None
Chloride Calibration Std. Value #2
Ca++
mmol/L, mg/dL
Ionized Calcium Concentration
nCa
mmol/L, mg/dL
Normalized Ionized Calcium Concentration
Ca++_M1
mV
Ionized Calcium Millivolts #1
Ca++_M2
mV
Ionized Calcium Millivolts #2
Ca++_SL
None
Ionized Calcium Slope
Ca++_D1
None
Ionized Calcium Drift #1
6-14
Units
Description
Ca++_D2
None
Ionized Calcium Drift #2
Ca++_V1
None
Ionized Calcium Calibration Std. Value #1
Ca++_V2
None
Ionized Calcium Calibration Std. Value #2
Mg++
mmol/L, mg/dL
Ionized Magnesium Concentration
nMg
mmol/L, mg/dL
Normalized Ionized Magnesium Conc.
Mg++_M1
mV
Ionized Magnesium Millivolts #1
Mg++_M2
mV
Mg++_M3
mV
Mg++_SL
None
Ionized Magnesium Slope
Mg++_D1
None
Ionized Magnesium Drift #1
Mg++_D2
None
Ionized Magnesium Drift #2
Mg++_V1
None
Ionized Magnesium Calibration Std. Value #1
Mg++_V2
None
Ionized Magnesium Calibration Std. Value #2
Hct
Hematocrit (vol %)
Hct_M1
mV
Hematocrit Millivolts #1
Hct_M2
mV
Hematocrit Millivolts #2
Hct_SL
None
Hematocrit Slope
Hct_D1
None
Hematocrit Drift #1
Hct_D2
None
Hematocrit Drift #2
pH
None
pH
6-15
6. Computer
Parameter Name
6. Computer

Parameter Name
Units
Description
pHTC
None
pH Corrected to Patient Temperature
pH_M1
mV
pH Millivolts #1
pH_M2
mV
pH Millivolts #2
pH_M3
mV
pH Millivolts #3
pH_SL
None
pH Slope
pH_D1
None
pH Drift #1
pH_D2
None
pH Drift #2
pH_V1
None
pH Calibration Std. Value #1
pH_V2
None
pH Calibration Std. Value #2
PO2
mmHg, kPa
PO2
PO2TC
mmHg, kPa
PO2 Corrected to Patient Temperature
PO2_M1
mV
PO2 Millivolts #1
PO2_M2
mV
PO2 Millivolts #2
PO2_SL
None
PO2 Slope
PO2_D1
None
PO2 Drift #1
PO2_D2
None
PO2 Drift #2
PO2_V1
None
PO2 Calibration. Gas Value #1
PO2_V2
None
PO2 Calibration. Gas Value #2
PCO2
mmHg, kPa
PCO2 Concentration
PCO2T
mmHg, kPa
Corrected PCO2
6-16
Units
Description
PCO2_M1
mV
PCO2 Millivolts #1
PCO2_M2
mV
PCO2 Millivolts #2
PCO2_SL
None
PCO2 Slope
PCO2_D1
None
PCO2 Drift #1
PCO2_D2
None
PCO2 Drift #2
PCO2_V1
None
PCO2 Calibration. Gas Value #1
PCO2_V2
None
PCO2 Calibration. Gas Value #2
GLU
mg/dL, mmol/L
Glucose Concentration
GLU_M1
mV
Glucose Millivolts #1
GLU_M2
mV
Glucose Millivolts #2
GLU_SL
None
Glucose Slope
GLU_D1
None
Glucose Drift #1
GLU_D2
None
Glucose Drift #2
GLU_V1
None
Glucose Calibration Std. Value #1
GLU_V2
None
Glucose Calibration Std. Value #2
LAC
mmol/L, mg/dL
Lactate Concentration
LAC_M1
mV
Lactate Millivolts #1
LAC_M2
mV
LAC_M3
mV
LAC_SL
None
Lactate Slope
6. Computer
Parameter Name
6-17
6. Computer

Parameter Name
Units
Description
LAC_D1
None
Lactate Drift #1
LAC_D2
None
Lactate Drift #2
LAC_V1
None
Lactate Calibration Std. Value #1
LAC_V2
None
Lactate Calibration Std. Value #2
BUN
mg/dL, mmol/L
BUN Concentration
BUN_M1
mV
BUN Millivolts #1
BUN_M2
mV
BUN Millivolts #2
BUN_M3
mV
BUN Millivolts #3
BUN_SL
None
BUN Slope
BUN_D1
None
BUN Drift #1
BUN_D2
None
BUN Drift #2
Urea
mg/dL, mmol/L
Urea Concentration
Urea_M1
mV
Urea Millivolts #1
Urea_M2
mV
Urea Millivolts #2
Urea_M3
mV
Urea Millivolts #3
Urea_SL
None
Urea Slope
Urea_D1
None
Urea Drift #1
Urea_D2
None
Urea Drift #2
Creat
mg/dL, mol/L
Creatinine Concentration
Creat_M1
mV
Creatinine Millivolts #1
6-18
Units
Description
Creat_M2
mV
Creatinine Millivolts #2
Creat_SL
None
Creatinine Slope
Creat_D1
None
Creatinine Drift #1
Creat_D2
None
Creatinine Drift #2
SO2%
SO2 Percent
SO2%_M1
mV
SO2 Millivolts #1
SO2%_M2
mV
SO2 Millivolts #2
SO2%_SL
None
SO2 Slope
SO2%_D1
None
SO2 Drift #1
SO2%_D2
None
SO2 Drift #2
S1_M1
mV
SO2 LED #1 millivolts #1
S1_M2
mV
S1_M3
mV
S1_M4
mV
S1_M5
mV
S3_M1
mV
S3_M2
mV
S3_M3
mV
S3_M4
mV
S3_M5
mV
6. Computer
Parameter Name
6-19
6. Computer

Parameter Name
Units
Description
FIO2
Percent Fraction Inspired Oxygen
BP
mmHg
Barometric Pressure
TempM
deg C, deg F
Measurement Temperature
TempP
deg C, deg F
Patient Temperature
Hb
g/dL
Hemoglobin
BE-ecf
mmol/L
Base Excess, Extra-Cellular Fluid
BE-b
mmol/L
Base Excess, Blood
SBC
mmol/L
Standard Bicarbonate
HCO3-
mmol/L
Bicarbonate Ion Concentration
TCO2
mmol/L
Total CO2
O2Ct
Vol/100mL
Oxygen Content
mmHg, kPa
Alveolar Oxygen
a/A
None
Arterial/Alveolar Oxygen Tension Ratio
AaDO2
mmHg, kPa
Alveolar Arterial Oxygen Tension Gradient
P50
mmHg
PO2 @ 50% SO2
O2CAP
Vol/100mL
Oxygen Capacity
Osm
mOsm/kg
Osmolarity
RI
None
Respiratory Index
Gap(K)
None
Anion Gap, calculated with K+
PO2/FI
mmHg, kPa
PO2/FIO2
6-20
6.5 Examples
NOTE: The examples that follow were created by a Stat Profile Ultra C
Analyzer. Data sent by other Stat Profile Ultra analyzers are similar but not
identical to the data in these examples.
Example #1
This example includes both low level and high level protocol. It also shows <ACK> responses
received by the Ultra. The responses are shown in double square brackets ([[<ACK>]]). This
example is for an expired gas sample. Expired gas was chosen for this example because the
expired gas message is relatively short and a short message is desirable when observing the low
level protocol.
The following parameters apply to this example:
ANALYSIS OUPUT OPTIONS:
Analysis Transmit Mode:
Transmit Analysis mV Data:
Transmit Analysis Drift Data:
Transmit Analysis Errors:
Auto
Off
Off
On
6. Computer
INSTRUMENT:
ULTRA, software version 99.0.23
IDENTIFIERS ENTERED DURING SET UP:
Analyzer Identifier: 64
IDENTIFIERS ENTERED FOR SAMPLE:
Patient ID:
0987
Accession #: 00123
Sample Type: Expired Gas
OTHER IDENTIFIERS:
Sample #:
401
Operator ID#: 102
DATE and TIME:
Analyzed :
June 8, 1995 at 13:26:46
Transmitted : June 8, 1995 at 13:28:00
6-21

Example #1
<ENQ>[[<ACK>]]
<STX>1H|\^&|||NOVAÛLTRA11^99.0.23^64||||||||1|19950608132800<CR><ETX>BF<CR><LF>
[[<ACK>]]
<STX>2P|1||0987<CR><ETX>0F<CR><LF> [[<ACK>]]
<STX>3O|1|000123|401||||||||||||Expired_Gas|||||||||F<CR><ETX>70<CR><LF>
[[<ACK>]]
<STX>4R|1|^^^PCO2^M| 4.5|mmHg||||F||102|19950608132646<CR><ETX>09<CR><LF>
[[<ACK>]]
<STX>5R|2|^^^PO2^M|150.4|mmHg||||F<CR><ETX>06<CR><LF> [[<ACK>]]
<STX>6R|3|^^^BP^M|738.7|mmHg||||F<CR><ETX>D8<CR><LF> [[<ACK>]]
<STX>7R|4|^^^TempPÊ| 37.0|deg C<CR><ETX>DB<CR><LF> [[<ACK>]]
<STX>0L|1|N<CR><ETX>03<CR><LF> [[<ACK>]]
<EOT>
6. Computer
Example #2
This example shows only the characters of the high-level protocol records. The following
parameters apply to this example:
Auto
Off
Off
On
INSTRUMENT:
ULTRA , software version 99.0.23
Patient ID:
987214
Accession #: 550663
Sample Type: Arterial
Time Drawn: 13.05 (this is an operator-entered string)
6-22
OTHER IDENTIFIERS:
Sample #:
407
Operator ID#: 102
DATE and TIME:
Analyzed :
June 8, 1995 at 14:17:59
6. Computer
H|\^&| | | NOVAÛLTRA11^99.0.23^64||||||||1|19950608142025
P|1| | 987214
O|1|550663|407| | | | 13.05| | | | | | | | Arterial| | | | | | | | | F
C|1|I|64 Hct TOO LOW|I
C|2|I|9D Lac BACKGROUND HI|I
C|3|I|81 Mg++ OUT OF RANGE|I
R|1|^^^pHTC^T|7.164| | | | | F||102|19950608141759
R|2|^^^PCO2TC^T| 56.7|mmHg| | | | F
R|3|^^^PO2TC^T| 70.1|mmHg| | | | F
R|4|^^^SO2%^M| uc| | | | | F
R|5|^^^Hct^M|? 4.|%| | | | F
R|6|^^^Na+^M|158.|mmol/L| | | | F
R|7|^^^K+^M| 5.9|mmol/L| | | | F
R|8|^^^Ca++^M| 1.53|mmol/L| | | | F
R|9|^^^Mg++^M|? 0.05|mmol/L| | | | F
R|10|^^^GLU^M| uc|mg/dL| | | | F
R|11|^^^LAC^M|ERR|mmol/L| | | | F
R|12|^^^BE-ecf^C|- 8.3|mmol/L| | | | F
R|13|^^^BE-b^C|- 5.6|mmol/L| | | | F
R|14|^^^HCO3-^C|20.5|mmol/L| | | | F
R|15|^^^TCO2^C|22.2|mmol/L| | | | F
R|16|^^Â^C| 76.7|mmHg| | | | F
R|17|^^ÂaDO2^C| 6.6|mmHg| | | | F
R|18|^^â/A^C| 0.9| | | | | F
R|19|^^^Hb^C|? 1.3|g/dL| | | | F
R|20|^^^nCa^C| 1.35|mmol/L| | | | F
R|21|^^^nMg^C|? 0.05|mmol/L| | | | F
R|22|^^^BP^M|739.3|mmHg| | | | F
R|23|^^^TempPÊ| 37.1|deg C
L|1|N
6-23

Example #3
Auto
Off
On
On
INSTRUMENT:
Patient ID:
1473
Accession #: 5055223
Sample Type: Arterial
6. Computer
OTHER IDENTIFIERS:
Sample #:
408
Operator ID#: 102
DATE and TIME:
Analyzed :
June 8, 1995 at 14:21:55
H|\^&| | | NOVAÛLTRA11^99.0.23^64| | | | | | | | 1|19950608142420

P|1| | 1473
O|1|5055223|408| | | | | | | | | | | | Arterial| | | | | | | | | F
C|1|I|64 Hct TOO LOW|I
C|2|I|9D Lac BACKGROUND HI|I
C|3|I|81 Mg++ OUT OF RANGE|I
R|1|^^^pHTC^T|7.171| | | | | F| | 102|19950608142155
R|2|^^^PCO2TC^T| 56.7|mmHg| | | | F
R|3|^^^PO2TC^T|134.0|mmHg| | | | F
R|4|^^^SO2%^M| uc| | | | | F
6-24
R|5|^^^Hct^M|? 4.|%| | | | F
R|6|^^^Na+^M|157.|mmol/L| | | | F
R|7|^^^K+^M| 5.9|mmol/L| | | | F
R|8|^^^Ca++^M| 1.52|mmol/L| | | | F
R|9|^^^Mg++^M|? 0.05|mmol/L| | | | F
R|10|^^^GLU^M| uc|mg/dL| | | | F
R|12|^^^BE-ecf^C|- 7.9|mmol/L| | | | F
R|13|^^^BE-b^C|- 5.2|mmol/L| | | | F
R|14|^^^HCO3-^C|20.8|mmol/L| | | | F
R|15|^^^TCO2^C|22.6|mmol/L| | | | F
R|16|^^Â^C| 76.7|mmHg| | | | F
R|17|^^â/A^C| 1.7| | | | | F
R|18|^^^Hb^C|? 1.2|g/dL| | | | F
R|19|^^^nCa^C| 1.35|mmol/L| | | | F
R|20|^^^nMg^C|? 0.05|mmol/L| | | | F
6. Computer
R|21|^^^BP^M|739.3|mmHg| | | | F
R|23|^^^pH_D1|-0.006|mV
R|24|^^^Na+_D1|- 0.0|mV
R|25|^^^K+_D1|- 0.0|mV
R|26|^^^Ca++_D1|- 0.0|mV
R|27|^^^Mg++_D1|- 0.0|mV
R|28|^^^LAC_D1|+ 0.0|mV
R|29|^^^pH_V1|7.384
R|30|^^^Na+_V1|140.0
R|31|^^^K+_V1| 4.0
R|32|^^^Ca++_V1|1.0
R|33|^^^Mg++_V1| 0.5
R|34|^^^LAC_V1| 2.0
L|1|N
6-25

Example #4
Auto
On
Off
Off
NOTE: Slopes are transmitted when Analysis mV Data transmission is on.

INSTRUMENT:
6. Computer

Patient ID:
6931
Accession #: 482108
Sample Type: Venous
OTHER IDENTIFIERS:
Sample #:
404
Operator ID#: 102
DATE and TIME:
Analyzed :
June 8, 1995 at 13:43:44
6-26
H|\^&| | | NOVAÛLTRA11^99.0.23^64| | | | | | | | 1|19950608134609
P|1| | 6931
O|1|482108|404| | | | | | | | | | | | Venous| | | | | | | | | F
R|1|^^^pHTC^T|7.386| | | | | F||102|19950608134344
R|2|^^^PCO2TC^T| 36.5|mmHg| | | | F
R|3|^^^PO2TC^T| 98.6|mmHg| | | | F
R|4|^^^SO2%^M| uc| | | | | F
R|5|^^^Hct^M|? 3.|%| | | | F
R|6|^^^Na+^M|138.|mmol/L| | | | F
R|7|^^^K+^M| 3.7|mmol/L| | | | F
R|8|^^^Ca++^M| 0.93|mmol/L| | | | F
R|9|^^^Mg++^M| 0.53|mmol/L| | | | F
R|10|^^^GLU^M| uc|mg/dL| | | | F
R|12|^^^BE-ecf^C|- 3.2|mmol/L| | | | F
R|13|^^^BE-b^C|- 2.1|mmol/L| | | | F
6. Computer
R|14|^^^HCO3-^C|22.1|mmol/L| | | | F
R|15|^^^TCO2^C|23.2|mmol/L| | | | F
R|16|^^Â^C|101.0|mmHg| | | | F
R|17|^^ÂaDO2^C| 2.4|mmHg| | | | F
R|18|^^â/A^C| 1.0| | | | | F
R|19|^^^Hb^C|? 1.1|g/dL| | | | F
R|20|^^^nCa^C| 0.93|mmol/L| | | | F
R|21|^^^nMg^C| 0.53|mmol/L| | | | F
R|22|^^^BP^M|738.8|mmHg| | | | F
R|24|^^^pH_SL|+10.6| | | N
R|25|^^^PCO2_SL|+10.3| | | N
R|26|^^^PO2_SL|- 6.5| | | N
R|27|^^^Hct_SL|+68.9| | | N
R|28|^^^Na+_SL|+10.0| | | N
6-27

R|29|^^^K+_SL|+10.0| | | N
R|30|^^^Ca++_SL|+ 9.2| | | N
R|31|^^^Mg++_SL|+11.2| | | N
R|32|^^^GLU_SL|+ 1.2| | | A
R|33|^^^LAC_SL|+13.7| | | N
R|34|^^^pH_M1|+ 13.0|mV
R|35|^^^pH_M2|+ 12.9|mV
R|36|^^^PCO2_M1|+ 10.9|mV
R|37|^^^PCO2_M2|+ 10.6|mV
R|38|^^^PO2_M1|- 68.6|mV
R|39|^^^PO2_M2|- 93.0|mV
R|40|^^^Hct_M1|+255.7|mV
R|41|^^^Hct_M2|+254.7|mV
R|42|^^^Na+_M1|- 94.1|mV
R|43|^^^Na+_M2|- 93.5|mV
R|44|^^^K+_M1|- 16.8|mV
6. Computer
R|45|^^^K+_M2|- 15.5|mV
R|46|^^^Ca++_M1|- 5.0|mV
R|47|^^^Ca++_M2|- 4.2|mV
R|48|^^^Mg++_M1|+ 18.3|mV
R|49|^^^Mg++_M2|+ 17.9|mV
R|50|^^^Mg++_M3|+ 30.3|mV
R|51|^^^GLU_M1|+ 5.9|mV
R|52|^^^GLU_M2|+ 4.6|mV
R|53|^^^LAC_M1|+ 19.8|mV
R|54|^^^LAC_M2|+ 16.3|mV
R|55|^^^LAC_M3|+ 40.9|mV
R|56|^^^S1_M5|+100.7|mV
R|57|^^^S3_M5|+226.1|mV
L|1|N
6-28
Example #5
This example shows only the characters of the high-level protocol records. This example is for
a calibration. The following parameters apply to this example:
CALIBRATION OUPUT OPTIONS:
Calibration Transmit Mode:
Transmit Calibration Slope and mV Data:
Transmit Calibration Drift Data:
Transmit Calibration Errors:
Auto
Off
Off
Off
INSTRUMENT:
DATE and TIME:
H|\^&| | | NOVAÛLTRA11^99.0.23^64| | | | | | | | 1|19950608130924

P|1
Example #6
This example shows only the characters of the high-level protocol records. This example is for
a calibration. The following parameters apply to this example:
CALIBRATION OUPUT OPTIONS:
Calibration Transmit Mode:
Transmit Calibration Slope and mV Data:
Transmit Calibration Drift Data:
Transmit Calibration Errors:
Auto
On
Off
On
INSTRUMENT:
DATE and TIME:
6-29
6. Computer
O|1| | | | | | | | | | | | | | Cal| | | | | | | | | F L|1|N
6. Computer
H|\^&| | | NOVAÛLTRA11^99.0.23^64| | | | | | | | 1|19950608135740

P|1
O|1| | | | | | | | | | | | | | Cal| | | | | | | | | F
C|1|I|49 Glu SLOPE ERROR|I
R|1|^^^pH_SL|+10.5| | | N
R|2|^^^PCO2_SL|+10.3| | | N
R|3|^^^PO2_SL|- 6.5| | | N
R|4|^^^Hct_SL|+68.4| | | N
R|5|^^^Na+_SL|+ 9.9| | | N
R|6|^^^K+_SL|+10.0| | | N
R|7|^^^Ca++_SL|+ 9.1| | | N
R|8|^^^Mg++_SL|+11.2| | | N
R|9|^^^GLU_SL|+ 1.0| | | A
R|10|^^^LAC_SL|+12.8| | | N
R|11|^^^pH_M1|+ 13.0|mV
R|12|^^^pH_M2|+ 46.3|mV
R|13|^^^PCO2_M1|+ 10.6|mV
R|14|^^^PCO2_M2|+ 27.3|mV
R|15|^^^PO2_M1|- 92.9|mV
R|16|^^^PO2_M2|- 2.2|mV
R|17|^^^Hct_M1|+254.8|mV
R|18|^^^Hct_M2|+298.6|mV
R|19|^^^Na+_M1|- 93.6|mV
R|20|^^^Na+_M2|-109.6|mV
R|21|^^^K+_M1|- 15.2|mV
R|22|^^^K+_M2|+ 7.4|mV
R|23|^^^Ca++_M1|- 4.1|mV
R|24|^^^Ca++_M2|+ 3.8|mV
R|25|^^^Mg++_M1|+ 18.2|mV
R|26|^^^Mg++_M2|+ 19.7|mV
R|27|^^^Mg++_M3|+ 29.7|mV
R|28|^^^GLU_M1|+ 3.9|mV
R|29|^^^GLU_M2|+ 5.1|mV
R|30|^^^LAC_M1|+ 15.0|mV
R|31|^^^LAC_M2|+ 22.7|mV
R|32|^^^LAC_M3|+ 41.0|mV
L|1|N
6-30
Appendix A Specifications
A
Instrument Specifications
This section includes instrument specifications for the Stat Profile Ultra Analyzer.
A.1
Instrument Specifications*
Measurement Range:
pH
PCO2
PO2
Na+
K+
CliCa
Glucose
Lactate
BUN
SO2 %
Hct
6.50 - 8.00
3.0 - 200 mm Hg
0 - 800 mm Hg
80 - 200 mmol/L
1.0 - 20.0 mmol/L
50 - 200 mmol/L
0.1 - 2.7 mmol/L
15 - 500 mg/dL
0.3 - 20.0 mmol/L
3.0 -100.0 mg/dL
30 - 100 %
12 - 70 %
Acceptable Samples:
Whole Blood (for pH, PCO2, PO2, SO2, Hct, Na+, K+, Cl-,
iCa, Glu, Lac, BUN)
Plasma (for Na+, K+, Cl-, iCa, Glucose, Lactate, BUN)
Serum (for Na+, K+, Cl-, iCa, Glucose, Lactate, BUN)
Expired Gas (for PCO2 and PO2)
Measuring Technology:
A. Specs.
Ion Selective Electrodes (Na+, K+, Cl-, iCa, pH, PCO2)

Combination ISE and enzyme electrode (BUN)
Amperometry (PO2, Glucose, Lactate)
Conductivity (Hematocrit)
Reflectance Photometry (Oxygen saturation)
*Specifications are subject to change.

A-1

Analysis Rate:
Ultra F, G, H
Ultra F, G, H
Ultra I, J, K
Ultra I, J, K
Stat Analysis Time
Throughput Time
2.6 minutes
1.3 minutes
2.9 minutes
1.3 minutes
2.8 minutes
1.5 minutes
3.1 minutes
1.5 minutes
A. Specs.
Single Mode
Normal Mode
Single Mode
Normal Mode
Analysis time measures how long the analyzer takes to

give results.
Throughput includes washout time and measures how
long it takes before the analyzer is ready for the next
sample.
Sample Volume:
225 microliters whole blood, plasma, serum
Barometer:
450 - 800 2 mmHg
Reagents:
A single reagent pack contains all fluids for 300 samples

(2700 tests)
Slope Limits:
pH
PO2
PCO2
Na+
K+
CliCa
Glu
Lac
BUN
SO2
Hct
9.1 - 11.2
-15.0 - (-1.6)
7.9 - 12.2
8.8 - 10.7
8.6 - 10.9
7.7 - 12.2
8.9 - 11.6
5.0 - 45.0
6.0 - 100.0
8.0 - 12.2
7.0 - 20.0
40.0 - 98.0
A-2
Analytical Specifications for Imprecision
Analyte
pH
PCO2
PO2
Na+
K+
CliCa
Glu
Lac
BUN <60 mg/dL
BUN >60 mg/dL
SO2
Hct
Within-run
Precision
n=20
Day-to-Day
Precision
n=20
Whichever is Greater
CV%
SD
0.005
3.0
1.0 (mmHg)
3.0
1.5 (mmHg)
1.0
1.0 (mmol/L)
1.5
0.15 (mmol/L)
1.5
2.0 (mmol/L)
2.0
0.05 (mmol/L)
3.0
2.0 (mg/dL)
3.0
0.3 (mmol/L)
3.0
0.5 (mg/dL)
3.0
0.5 (mg/dL)
1.0 SO2%
1.0 Hct%
Whichever is Greater
CV%
SD
0.013
5.0
2.0 (mmHg)
5.0
3.0 (mmHg)
1.5
1.0 (mmol/L)
3.0
0.15 (mmol/L)
2.5
2.0 (mmol/L)
4.0
0.05 (mmol/L)
5.0
3.0 (mg/dL)
6.0
0.3 (mmol/L)
4.0
0.5 (mg/dL)
4.5
0.5 (mg/dL)
1.5 SO2%
1.0 Hct%
Stat Profile Plus Method Comparison

Analyte
Mode
Number of
Samples N
Correlation
Coefficient R
Reference
Instrument
pH
Blood
90
0.997
6.88 - 7.44
STAT Plus 9
PCO2
Blood
74
0.994
28 - 112 mmHg
STAT Plus 9
PO2
Blood
101
0.999
18 - 414 mmHg
STAT Plus 9
SO2
Blood
100
0.999
12.6% - 99.0%
Corning 2500
Co-oximeter
Na+
Plasma
Blood
54
87
0.998
0.969
86 - 151 mmol/L
125 - 149 mmol/L
STAT Plus 9
STAT Plus 9
K+
Plasma
Blood
44
87
0.997
0.998
2.0 - 14.8 mmol/L

3.6 - 17.4 mmol/L
STAT Plus 9
STAT Plus 9
Cl-
Plasma
Blood
60
60
0.997
0.994
89 - 145 mmol/L
91 - 133 mmol/L
STAT Plus 10
STAT Plus 9
iCa
Plasma
Blood
69
95
0.999
0.998
0.3 - 2.5 mmol/L

0.6 - 3.5 mmol/L
STAT Plus 9
STAT Plus 9
Glu
Plasma
Blood
63
77
0.999
0.998
30 - 552 mg/dL
50 - 708 mg/dL
STAT Plus 9
STAT Plus 9
Lac
Plasma
Blood
68
92
0.997
0.994
1.1 - 16.4 mmol/L

0.7 - 17.6 mmol/L
STAT Plus 9
STAT Plus 9
BUN
Plasma
Blood
60
63
0.997
0.994
5 - 96 mg/dL
7 - 93 mg/dL
STAT Plus 10
STAT Plus 10
Hct
Blood
83
0.996
16% - 68%
STAT Plus 9

A-3
A. Specs.
Range

Point-of-Care Usage
The Stat Profile Plus Ultra F, G, H, I, J, and K Analyzers may be used in point-of-care settings.
These Ultra analyzers are essentially similar to the Nova Stat Profile Plus 10 in basic operation,
maintenance, and troubleshooting. The Stat Profile Plus 10 has been evaluated in several pointof-care settings (Operating Room, Emergency Room, and Intensive Care Unit) and found safe
for usage in point-of-care settings. The analytical test data summarized in the following 2 tables
was collected in a blood gas laboratory setting on a Stat Profile Plus 10 Analyzer by trained
personnel from a point-of-care setting. Because of the similarity between the Stat Profile Plus and
the Stat Profile Ultra analyzers, these data are representative of expected precision and method
comparison results obtainable on the Stat Profile Ultra F, G, H, I, J, and K Analyzers in pointof-care settings. Some patient samples were spiked or modified to span the assay range.
The analytes which are measured on the Stat Profile Ultra F, G, H, I, J, and/or K are in the
following 2 tables for easy reference.
Stat Profile Plus 10 Within Run Precision Results
Point-of-Care Study
Stat Profile Controls ( N=18-25)
Analyte
pH
PCO2 mmHg
PO2 mmHg
mmol/L
Na+
K+
mmol/L
Cl-(a) mmol/L
BUN mg/dL
GLU(b) mg/dL
LAC(c) mmol/L
Hct
%
Mean
Level 1
SD
%CV
Mean
Level 2
SD
%CV
Mean
Level 3
SD
%CV
7.166
64.9
55.0
158.7
5.96
126.1
10.0
80
0.8
33
0.003
1.62
1.25
0.38
0.07
0.81
0.28
1.58
0.05
0.39
7.361
42.8
95.7
139.1
3.91
99.6
29
200
2.9
53
0.004
1.13
2.15
0.38
0.05
0.85
0.92
3.09
0.09
0.55
7.588
21.7
136.7
121.8
1.93
85.5
50
300
7.6
-
0.006
0.57
4.32
0.71
0.02
1.39
1.43
8.37
0.19
-
2.50
2.30
0.20
1.20
0.60
0.70
2.00
6.10
-
A. Specs.
(a) Stat Profile Ultra F, G, and H only

(b) Stat Profile Ultra G, H, J, and K only
(c) Stat Profile Ultra H and K only
A-4
2.60
2.20
0.30
1.20
0.90
3.20
1.50
2.90
-
2.60
3.20
0.60
1.20
1.60
2.90
2.80
2.50
-
Stat Profile Plus 10 Patient Comparison Results
Point-of-Care Study
Patient Comparison
Analyte
Number of
Samples N
Correlation
Coefficient R2
Slope
Y-Intercept
pH
PCO2
PO2
Na+
K+
Cl-(a)
BUN
GLU(b)
LAC(c)
Hct
50
50
50
50
50
50
49
50
46
50
0.994
0.986
0.995
0.983
0.987
0.992
0.995
0.995
0.995
0.841
0.991
0.920
1.008
0.973
0.864
0.942
0.985
0.989
0.987
0.886
+0.066
+3.455
+0.414
+3.889
+0.609
+6.12
+0.191
+0.939
+0.039
+5.40
Range
7.079 - 7.536
13.5 - 135.6 mm Hg
10.8 - 352.8 mm Hg
134.2 - 192.1 mmol/L
2.94 - 15.23 mmol/L
92.5 - 168.2 mmol/L
5 - 86 mg/dL
40 - 424 mg/dL
0.6 - 17.0 mmol/L
12 - 55 %
(a) Stat Profile Ultra F, G, and H only

(b) Stat Profile Ultra G, H, J, and K only
(c) Stat Profile Ultra H and K only
NOTE: Reference Method: Stat Profile Plus 10 operated in a laboratory

setting.
Calibration Gases:
Gas Standard A
Carbon Dioxide
Oxygen
Nitrogen
Specified Value
5.0%
20.0%
Balance
Accuracy
0.03%
0.03%
Gas Standard B
Carbon Dioxide
Nitrogen
Specified Value
10.0 %
Balance
Accuracy
0.03%
To meet UL and CSA standards
A. Specs.
Electrical Compliance:
The 2 gas cylinders are E size and contain gases as follows:
Temperature Thermostatting: 37 C 0.1 C

Dimensions:
Height:
Width:
Depth:
18.75 in (46.1 cm)

22.25 in (56.5 cm)
23 in (58.4 cm)
Weight:
70 lb (52.38 kg) without reagent pack
A-5

Power:
90-264 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 200W
FDA Labeling:
For in vitro diagnostic use
Cleaning the CRT:
Clean the display screen with a damp (not wet) lint-free cloth.
For a heavy buildup, use a liquid glass cleaner sprayed onto a
lint-free cloth first, never spray directly onto the CRT display.
If available, prepackaged screen wipes can also be used.
Cleaning the Cabinet:
Clean the cabinet with a damp (not wet) lint-free cloth. Do not
use aerosol sprays, solvents, or abrasives that might damage the
finish.
Lifting the Analyzer:
1. Two people are needed to lift the analyzer.
CAUTION: Never use the control panel or doors (open or closed) to assist
you in lifting the analyzer. They cannot support the weight of the analyzer.
A. Specs.
2. From the left side (CRT), Person #1 places right-hand and

left-hand fingertips under the finger ridge.
3. Tilt the analyzer so that both hands (one at a time) can grip
under the analyzer (approximately 2 inches in from the front
and back).
4. From the right side (electrodes), Person #2 places right hand
on the back of the machine to steady it as Person #1 tilts the
analyzer backward.
5. Person #2 can now grip under the analyzer (approximately
2 inches in from the front) with the left hand. Then remove
right hand from the back and grip under the analyzer
(approximately 2 inches in from the back).
6. The analyzer now can be lifted from floor or bench and
moved to a new location. If on the floor, position the
analyzer to lift with your legs and not your back.
7. Reverse the directions to place the analyzer back down.
Warranty:
See Appendix H Warranty
A-6
Appendix B Theory
B
Theory
This section explains instrument theory of the Stat Profile Ultra Analyzer.
Origin of the Potential Measurement

To help understand the ion exchange phenomena that occur at the membrane of the ion
selective electrode, consider first the ion exchange taking place at the surface of a simple
permeable membrane, such as a dialysis membrane, in a concentration cell between 2 salt
solutions, A and B. See Figure B.1. Because solution B has a smaller concentration of the ions
in both solutions, a concentration gradient is set up at the membrane.
= SODIUM
= POTASSIUM
= CHLORIDE
SOLUTION A
0.2 M KCl
SOLUTION B
0.05 M NaCl
SOLUTION A
0.04 M NaCl
0.04 M KCl
DWG #5-0-070B
B.1
SOLUTION B
0.04 M NaCl
0.04 M KCl
SIMPLE
PERMEABLE
MEMBRANE
BEFORE EQUILIBRATION
AFTER EQUILIBRATION
Figure B.1 Ionic Diffusion
B-1
B. Theory
The concentration gradient creates a driving force to send ions in solution from the cell where
they are most concentrated across the membrane to the cell where they are less concentrated.
This force decreases as the concentration equalizes on both sides of the membrane. Equilibration results in equal salt concentrations on both sides of the membrane and equal rates of
migration across the membrane.

At equilibrium, the ratio of the ion concentrations in the 2 solutions is:
[Cl ]o
[Cl ]i
[Na ]o
[Na ]i
+
[K ]o
[K ]i
+
Equation 1
where subscripts i and o denote ions on either side of the membrane.

In Figure B.2, the dialysis membrane is replaced with an ion selective membrane which can
differentiate ions. For purposes of discussion, a K+ selective membrane is used. This means the
membrane can differentiate potassium ions from all other ions in solution. As the ions in
Solutions A and B move about, the K+ ions enter into the ion selective sites on the membrane
surface and leave behind the negatively charged Cl- ions. The chloride ions line up adjacent to
the membrane and set up a potential which prevents further movement across the membrane
surface.
SOLUTION A
0.2 M KCl
SOLUTION B
0.05 M NaCl
DWG #5-0-071B
SOLUTION A
0.2 M KCl
SOLUTION B
0.05 M NaCl
ION
SELECTIVE
MEMBRANE
++++
----
B. Theory
Figure B.2 Establishment of Membrane Potential
At equilibrium, a potential difference or membrane potential is established. The areas on either

side of the membrane can be compared to the 2 poles of a miniature battery with a voltage equal
to the potential difference across the membrane. The membrane potential is dependent on the
activities of the potassium ions on either side of the membrane and was described by Nernst:
Em =
B-2
RT
a
ln o
ai
nF
Equation 2
Appendix B Theory
where Em is the membrane potential, a is the activity of the potassium ion, R is the universal
gas constant, T is the temperature in degrees Kelvin, F is Faradays constant, and n is the charge
of the measured ion: +1 for sodium and potassium, +2 for calcium, -1 for chloride. (The activity
of an electrolyte can be called a measure of its effective concentration in solution. It is equal
to the concentration multiplied by the ions activity coefficient, f; that is, a = f * c. The activity
coefficient describes an ions ability to react in solution.)
When the glass tube in Figure B.2 is filled with a salt solution of constant composition, called
the internal filling solution, the electric potential of the membrane depends only on the solution
outside the membrane as follows:
Em = Eo +
RT
ln a o
nF
Equation 3
where Eo is a constant that includes a term for ai, the activity of the ion in the IFS.
We can convert from the natural logarithm (ln) in Equation 3 to a base 10 logarithm and an
equivalent equation:
E m = E o + 2.303
RT
log a o
nF
Equation 4
In order to measure the potential on the ion selective membrane, a complete electrical circuit
is needed. A typical ion selective electrode measuring circuit is shown in Figure B.3. There are
2 electrodes here: a reference electrode and the ion selective electrode. The potential of the
reference electrode is constant; that of the ISE varies, depending on the activity of the ion of
interest in the test solution. A voltmeter measures the potential difference between the ion
selective electrode and the reference electrode.
VOLTMETER
ION - SELECTIVE
ELECTRODE
REFERENCE
ELECTRODE
INTERNAL
FILLING
SOLUTION
B. Theory
LIQUID/LIQUID
JUNCTION
SAMPLE SOLUTION
ION - SELECTIVE
MEMBRANE
Figure B.3 Electrode Measuring Circuit
B-3

The potential difference of the entire electrode measuring circuit, Ecell, is equal to the algebraic
sum of the potential from the ion selective electrode, Em, the reference electrode, Er, and the
junction potential, Ej.
Ecell = Em - Er - Ej
Equation 5
The junction potential is the potential developed at the liquid/liquid junction between the
reference electrode and the test solution. The magnitude of the liquid junction potential which
arises as a result of the interdiffusion of the ions at the liquid/liquid junction is inconsequential.
RT
By setting S = 2.303
and substituting Equation 4 for Em,
nF
Equation 5 can be rewritten:
Ecell = Eo + S log ao - Er - Ej
Equation 6
S is called the electrode slope. Under ideal conditions at 37 C, it is theoretically equal to

approximately 30.8 mV per decade change in activity for a divalent ion and 61.5 mV for a
univalent ion. The slope is obtained by graphing potential, E, vs. the log of the activity,
S =
E std
E std
C
log
D
Equation 7
where C is the activity of Standard C and D is the activity of Standard D.
When the unknown activity of the ion of interest is measured in a test solution, the potential
of the test solution, Ex, is compared with that of a standard solution, Estd, in which the activity
of the ion of interest is known. Most of the terms cancel out as follows:
B. Theory
minus
Ex
= Eo + S log ax - Er - Ej
Equation 8
Estd
= Eo + S log astd - Er - Ej
___________________
Equation 9
E = E x E std = S Log
ax
a std
Equation 10
Thus, the difference in potential between the 2 solutions, E, is dependent only on the ratio of
the activity of the ion of interest in the test solution, ax, and the activity of the ion of interest
in the standard solution, astd.
B-4
Appendix B Theory
B.2
Electrode Calibration
B.2.1 Two-Point Calibration

The analyzer uses a 2-point calibration to set electrode slope and verify electrode performance.
The reagent pack and gas cylinders contain the standards which are used for this purpose.
Calibration can be initiated manually by pressing CALIBRATE and is also initiated automatically by the system at intervals of approximately 2 to 6 hours, depending on use.
B.2.2 One-Point Calibration

Electrode drift is the slow variation in electrode response over time. As expressed in Equation
10, the determination of the activity for an unknown sample is dependent on both the electrode
potential generated by the unknown and that generated by the standard. The analyzer uses a
1-point calibration to monitor and minimize the effect of the electrode drift on the analytical
results. A 1-point calibration occurs at 30 or 45 minute intervals and is independent of the
sample cycle.
An E-Zero or Analysis to Analysis drift error code is displayed when electrode drift is beyond
the drift limits.
B.3
Principles of Measurement
B.3.1 Sodium, Potassium, Chloride, and Ionized Calcium
B-5
B. Theory
The electrolyte electrodes require a sensing (ion selective) membrane, a reference electrode,
and an internal filling solution. Internal filling solution provides a fixed concentration of the
ion and the sample provides a second ion concentration.
A suitable electrode membrane is selectively permeable to a single ion of interest in the sample.
This selective permeability establishes an electrical potential as the charge associated with the
ion leaves its counter-ion behind in solution. The magnitude of this electrical potential is
determined by the concentration difference between the 2 sides of the membrane.

Calculating Sample Concentration
Equation 6 links the voltage of the cell (Em) to the activity of the ion. Activity is related to
concentration (C) through the activity coefficient in the relation a = f * C. The activity
coefficient is a function of ionic strength. Thus, Equation 6 can be rewritten in terms of
concentration as follows:
Ecell = Eo + S (f * C)o - Er - Ej
Equation 11
Similarly, Equation 10 is rewritten:

(fC)x
E = Ex - Estd = S log _________
(fC)std
Equation 12
The total ionic strength of whole blood, plasma, and serum is relatively constant over the
physiological range.1 As a result, the activity coefficients of sodium, potassium, calcium, and
magnesium can be assumed to be constant. The internal standards are formulated to reflect the
same ionic strength as that of whole blood. Therefore, a given ions activity coefficient can be
assumed to be equal in the standard and sample. The activity coefficient terms in Equation 12
cancel out resulting in:
Cx
E = Ex - Estd = S log ____
Cstd
Equation 13
By holding Cstd in Equation 13 constant, E is dependent on only 1 variable, Cx, the concentration
of the ion of interest in the sample. Equation 14 can be rearranged to isolate this variable:
Cx = (Cstd) 10(E/S)
Equation 14
B. Theory
The analyzers microcomputer uses Equation 14 to calculate the concentration of sodium,

potassium, calcium, and magnesium ions in the sample.
B.3.2 pH Electrode
Principle of pH Measurement
pH is measured using a hydrogen ion selective glass membrane. One side of the glass is in
contact with a solution of constant pH. The other side is in contact with a solution of unknown
pH. A change in potential develops which is proportional to the pH difference of these
solutions. This change in potential is measured against a reference electrode of constant
potential. The magnitude of the potential difference is a measure, then, of the pH of the
unknown solution.
B-6
Appendix B Theory
Definition of pH
The pH is defined as the negative logarithm of the hydrogen ion activity:
pH = -log10 aH+
Equation 15
Thus, when negative pH is substituted for the logarithm of the activity in Equation 10, the
equation becomes:
E = Ex - Estd = -SpHx - (-SpHstd)
Equation 16
Equation 16 can be rearranged so that pH, the pH of the unknown sample, can be calculated
by the microcomputer using 2 calibrating solutions of known pH:
pH x = pH std
where Slope =
E x E std
Slope
Equation 17
E x E std A
pH std A pH std
B.3.3 Partial Pressure of Carbon Dioxide (PCO2)

Definition of PCO2
The partial pressure (tension) of carbon dioxide in solution is defined as the partial pressure
of carbon dioxide in the gas phase in equilibrium with the blood.
Principle of PCO2 Measurement
PCO2 is measured with a modified pH electrode. Carbon dioxide in the unknown solution
CO 2 + H 2 O H 2 CO3 H + + HCO3
Equation 18
The electrolyte solution behind the membrane is in contact with a glass hydrogen ion selective
electrode. The change in hydrogen ion activity in the electrolyte solution produces a potential
which is measured against the internal filling solution. This change in potential is measured
against the constant potential of the reference electrode half cell and is logarithmically related
to the PCO2 of the unknown sample.
B-7
B. Theory
makes contact with a gas permeable membrane mounted on a combination measuring/

reference electrode. CO2 diffuses across the membrane into a thin layer of electrolyte solution
in response to partial pressure difference. This solution then becomes equilibrated with the
external gas pressure. CO2 in the solution becomes hydrated producing carbonic acid which
results in a change in hydrogen ion activity.

B.3.4 Partial Pressure of Oxygen (PO2)
Definition of PO2
The partial pressure (tension) of oxygen in solution is defined as the partial pressure of oxygen
in the gas phase in equilibrium with the blood. PO2 provides an indication of the availability
of oxygen in inspired air.
Principle of PO2 Measurement
PO2 is measured amperometrically by the generation of a current at the electrode surface. As

oxygen diffuses through a gas permeable membrane, the oxygen molecules are reduced at the
cathode, consuming 4 electrons for every molecule of oxygen reduced. This flow of electrons
is then measured by the electrode and is directly proportional to the partial pressure of oxygen.
B.3.5 Hematocrit
Hematocrit is defined as the percentage of red blood cells to the total blood volume and can
be obtained by measuring electrical resistance of the blood sample. Two standard solutions are
used to calibrate the hematocrit electrode and to obtain the slope. The analyzer then measures
the electrical resistance of the blood sample to obtain the hematocrit value. Next, the
hematocrit value obtained is corrected for the concentration of the sodium ion. The correction
equation is as follows:
Hct Corr = Hct Measure
Na +
140.0
B. Theory
where Na+ is the sodium concentration of the sample.
B-8
Equation 19
Appendix B Theory
B.3.6 Glucose
Glucose measurement is based on the level of H2O2 produced during the enzymatic reaction
between glucose and oxygen molecules in the presence of the glucose oxidase enzyme. The
reaction is described by the following equation:
Glu cos e
Glu cos e + O 2 Oxidase

Gluconic acid + H 2 O 2
Equation 20
At a constant potential of 0.70 volts, electroactive H2O2 is oxidized at the surface of the
platinum anode as follows:
H 2O2
2H + + O 2 + 2e
Equation 21
The current generated by the flow of electrons at the surface of the platinum electrode is
proportional to the glucose concentration of the sample.
B.3.7 Lactate
Lactate measurement is based on the level of H2O2 produced during the enzymatic reaction
between lactate and oxygen molecules in the presence of the lactate oxidase enzyme. The
reaction is described by the following equation:
Lactate
Oxidase
Lactate + O 2
Pyruvate acid + H 2 O 2
Equation 22
At a constant potential of 0.70 volts, electroactive H2O2 is oxidized at the surface of the
platinum anode as follows:
Equation 23
The current generated by the flow of electrons at the surface of the platinum electrode is
proportional to the lactate concentration of the sample.
B-9
B. Theory
H 2O2
2H + + O 2 + 2e

8.3.8 BUN Concentration
The Stat Profile Plus 10 uses urease which has been chemically bonded to a membrane to
catalyze the conversion of urea present in the sample to ammonia and CO2 according to the
following overall reaction:
O
||
urease
Equation 24
NH 2 C NH 2 + H 2 O
2NH 3 + CO 2
At the pH of the sample, ammonia converts predominantly to the ammonium ion:
NH 3 + H +
NH +4
Equation 25
An ammonium ion selective electrode is used to detect the ammonium formed by the above
reactions. This measurement is then related to the concentration of urea present in the original
sample via the Nernst equation.
B.3.9 SO2 % Concentration

Definition of SO2
Oxygen saturation, SO2%, represents the percent of hemoglobin bound to oxygen, expressed
as a fraction of the amount of hemoglobin capable of binding to oxygen (oxyhemoglobin plus
deoxyhemoglobin). As the level of SO2% changes within a blood sample, the color of the whole
blood changes.
Principle of SO2 Measurement
B. Theory
On the Stat Profile Ultra analyzer, a reflectance photometry system is used to measure the color
of the whole blood to determine the level of oxygen saturation. Using a multiple branch bundle
of optical fibers, the whole blood sample is illuminated by multiple wavelengths of light. A
portion of each wavelength of light is reflected onto one of the optical fiber bundles and in turn
onto a photo detector. By relating the signal observed to those of known standards, the color
of the blood sample is measured, and the level of oxygen saturation is determined.
B.4
Calculated Values
The analyzers microcomputer uses the measured results to calculate other clinically valuable
parameters. This section outlines the equations used to calculate these values.
B-10
Appendix B Theory
B.4.1 Temperature Correction for Measured Values*
The Stat Profile Ultra analyzer allows you to enter the patient temperature when this differs
from 37 C, as for example in patients having surgery under hypothermia. The pH, PCO2, and
PO2 sample values, at the patients actual temperature, are then calculated as follows:
pH(corrected) = pH + [- 0.0147 + 0.0065 (7.400 - pH)](T - 37)
Equation 26
PCO2 ( corrected ) + PCO2 e (0.04375(T 37))
Equation 27
PO2( corrected ) = PO2 10 U
Equation 28
)
)
5.49 10 11 Y + 0.071
(T 37) and Y = e 3.88 ln( PO )

where U =
9
2
9.72 10 Y + 2.30
*The equations are from NCCLS standards2.
B.4.2 Calculated Parameters

Calculated Bicarbonate Concentration [HCO3-]*
Bicarbonate Concentration (mmol/L) is calculated using the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation:
[HCO3-]
________
pH = pK + log
(PCO2 )
Equation 29
where pH and PCO2 are measured.

pK = 6.091
B. Theory
= 0.0307 = solubility coefficient of CO2 in plasma at 37 C

Rearranging Equation 28 gives:
Log10 [HCO3-] = pH + log10 PCO2 - 7.604
Equation 30
B-11

Total Carbon Dioxide Content (TCO2)*
TCO2 (mmol/L) includes both dissolved carbon dioxide and [HCO3-] and is calculated as
follows:
TCO2 = [HCO3-] + (PCO2)
Equation 31
where PCO2 is measured and [HCO3-] is calculated from Equation 31.

Hemoglobin
The hemoglobin is calculated based on the following calculation:
Hemoglobin g/dL = Measured Hematocrit 3.0
Equation 32
NOTE: The hemoglobin calculation is an estimation based on a normal mean

corpuscular hemoglobin concentration of 33.3%. The Stat Profile Ultra
hemoglobin estimation from samples with red cell dyscrasia or
hemoglobinopathies may vary significantly from hemoglobin measured by
cyanmethemoglobin method.
Base Excess of Blood (BE-B: sometimes called In Vitro Base Excess)*

Base excess of blood is defined as the concentration of titratable base needed to titrate blood
to pH 7.40 at 37 C while the PCO2 is held constant at 40 mmHg. Base excess of blood is
calculated as follows:
BE-B = (1 - 0.014[Hb]) [HCO3-] - 24 + (1.43[Hb] + 7.7)(pH - 7.4) )
Equation 33
B. Theory
Standard Bicarbonate Concentration (SBC)

The Standard Bicarbonate is defined as the bicarbonate concentration of the plasma of whole
blood equilibrated to a PCO2 of 40 mmHg at a temperature of 37 C with the hemoglobin fully
saturated with oxygen. Standard bicarbonate is calculated as follows:
SBC = 24.5 + 0.9Z + Z ( Z - 8 )(0.004 + 0.00025 [Hb])
where Z = [BE-B] - 0.19 [Hb] ((100 - SO2/100)
B-12
Equation 34
Appendix B Theory
[Hb] = The hemoglobin value which is measured, manually entered, or is the 14.3 g/dL
default value
Base Excess Extracellular Fluid (BE-ECF)*
The Base Excess Extracellular fluid is a corrected form of the Base Excess Blood in which
allowance has been made for the fact that blood is only approximately 37% of the extracellular
fluid volume. Base excess is calculated as follows:
BE-ECF = [HCO3-]- 25 + 16.2 (pH - 7.40)
Equation 35
Oxygen Content (O2Ct)

Oxygen content is defined as the total amount of oxygen contained in a given volume of whole
blood, including dissolved oxygen and oxygen bound to hemoglobin. It is expressed in
milliliters of oxygen per 100 milliliters of blood (volume %) as calculated from the oxygen
saturation and the hemoglobin concentration. Four moles of oxygen (22,393 mL/mol at
standard temperature and pressure) can combine with 1 mole of hemoglobin (64,458 g/mol)
so that oxygen capacity is equal to
4 (22393)
_________
64458
= 1.39 mL of O2 per gram of Hb
SO 2
therefore O 2 Ct = (1.39 [Hb]) 100 + (0.0031 [ PO 2 ])
Equation 36
Equation 37
where 0.0031 is the solubility coefficient of O2.

On the analyzer, hemoglobin can be manually entered, calculated from the measured
hematocrit, or occur as a default value.
B. Theory
B-13

Alveolar Oxygen (A)
Alveolar Oxygen refers to the partial pressure of oxygen in alveolar gas. It is calculated as
follows:
1 %FIO2
%FIO2
%FIO2
100
A=
(B.P. 0.045T 2 + 0.84T 16.5)* *PCO 2
+
100
0.8
100
Equation 38
where
T = patient temperature
B.P. = barometric pressure
%FIO2 = fraction inspired oxygen, as a percent
Arterial Alveolar Oxygen Tension Gradient (AaDO2)

The arterial alveolar oxygen tension gradient is a useful index of gas exchange within the lungs
and is defined as:
Aa DO2 = A- **PO2
Equation 39
Arterial Alveolar Oxygen Tension Ratio (a/A)

The arterial alveolar oxygen tension ratio is useful to predict oxygen tension in alveolar gas and
to provide an index of oxygenation which remains relatively stable when FIO2 changes.
a/A = **PO2/A
B. Theory
** Temperature corrected gas value
B-14
Equation 40
Appendix B Theory
P50 or PO2 (0.5)*
The P50 is defined as the PO2 of a sample at which the hemoglobin is 50% saturated with
oxygen at pH 7.4, 37C, and 40 mmHg PCO2 for SO2 values between 40% and 80%.
SO 2
log P50 ( uncorrected ) = log PO 2 0.37 log
100 SO 2
Equation 41
log P50 ( corrected ) = log P50 ( uncorrected )
PCO2
+ 0.43(2.3)( pH 7.4) + 0.05 log

0.031(2.3)( T 37) Equation 42
40
* The equations are from Reference 4.
Ionized Calcium Normalized to pH 7.4

The activity and concentration of ionized calcium in whole blood, plasma, and serum is pH
dependent. In vitro, a pH increase of 0.1 unit decreases the ionized calcium level by 4 to 5%
(conversely, a pH decrease has an equal but opposite effect). On standing, the pH of plasma
and serum samples rises due to the loss of CO2. The samples of choice for ionized calcium
determination are anaerobically collected whole blood, plasma, or serum.
If an anaerobic sample is not available, by measuring the actual pH of the sample at which the
ionized calcium concentration was measured normalized ionized calcium can be calculated.
The normalized ionized calcium represents what the ionized calcium concentration would
have been if the initial pH was 7.40 (the midpoint of the pH reference range). The equation used
for this calculation is:
log [Ca++] 7.4 = log [Ca++]X - 0.24 (7.4 - X)
where
Equation 43
X = measured pH of the sample

B. Theory
[Ca++]X = ionized calcium concentration in the sample at the measured pH.

[Ca++] 7.4 = normalized concentration of ionized calcium at pH 7.40.
The equation assumes a normal concentration of total protein and may be used for measured
values between pH 7.2 and 7.6. Between pH 6.9 and 7.2 and between pH 7.6 and 8.0, modified
forms of the equation are used. Normalized ionized calcium values for samples with pH outside
the range pH 6.9 to pH 8.0 are not displayed.
B-15

Osmolality
Osmolality is calculated as a zero-order approximation consisting of only the most important
contributors. The calculation4 used is as follows:
Osm( mOsm / kg) = 1.86 Na + +
[Glu] + [BUN ] + 9
18
2.8
Equation 44
Sodium units are mmol/L, glucose units are mg/dL, and BUN units are mg/dL.
Anion Gap
Anion gap is the difference between the sum of the sodium and potassium concentrations (the
cations) and the sum of the chloride and bicarbonate concentrations (the anions), as follows:
Anion Gap = (Na+ + K+) - (Cl- + [HCO3-})
Equation 45
No anion gap is reported if any of the 4 concentrations are not reported. Any calculated anion
gap less than 1 nM is not reported.
PaO2/FIO2 Oxygenation Index (PO2/FI)

Inspired oxygen fraction ratio is the ratio of partial pressure oxygen to the fraction inspired
oxygen.
PaO2/FIO2 = PaO2/(%FIO2/100%)
Equation 46
Where % FIO2 = fraction inspired oxygen as a percent.
B. Theory
The Oxygen tension based index of PaO2/FIO2 is used in the estimation of the intrapulmonary
shunt fraction when pulmonary artery blood samples are not available. The Estimated Shunt,
an oxygen content based index, is derived by mathematical manipulation of the Classic Shunt
Equation5. In assessing the lung as an Oxygenator, the calculation of the intrapulmonary shunt
fraction at maintained inspired oxygen concentrations (Qsp/QT or Q va /QT ) is generally
recognized as the most reliable way to quantitate disruption of pulmonary oxygen transfer and
therefore the extent to which pulmonary disease is contributing to arterial hypoxemia.
B-16
Appendix B Theory
The most significant factor limiting the widespread clinical use of shunt fractions is that the
calculation requires oxygen analysis of pulmonary artery blood. The Estimated Shunt
calculation is based on use of an assumed Q(a-v)O 2 of 3.5 mL/dL which has been shown to be
a representative mean for large samples of critical ill patients with clinically adequate
perfusion states6,7,8.
The Estimated Shunt has been demonstrated to be far superior to oxygen tension based indices
in reliably reflecting changes in the Qsp/QT9. Monitoring of the tcPO2 Index and the P(a-et)CO2
should allow for verification of the adequacy of cardiac output and peripheral perfusion,
thereby confirming the reliability of the Estimated Shunt to quantitate changes in Qsp/QT.
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mohan, M.S. and Bates, R.G. 1977. Blood pH, Gases and Electrolytes. NBS Special Publication, 450. U.S.
Government Printing Office.
National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 1982. Tentative Standard for Definitions of
Quantities and Conventions Related to Blood pH and Gas Analysis. NCCLS 2:10.
Williams, W.J., Beutler, E., Ersley, A.J., and Rundles, R.W. 1977. Hematology. 2nd ed. McGraw-Hill Co.
Tietz, Norbert W., ed. 1986. Textbook of Clinical Chemistry. W.B. Saunders Co. Philadelphia, Penn.
Shapiro, B.A., Harrison, R.A., Cane, R.D., Templin, R. 1989. Clinical Application of Blood Gases. 4th ed.
Year Book Medical Publishers. Chicago. pp 158-9.
Harrison, R.A., Davidson, R., Shapiro, B.A., Myer, N.S. 1975. Reassessment of the assumed A-V oxygen
content difference in the shunt calculation. Anesth Analg. Vol 54 No 198.
Suter, P.M., Fairley, H.B., Isenberg, M.D. 1975. Optimum end expiratory pressure in patients with acute
pulmonary failure. N Engl J Med. Vol 292 No 84.
Suter, P.M., Fairley, H.B., Schlobohm, R.M. 1975. Shunt, lung volume, and perfusion during short periods
of ventilation with oxygen. Anesthesiology. Vol 43 No 617.
Cane, R.D., Shapiro, B.A., Templin, R., et al. 1988. The unreliability of oxygen tension based indices in
reflecting intrapulmonary shunting in critically ill patients. Crit Care Med. Vol 16 No1243.
B. Theory
B-17
B. Theory
B-18
Appendix B Theory
P50 or PO2 (0.5)*
The P50 is defined as the PO2 of a sample at which the hemoglobin is 50% saturated with
oxygen at pH 7.4, 37C, and 40 mm Hg PCO2 for SO2 values between 40% and 80%.
SO 2
log P50 ( uncorrected ) = log PO 2 0.37 log
100 SO 2
Equation 41
log P50 ( corrected ) = log P50 ( uncorrected )
PCO2
+ 0.43(2.3)( pH 7.4) + 0.05 log

0.031(2.3)( T 37) Equation 42
40
* The equations are from Reference 4.
Ionized Calcium Normalized to pH 7.4

The activity and concentration of ionized calcium in whole blood, plasma, and serum is pH
dependent. In vitro, a pH increase of 0.1 unit decreases the ionized calcium level by 4 to 5%
(conversely, a pH decrease has an equal but opposite effect). On standing the pH of plasma and
serum samples rises due to the loss of CO2. The samples of choice for ionized calcium
determination are anaerobically collected whole blood, plasma, or serum.
If an anaerobic sample is not available, by measuring the actual pH of the sample at which the
ionized calcium concentration was measured normalized ionized calcium can be calculated.
The normalized ionized calcium represents what the ionized calcium concentration would
have been if the initial pH was 7.40 (the midpoint of the pH reference range). The equation used
for this calculation is:
log [Ca++] 7.4 = log [Ca++]X - 0.24 (7.4 - X)
where
Equation 43
X = measured pH of the sample
[Ca++]X = ionized calcium concentration in the sample at the measured pH.

[Ca++] 7.4 = normalized concentration of ionized calcium at pH 7.40.
The equation assumes a normal concentration of total protein and may be used for measured
values between pH 7.2 and 7.6. Between pH 6.9 and 7.2 and between pH 7.6 and 8.0, modified
forms of the equation are used. Normalized ionized calcium values for samples with pH outside
the range pH 6.9 to pH 8.0 are not displayed.
B-15

Osmolality
Osmolality is calculated as a zero-order approximation consisting of only the most important
contributors. The calculation4 used is as follows:
Osm( mOsm / kg) = 1.86 Na + +
[Glu] + [BUN ] + 9
18
2.8
Equation 44
Sodium units are mmol/L, glucose units are mg/dL, and BUN units are mg/dL.
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B-16
Mohan, M.S. and Bates, R.G. 1977. Blood pH, Gases and Electrolytes. NBS Special Publication, 450. U.S.
Government Printing Office.
National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 1982. Tentative Standard for Definitions of
Quantities and Conventions Related to Blood pH and Gas Analysis. NCCLS 2:10.
Williams, W.J., Beutler, E., Ersley, A.J., and Rundles, R.W. 1977. Hematology. 2nd ed. McGraw-Hill Co.
Tietz, Norbert W., ed. 1986. Textbook of Clinical Chemistry. W.B. Saunders Co. Philadelphia, Penn.
Appendix C Reagents and Solutions

C
Reagents and Solutions

This section covers the reagents and solutions required for proper operation and maintenance
of the Stat Profile Ultra Analyzer.
C.1
Reagents and Solutions

Reagents and solutions are as follows:
1.
Reagent Pack: PN 18194 (Ultra F); PN 18195 (Ultra G); PN 18170 (Ultra H);
PN 18196 (Ultra I); PN 18197 (Ultra J); PN 18198 (Ultra K)
2.
Na/pH Electrode Conditioning Solution: PN 06856
3.
PCO2 Electrode Conditioning Solution: PN 06857
4.
PO2 Electrolyte Solution: PN 06554
5.
PCO2 Electrolyte Solution: PN 06553
6.
Chloride Internal Filling Solution: PN 00099
7.
Preheater Cleaning Agent: PN 11802
8.
Deproteinizing Solution: PN 12704
9.
Electrode Polishing Solution: PN 13409
10. Calibration Gases:
11.
Nova Stat Profile Controls:
12.
Level 1 - Acidosis: PN 16017

Level 2 - Normal: PN 16018
Level 3 - Alkalosis: PN 16019
Nova Stat Profile Ultra Multi Controls (for Oxygen Saturation/Hematocrit):

Level 1 with Glucose Over-Range - Low : PN 18772
Level 2 - High Normal: PN 18773
C. Reagents
13.
Gas A: PN 06586
Gas B: PN 06587
Nova Stat Profile Ultra Oxygen Saturation Calibrators Multipack: PN 17371
C-1

Nova will not be responsible for any of its warranties on electrodes, tubing, probes, septa, or
other parts if these parts are used in conjunction with and are adversely affected by reagents,
controls, or other material not manufactured by Nova but which contact or affect such parts.
Some reagent formulations not manufactured by Nova contain acids, concentrated salt
solutions, and artificial preservatives which have been shown to cause problems such as
shortened electrode and septa life, electrode membrane damage, electrode drift, erratic
analytical results, and unacceptable instrument performance.
NOTE: Refer to the Nova Stat Profile Control insert for storage requirements
for these controls. Store Chem Set B Linearity Solution/External Standard
at 2 to 8 C and store all other Nova Stat Profile reagents, standards, and
solutions at 15 to 30 C.
C.2
Reagent Pack
The concentrations of the internal standards* are printed on the reagent pack. In addition to the
reagents and solutions, the reagent pack has a self-contained waste bottle for safe disposal of waste.
*Standards A and B are directly traceable to the National Bureau of Standards Buffers for
standardization of pH measurements, cited as follows:
Durst, R. A. 1975. Standardization of pH Measurements, NBSS Publication
PB248:127, National Bureau of Standards, National Technical Service.
C.3
Calibrating Gases
Nova calibrating gases contain mixed gas for calibrating the PO2 and PCO2 electrodes on the Stat
Profile Ultra analyzer (see Table C.1)*. Always check the gas composition values and specifications
on newly replaced gas cylinders against the Set Calibration Gases screen (Section 5.1.6).
____________________________________________________________________________________
C. Reagents
Table C.1 Calibration Gases Composition
Gas Standard A
Carbon Dioxide
Oxygen
Nitrogen
Gas Standard B
Carbon Dioxide
Nitrogen
C-2
Specified Value
Accuracy
5.0%
20.0%
Balance
0.03%
0.03%
Specified Value
Accuracy
10.0%
Balance
0.03%
0.03%

*If for any reason Nova gases are not used, the alternative gases must be guaranteed accurate
to within 0.03% of the specified value. The gases should be of clinical quality. A convenient
cylinder size is 52 cm high X 10.5 cm diameter with gas at 2000 psig.
C.4
Verifying the Analyzer's Performance

Nova Biomedical recommends that each laboratory performs the following minimum QC
procedures on each analyzer:
Nova Stat Profile Ultra Multi Controls (SO2/Hct controls)

During each 8 hours of testing, analyze both levels of Ultra Multi Controls.
Use Ultra Multi Control Level 1 with Glucose Over-Range solution first.
Stat Profile Ultra Blood Gas/Electrolyte/Chemistry Controls (STP Control)

During each 8 hours of testing, analyze one level of STP Control.
Analyze all 3 levels during each day of operation.
NOTE: In order to minimize the time for daily analyzer performance when
running all controls together, Nova recommends that the controls be run in
the following order:
1. Ultra Multi Control Level 1 with Glucose Over-Range
2. Ultra Multi Control Level 2
3. Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 STP Controls
CAUTION: The electrode performance of the analyzer may be affected by use

of controls other than Nova Stat Profile Controls*.
*See Warranty, Appendix H.
C. Reagents
C-3

C.4.1 Nova Stat Profile Ultra Multi Controls: Quality Control
The Nova Stat Profile Ultra Multi Controls are used to monitor oxygen saturation and
hematocrit performance. They are electrolyte solutions with concentrations of the active
ingredients adjusted to give a reflectance equivalent to a known SO2% value in whole blood
and a conductivity equivalent to a known hematocrit value in whole blood. The controls are
adjusted for the effect of sodium on the conductivity of samples.
The Nova Stat Profile Ultra Multi Controls are formulated at 2 clinically significant levels:
Level 1 - Low values
Level 2 - Normal, High values
Ampules should be stored at room temperature. Avoid freezing or storage above 30 C.
CAUTION: The electrode performance of the analyzer may be affected by the

use of controls other than Nova Stat Profile Ultra Multi Controls.*
Analyze the Nova Stat Profile Ultra Multi Controls as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Gently shake the ampule before opening.

Protect the fingers with tissue or gloves. Snap open the ampule.
Press ANALYZE, present the control, and press ANALYZE again to initiate
aspiration.
Compare the results with those listed in the assay data sheet included with the
controls.
C. Reagents
C-4

C.4.2 Nova Stat Profile Ultra Controls: Quality Control
The Stat Profile Blood Gas/Electrolyte/Chemistry Controls provide quality controls for
sodium, potassium, chloride, ionized calcium, ionized magnesium, glucose, lactate, BUN, pH,
PO2 and PCO2. These controls are formulated from a buffered bicarbonate solution of pH,
sodium, potassium, chloride, calcium, magnesium, glucose, BUN, and lactate concentrations.
The solutions are equilibrated with known concentrations of oxygen and carbon dioxide.
The Nova Stat Profile Blood Gas/Electrolyte/Chemistry Controls are formulated at 3 clinically
significant levels:
Level 1 - Acidosis, with high electrolyte, low glucose, normal lactate
Level 2 - Normal, with normal electrolyte, high glucose, lactate
Level 3 - Alkalosis, with low electrolyte, high abnormal glucose, lactate, and BUN
The ampules must be at 25 C for at least 24 hours before opening.
CAUTION: The electrode performance of the analyzer may be affected by use

of controls other than Nova Stat Profile Controls*.
Analyze the Nova Stat Profile Blood Gas/Electrolyte/Chemistry Controls as follows:
1.
2.
Before opening, shake the ampule for about 10 seconds.

Protect the fingers with tissue or gloves. Snap open the ampule.
CAUTION: Analyze the liquid within 30 SECONDS of opening to prevent

contamination with room air and alteration of stated values.
3.
4.
Press ANALYZE, present the control, and press ANALYZE again to initiate
aspiration.
Compare the results with those listed in the assay data sheet included with the
controls.
C. Reagents
C-5
Appendix D Reference
D
Reference Values
Each laboratory should establish and maintain its own reference values. The values given here
should be used only as a guide.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Table D.1 Reference Values1,2
Test
Value
pH
7.35 - 7.45
PCO2
35 - 45 mmHg
HCO3-
21 - 28 mmol/L
Base Excess (Blood)
(-2)-(+3) mmol/L
PO2
83 - 108 mmHg
SO2 (arterial whole blood)
95 - 98%
Hemoglobin (Hb)
(Male)
(Female)
14.0 - 17.8 g/dL

12.0 - 15.6 g/dL
Hematocrit (Hct)
(Male)
(Female)
43 - 51%
38 - 46%
____________________________________________________________________________________
D. Reference
D-1

Table D.2 Reference Values for Adult Whole Blood, Serum, and Plasma
Test
Value
Sodium2
136 - 146 mmol/L
Potassium2
3.5 - 5.1 mmol/L
Chloride2
98 - 106 mmol/L
Glucose2
65 - 95 mg/dL
Lactate2
0.4 - 0.8 mmol/L
iCa3
1.09 - 1.30 mmol/L
BUN2
7 - 18 mg/dL
Osmolality2
275 - 295 mOsmol/kg
____________________________________________________________________________________
References:
D. Reference
1. Statland, Bernard. 1987. Clinical Decisions Levels for Lab Tests, Medical Economics Books.
2. Tietz, Norbert W., ed. 1987. Textbook of Clinical Chemistry, W.B. Saunders Co.,
Philadelphia, Penn.
3. Kost, G.T. 1993. The Significance of Ionized Calcium in Cardiac and Critical Care.
Arch. Pathol. Lab Med. Vol. 117: pp 890-896.
4. Altura, Burton M. and Lewenstam, Andrzej, ed. 1994. The Scandinavian Journal of
Clinical & Laboratory Investigation. Vol. 54: Supplement 217.
D-2
Appendix E Screen Maps

E
Screen Maps of the Stat Profile Ultra Analyzer
E. Maps
E-1
2.0 MAINTENANCE - Ultra F, G, H, I, J, and K Analyzers

Screen references to Cl- only apply to the Ultra F, G, and H Analyzers.
Screen references to iCa only apply to the Ultra I, J, and K Analyzers.
Screen references to Glucose do not apply to the Ultra F and I
Analyzers.
Screen references to Lactate do not apply to the Ultra F, G, I, and J
Analyzers.
Some Stat Profile Ultra screens may have fewer options.
3
4
5
6
7
Calibration Option Menu

Fluid/Gas Prime Option
Component Conditioning Menu
Flow Path Maintenance Menu
Component Replacement Menu
MENU
Electrode Replacement Menu
Tubing Replacement Menu
Replace Reagent Pack
Reagent Pack No.:

Lot No.:
Expiration Date:
Fluid Gauge:
30 Aug 96
REAGENT PACK
30 Aug 96
ENTER
COMPONENT CONDITIONING MENU
FLOW PATH MAINTENANCE
11:45:45
REAGENT PACK REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
TUBING REPLACEMENT
*
1
Condition Flow Cell
Sample Preheater Cleaning Procedure
Condition Na+ Electrode
Sample Preheater Deproteinizing Procedure
Flow Path Maintenance
Pump Tubing
Reagent / Septum Harness
W/R Harness
S line / Probe
Flowcell
Preheater
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Remove all straws and wipe clean. Remove

old reagent pack, septum and RMS pod.
Install new reagent pack, septum and RMS
pod. Re-insert straws into pack.
Press FUNCTION with selection


123 Seconds to Completion.

30 Aug 96
1
2
3
4
5
6
CONCENTRATIONS
6.840
12.3
12.3
1.2
123.4
123.4
123.4

Change Reagent Pack Procedure.
11:45:45
123456789
1234567
mm yy
100%
CALIBRATION STANDARD
pH
7.384
Na+
123.4
K+
1.2
Ca++/Cl- 1.2
Glu
12.3
Lac
12.3
BUN
12.3
Alternate Analysis ( E x p i r e d G a s )
Flow Cell Light
Off
1
2
COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
MAINTENANCE MENU
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
Press CLEAR to Terminate Procedure.

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
11:45:45
SAMPLE PREHEATER CLEANING PROCEDURE

Flow Cell Conditioning in Progress

Press CLEAR to Terminate Sequence.
Calibration to Follow.
30 Aug 96
Remove Metabolite Electrodes.

Install Electrode Blanks.
Close door.
Preheater Cleaning in Progress.
Remove Electrode Blanks.

Install Metabolite Electrodes.
Close door.
ELECTRODE REPLACEMENT
W/R HARNESS REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

*
Remove R straw from bottle.
Remove 3 W/R tubing clips. Disconnect R

line from pump fitting, W line from T
connector. Discard tubing.
Install new harness. Connect 3 tubing clips

Connect W line to T connector, R line to
pump fitting. Insert R/W straws in bottles
11:45:45
Calibration in Progress.
PCO2/PO2 ELECTRODE CHANGE PROCEDURE

*
Replace/Remembrane PCO2/PO2 Electrode
Replace ISE Electrode
Replace Metabolite Electrode
Replace Reference Electrode
Reference Prime in progress.
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
Remove electrode & washer

Dry chamber. Polish if PO2
Remembrane or replace electrode as required
Replace washer, reinstall electrode
Close door.


30 Aug 96
11:45:45

30 Aug 96
11:45:45

30 Aug 96
11:45:45

POSITION SAMPLE FOR ASPIRATION
Remove tubing from bypass valve. Disconnect

R line from left pump fitting & W line from
T connector.
Open door & detach tubing from reference

electrode.
Pull W/R tubes and seals from rear of

analytical chamber. Remove tubing from pump
& discard.
Press ANALYZE When Ready
Calibration Sequence to follow

11:45:45
11:45:45
Calibration Gases
Remove Electrode Blank.

Install BUN Electrode.
Close door.
Calibration in Progress.
Disconnect S-line from sample preheater.
Using hex key, loosen probe socket screw.

Remove probe by pulling up and out.
Insert tip of probe through opening in

sampler and position mounting block behind
hex screw. Verify block is aligned with
back plate & not angled. Tighten hex screw.
Fluid Prime
Gas Prime
Combined Gas and Fluid Prime
Flow Path Purge
Flow Path Prime
11:45:45
FLUID
GAS
FULL
Prime in Progress
Verify probe alignment using gauge. Refer

to reference manual for details.
Connect flexible end of S-line to preheater.
Aspirating Flush solution.

Check for air leaks in flow cell.
Close door.
ENTER
Install new flowcell seating interconnect

tubing into opening at top of sample
preheater. Tighten retaining screws by
turning clockwise.
SO2% CALIBRATION
Attach reference electrode, positioning

interconnect tubing carefully. Reposition
latch. Reattach W/R tubing.
Plug in electrodes & SO2 cable. Close door.
Flow Check in progress.

Watch flow path for proper flow
Flow Path Purge in progress
M E T A B O L I T E E L E C T R O D E CHANGE PROCEDURE
Remove electrode & dry chamber

Remembrane or replace electrode as required
Install electrode
Close door
Membrane equilibration in progress

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
REFERENCE ELECTRODE CHANGE PROCEDURE

*


30 Aug 96
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
Standard
# 1:
Standard
# 2:
51
Position Standard # 1 for aspiration
PREHEATER REPLACEMENT P R O C E D U R E
E
*
Disconnect W/R lines from Ref electrode.

Rotate latch above electrode. Replace
electrode. Reposition latch. Attach tubing
Flow Check in progress.

Watch flow path for proper flow.
Close door.
E
E
E
E
E
Reinstall flowcell seating interconnect

tubing into opening at top of sample
preheater. Tighten retaining screw(s) by
turning clockwise.
Attach reference electrode, positioning

interconnect tubing carefully. Reposition
latch. Reattach W/R tubing. Plug in all
electrodes. Reinstall SO2 cable. Close door.
11:45:45
*
Assay Values
95
Open door. Remove W/R lines from Ref

electrode. Rotate latch above electrode.
Unplug all electrodes. Remove SO2 cable.
Loosen flowcell retaining screw(s) by
turning counterclockwise. Remove flowcell.
Do not lose tubing on either end.
Pull sample preheater straight out.
Position new sample preheater seat firmly.
ENTER
Press ANALYZE when ready.

Calibration in Progress
SO2% CALIBRATION
30 Aug 96
REAGENT
/SEPTUM HARNESS REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
REAGENT/SEPTUM
REAGENT/SEPTUM
REAGENT
REAGENT
REAGENT/SEPTUM
REAGENT
REAGENT/SEPTUM
Assay Values
95
51
Remove F,C,D,A,B straws from reagents.
Purging
Open pinch valve bar, remove tubing.

Detach labeled tubing clips from pins.
*
Position Standard # 2 for aspiration
Press ANALYZE when ready.
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
Open Door. Disconnect reagent tubing

manifold from top reagent preheater.
Pull harness through rear of analytical
chamber. Discard tubing.

123 seconds to completion.
Flow Path Purge in Progress
REAGENT
REAGENT/SEPTUM
PROCEDURE
REAGENT/SEPTUM
REAGENT
REAGENT
REAGENT/SEPTUM
11:45:45
*

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
Disconnect septum harness from bottom of

reagent preheater. Turn septum 1/4 turn
clockwise and remove with tubing. Unplug
manifold connector & discard tubing.
Install new reagent harness through rear of

analytical compartment & connect manifold
to reagent preheater. Reinstall tubing seal
in opening.
ENTER
*
Position tubing in pinch valve, close bar,

reattach tubing clips.
30 Aug 96
Set Gas B CO2 %:

Set Gas B O2 %:
10.00 %
0.00 %

14:31:43
11:45:45
ENTER
Connect notched end of septum harness to

bottom of reagent preheater, other end to
septum. Install septum & tubing onto probe
turning counterclockwise so tubing forms
downward loop.
Wipe reagent straws with alcohol, dry and

insert into proper bottles.
Fluid Prime in progress.


30 Aug 96
11:45:45

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
5.00 %
20.00 %
REAGENT
REAGENT/SEPTUM
PROCEDURE
REAGENT/SEPTUM
REAGENT
REAGENT
REAGENT/SEPTUM

CALIBRATION GASES
Set Gas A CO2 %:

Set Gas A O2 %:
ANALYZE
11:45:45
30 Aug 96

30 Aug 96
11:45:45

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
Calibration to Follow.
Press CLEAR to terminate Sequence.
# 1:
# 2:

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
Standard
Standard
FLOW CELL REPLACEMENT P R O C E D U R E
E
E
E
FLOW CELL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
Open door. Remove W/R lines from Ref

electrode. Rotate latch above electrode.
Unplug & remove all electrodes. Remove SO2
cable. Loosen flowcell retaining screws
by turning counterclockwise & remove
flowcell. Do not lose interconnect tubing
on either end.
Install septum & tubing onto probe,

turning counterclockwise so tubing forms
downward loop.
E
FLOW CELL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
Press ENTER to Start Sequence.
Start Sequence?


30 Aug 96
11:45:45
1
2
ENTER

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
-------- Calibration
PROBE/S-LINE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE


SEQUENCE START

30 Aug 96
11:45:45

11:45:45

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
Open door. Remove septum assembly from

sampler.
FLUID/GAS PRIME OPTIONS
30 Aug 96
Preheater Cleaning in Progress.
Full Calibration
Gas Calibration
SO2% Calibration
Remove BUN Electrode.

Install Electrode Blank.
Close door.

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
1
2
3
4
5
6

*
CALIBRATION OPTIONS
Flow Path Prime in progress.

30 Aug 96
11:45:45

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
Remove electrode & washer

Dry chamber. Condition, remembrane
or replace electrode as required.
Replace washer, reinstall electrode &
plug in. Close door.
S A M P L EP R E H E A T E RD E P R O T E I N I Z I N GP R O C E D U R E

Install R line with seal at RIGHT

Feed R tubing into compartment &
seat seal. Connect labeled R line into pump
fitting. Open door, attach tubing to
reference. Close door.
*
ISE CHANGE PROCEDURE

Remove Electrode.
Condition Na+ for 2 min.
Install electrode & plug in.
Install new W pump tubing with seal at LEFT.

Place section between T connectors in
bypass valve. Feed W tubing into analytical
compartment & seat seal. Attach T connector
to labeled W line
N a+ C O N D I T I O N I N G
30 Aug 96
*
ENTER
30 Aug 96
P U M P TUBING REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE


Calibration in Progress
Stat Profile Ultra F, G, H, I, J, and K Maintenance Screen Map Revision A, 8/96
3.0 QC - Ultra F, G, H, I, J, and K Analyzers

Screen references to Glucose do not apply to the Ultra F and I Analyzers.
Screen references to Lactate do not apply to the Ultra F, G, I, and J Analyzers.
MENU
QC
MAIN MENU
PASSWORD REQUIRED
1
Patient Recall Menu
Maintenance Menu
Password: _
Setup Menu
Service Menu
Quality Control Menu
Press ENTER to Enter Password.

30 Aug 96
SETUP MENU
MENU
PASSWORD REQUIRED
PASSWORD REQUIRED
Password: _
Password: _
1
2
3
4
5
6

Default Parameter Entry
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
30 Aug 96
11:45:45

0
Print
Print
Print
Print
Print

Month-to-Date Summary by Control
Month-to-Date Test Summary by Test
Levey-Jennings Graphs
Stop Printing
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
QC Reports Menu
Move Daily Data to Month-to-Date
Erase Daily Data
Erase Month-to-Date Data
2
3
1 Display Summary Statistics for Test

2 Display Cumulative Statistics for Test
3 Display Cumulative Statistics for Control
WARNING:
the effects of this operation
cannot be undone.
Press ENTER to Confirm Operation.
Press CLEAR to Cancel Operation.
2
3
4
11:45:45
QUALITY CONTROL
QUALITY CONTROL
QUALITY CONTROL REPORTS
30 Aug 96
SUPERVISOR PASSWORD REQUIRED
TECHNICIAN PASSWORD REQUIRED
OPERATOR PASSWORD REQUIRED
11:45:45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
QC Maintenance Configuration Menu

Type
Blood Gas Ctrl #1
Blood Gas Ctrl #2
Blood Gas Ctrl #3
Hematocrit Ctrl #1
Hematocrit Ctrl #2
SO2% Control #1
SO2% Control #2
Lot Number
2316.10.94
3524.12.94
3525.12.95
2822.05.95
2823.05.95
3705.02.95
Status
Expired
Active
Active
Active
Due
Incomplete
Empty


30 Aug 96
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
0
MOVE DAILY DATA TO MONTH-TO-DATE
ERASE DAILY DATA
ERASE MONTH-TO-DATE DATA
CUMULATIVE STATISTICS FOR TEST
SUMMARY STATISTICS
QUALITY CONTROL MAINTENANCE SETUP
ENTER
Type
Blood Gas Ctrl #1
Blood Gas Ctrl #2
Blood Gas Ctrl #3
Hematocrit Ctrl #1
Hematocrit Ctrl #2
SO2% Control #1
SO2% Control #2
Lot Number
2316.10.95
3524.12.95
3525.12.95
2822.05.95
2823.05.95
3705.02.95
Status
Expired
Active
Active
Active
Due
Incomplete
Empty
Select Test
to be displayed
pH
1
PCO2
2
PO2
3
SO2%
4
Hct
5
Na+
6
K++
7
Ca++/Cl8
Glu
9
Lac
.
BUN
0
1 QC Lockout Mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
11:45:45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Type
Blood Gas Ctrl #1
Blood Gas Ctrl #2
Blood Gas Ctrl #3
Hematocrit Ctrl #1
Hematocrit Ctrl #2
SO2% Control #1
SO2% Control #2
Lot Number
2316.10.94
3524.12.94
3525.12.95
2822.05.95
2823.05.95
3705.02.95
Status
Expired
Active
Active
Active
Due
Incomplete
Empty
2 Move Daily Data to Month-to-Date

3 Erase Month-to-Date Data
Auto
Auto
4
5
6
7
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
Print
Print
Print
Print

Month-to-Date Test Summaries
Levey-Jennings Chart
Disabled

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
11:45:45
SUMMARY STATISTICS
MOVE DAILY DATA TO MONTH-TO-DATE

ERASE DAILY DATA
ERASE MONTH-TO-DATE DATA
Blood Gas Ctrl #1

pH
1
PCO2
2
PO2
3
Ctrl
If SO2%
selected
2
Hct
5
Na+
6
K++
7
Ca++/Cl8
Glu
9
Lac
.
BUN
0
SO2%
4
Mean
SD
xxx.x
xx.x
xxxx
xxx.x - xxx.x
SO2 2
xxx.x
xxx.x
xx.x
xxxx
xxx.x - xxx.x
Lot Number
2316.10.94
3524.12.94
3525.12.95
2822.05.95
2823.05.95
3705.02.95
Press or to select test.
30 Aug 96
CV%
If Hct Ctrl
selected
xxx.x
xxx.x
xx.x
xxx
M-T-D (nn/32)
xxx.x
xxx.x
xxxx
xxxx
Cumulative
xxx.x
xxx.x
xx.x
xxxx
Initial Analysis Time
hh:mm
Analysis Frequency
hh
(HH:MM)
hours.

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
Ctrl
Mean
SD
Hct
%
CV%
BG 1
BG 2
BG 3
xx.
xx.
xx.
xx.
xx.
xx.
xx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xx.
xx.
xx.
Hct 1
Hct 2
xx.
xx.
xx.
xx.
xx.x
xx.x
xxxx
xxxx
xx.x
xx.x
xx.
xx.
11:45:45
11:45:45
If
SO2% control
SO2% Control #1
Expected Range
High
Lot Number
cccccccccc
Exp. Date
Daily
oooooooooo
dd/mm/yy
(DD/MM/YY)
Low
If Hct
selected
SD
dd/mm/yy
mmHg
Lot Number:
Expiration Date:
TEST SELECT
PCO2
nnn.n - nnn.n
Blood Gas Ctrl #1

cccccccccc
Exp. Date
Status
Expired
Active
Active
Active
Due
Incomplete
Empty
#1
Press TEST SELECT for Analyte Ranges.
11:45:45
Mean
Type
Blood Gas Ctrl #1
Blood Gas Ctrl #2
Blood Gas Ctrl #3
Hematocrit Ctrl #1
Hematocrit Ctrl #2
SO2% Control #1
SO2% Control #2
Primary Hematocrit Ctrl
Expected Range
Expected Range
xxx.x
SUMMARY STATISTICS
Lot #
SO2 1

30 Aug 96
CV%
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select Test
to be displayed
3
4
Processing Blood Gas Ctrl #1
SO2%
11:45:45
If Blood
Gas or
SO2% Ctrl
selected
30 Aug 96
30 Aug 96
SO2%
nn.
nn.
dd/mm/yy
5
Press or for next or previous control.

Press or for next or previous test.
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
30 Aug 96

11:45:45
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
If Blood Gas
or electrolyte
test selected
If Hematocrit control
CUMULATIVE TEST STATISTICS

Hematocrit Ctrl #1
PCO2
mmHg
2
3
Low
Ctrl
Mean
SD
CV%
Expected Range
Lot Number
cccccccccc
BG 1
xxx.x
xxx.x
xx.x
xxxx
xxx.x - xxx.x
Exp. Date
BG 2
xxx.x
xxx.x
xx.x
xxxx
xxx.x - xxx.x
dd/mm/yy
BG 3
xxx.x
xxx.x
xx.x
xxxx
xxx.x - xxx.x
Hct
6
7
8
DAILY CONTROL SUMMARIES
MONTH-TO-DATE STATISTICS FOR TEST
LEVEY-JENNINGS GRAPHS
30 Aug 96
0
PO2
3
SO2%
4
Hct
5
Na+
6
++
++
K
7
Ca
8
Lac
.
BUN
0
Glu
9
Press ENTER to
initiate printing.
11:45:45
Blood Gas Control #1

Low
Type
Blood Gas Ctrl #1
Blood Gas Ctrl #2
Blood Gas Ctrl #3
Hematocrit Ctrl #1
Hematocrit Ctrl #2
SO2% Control #1
SO2% Control #2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CUMULATIVE STATISTICS FOR CONTROL

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
If Blood Gas control
PCO2
2
Lot Number
2316.10.95
3524.12.95
3525.12.95
2822.05.95
2823.05.95
3705.02.95
Lot Number
cccccccccc
Status
Expired
Active
Active
Active
Due
Incomplete
Empty
Exp. Date
dd/mm/yy
pH
n.nnn
PCO2
nnn.n
POP2
nnn.n
Na+
nnn.n
K+
nn.nn
Ca++/Cl- nn.nn
Glu
nnn.n
Lac
nn.nn
BUN
nn.nn
High
n.nnn
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nn.nn
nn.nn
nnn.n
nn.nn
nn.nn

30 Aug 96
If Daily QC
Summary graphs
11:45:45
Hematocrit Ctrl #1
If Hct control
Lot #
cccccccccc
Exp. Date
dd/mm/yy
selected
Summary by Test
Test
Mean
SD
CV%
Hct
xx.
xx.
xx.x
xxxx
Expected Range
4
If Levey5
xx.
xx.
Stat Profile Ultra F, G, H, I, J, and K QC Screen Map Revision A, 8/96

Press or to select control.
CUMULATIVE CONTROL STATISTICS

Lot #
If Blood Gas
control
selected
Test
1
2
3
pH
PCO2
PO2
Hct
Na+
K+
Ca++/ClGlu
Lac
BUN
Primary Blood Gas Ctrl #1

cccccccccc
Exp. Date
Mean
SD
CV%
x.xxx
xxx.x
xxx.x
xx.
xxx.x
xx.xx
xx.xx
xxx.x
xxx.x
xxx.x
x.xxx
xxx.x
xxx.x
xx.
xxx.x
xx.xx
xx.xx
xxx.x
xxx.x
xxx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
dd/mm/yy
Expected Range
x.xxx
xxx.x
xxx.x
xx.
xxx.x
xx.xx
xx.xx
xxx.x
xxx.x
xxx.x
x.xxx
xxx.x
xxx.x
xx.
xxx.x
xx.xx
xx.xx
xxx.x
xxx.x
xxx.x

SO2%
control
selected
If Hct or
Jennings graphs
30 Aug 96
If Month-to-Date
11:45:45
.
pH
1
nn.
Blood Gas Ctrl #1

Select Test
to be printed.
nn.

30 Aug 96
SYSTEM BUSY
High
SO2% Control #1
Lot #
cccccccccc
Exp. Date
Test
Mean
SD
CV%
SO2%
xxx.x
xxx.x
xx.x
xxxx
Hct
xx.
xx.
xx.x
xxxx
dd/mm/yy
Expected Range
7
xxx.x - xxx.x
xx.

xx.
11:45:45
mmHg
mmHg
mmol/L
mmol/L
mg/dL
mg/dL
mmol/L
mmol/L
PASSWORD REQUIRED
SET UP MENU
4.0 SETUP - Ultra F, G, H, I, J, and K Analyzers

Default Parameter
Password: ______
1
2
3
4
5
6

MENU

30 Aug 96
2
3
4
5
Electrolyte Resolutions
37.0 C
Hemoglobin
14.9
mmol/L (Hb/4)
FIO2
20.9
Electrode Offsets
BUN
Reference & Panic Ranges
1
2
3
4
5
6
Analysis Configuration
Calibration Configuration
Barometric Pressure
Set Date and Time
Set Analyzer Identification
Display Reagent Remaining Status
COMMUNICATIONS SETUP
PASSWORD OPTIONS

11:45:45
30 Aug 96
Enabled
Remote Review Protection

Operator Password Protection
Passwords Entry
-Operator,
Passwords Entry
-Operator,
Results Transmission
COM11
Ticket Printer
COM13
2
3
4
Remote Diagnostic
COM12
Technician Password Protection
6
7
Passwords Entry
Password Entry
2.34 mg/dL
30 Aug 96
Patient Temperature
11:45:45
OPERATION CONFIGURATION
DEFAULT PARAMETER
Results Reporting
30 Aug 96
RESULTS CONFIGURATION
1
11:45:45
On
---
Enabled
R.R.
*
No R.R.
Enabled
Technician
Supervisor

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
(*NOTE: if Remote Review disabled, #1 & #2 are displayed)
ELECTROLYTE RESOLUTION
ANALYSIS OUTPUT OPTIONS
TRANSMISSION PORT CONFIGURATION
ANALYSIS CONFIGURATION
OPERATOR PASSWORDS
Cl- Result
xxx.x
5
5
6
Auto
On
On
Analysis Print Mode

Print Analysis mV Data
Print Analysis Drift Data
Single
3 Display Patient Data Screen
Auto
4 Results Storage Warning
Enabled
5 Analysis Output Options
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
30 Aug 96
Set Gas Cal I Frequency
Calibration Output Options
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
Calibrate Pressure Transducer

760.0 mmHg
(Set Barametric Pressure, if Entered)
30 Aug 96
Results Measured at 37.0 C
TESTSELECT
Configure Electrodes:
Press Function + Nbr
Underline - Installed
SO2%
4
Hct
5
Na+
6
K+
7
Ca++/Cl8
Glu
9
Lac
.
BUN
0
Word Length
Stop Bits
ACK Required
Enabled
11:45:45
mmHg
Method of Determination
Measured
No Remote Review (or Group #2)

201
nnnn
216
nnnn
231
nnnn
202
nnnn
217
nnnn
232
nnnn
203
nnnn
218
nnnn
233
nnnn
204
nnnn
219
nnnn
234
nnnn
205
nnnn
220
nnnn
235
nnnn
206
nnnn
221
nnnn
236
nnnn
207
nnnn
222
nnnn
237
nnnn
208
nnnn
223
nnnn
238
nnnn
209
nnnn
224
nnnn
239
nnnn
210
nnnn
225
nnnn
240
nnnn
211
nnnn
226
nnnn
241
nnnn
212
nnnn
227
nnnn
242
nnnn
213
nnnn
228
nnnn
243
nnnn
214
nnnn
229
nnnn
244
nnnn
215
nnnn
230
nnnn
245
nnnn
30 Aug 96
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
11:45:45
Date:
30/04/95
(DD/MM/YY)
Time:
11:45:45
(HH:MM:SS)
Password
30 Aug 96
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
PANIC
LOW
HIGH
0.000
0.000
0.0
0.0
mmHg
0.0
0.0
mmHg
0.0
0.0
0.
0.0
%
0.0
0.0
mmol/L
0.00
0.00 mmol/L
0.00
0.00 mmol/L
0.0
0.0
mg/dL
0.0
0.0
mmol/L
0.0
0.0
mg/dL
Hb
1
BE-ECF
2
BE-B
3
SBC
4
HCO35
TCO2
6
O2Ct
7
A
8
AaDo2
9
a/A
.
P50
0
PO2/FI
-
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
Analyzer Identification #:
nn



30 Aug 96
Results Reporting:
Press Number
Hilite - Reporting
REFERENCE
LOW
HIGH
pH
0.000
0.000
PCO2
0.0
0.0
PO2
0.0
0.0
SO2%
0.0
0.0
Hct
0.
0.
Na+
0.0
0.0
K+
0.00
0.00
Ca++/Cl- 0.00
0.00
Glu
0.0
0.0
Lac
0.0
0.0
BUN
0.0
0.0
ANALYZER IDENTIFICATION
REFERENCE & PANIC RANGES
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
TESTSELECT
Ultra I, J, and K
Ultra F, G, and H
Results Reporting:
Press Number
Hilite - Reporting
nCa++
1
Osm
2
Results Reporting:
Press Number
Hilite - Reporting
Osm
1
An.Gap
2
SAMPLE NUMBER COUNTER
123
___
Total Samples Accepted 123456789

30 Aug 96
11:45:45

30 Aug 96
Stat Profile Ultra F, G, H, I, J, and K Setup Screen Map Revision A, 8/96
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
__
TESTSELECT
SUPERVISOR PASSWORD
DATE/TIME


11:45:45
Press TEST SELECT for Results Results.

301
nnnn
316
nnnn
331
nnnn
302
nnnn
317
nnnn
332
nnnn
303
nnnn
318
nnnn
333
nnnn
304
nnnn
319
nnnn
334
nnnn
305
nnnn
320
nnnn
335
nnnn
306
nnnn
321
nnnn
336
nnnn
307
nnnn
322
nnnn
337
nnnn
308
nnnn
323
nnnn
338
nnnn
309
nnnn
324
nnnn
339
nnnn
310
nnnn
325
nnnn
340
nnnn
311
nnnn
326
nnnn
341
nnnn
312
nnnn
327
nnnn
342
nnnn
313
nnnn
328
nnnn
343
nnnn
314
nnnn
329
nnnn
344
nnnn
315
nnnn
330
nnnn
345
nnnn
On
Odd
30 Aug 96
PO2
3
Parity
TECHNICIAN PASSWORDS
11:45:45
PCO2
2
11:45:45
pH
1
4800
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
Results Reporting:
Press Number
Hilite - Reporting
Measured
or
Entered
Press ENTER to Enter Change

11:45:45
30 minutes
Data
Auto
Off
Off
Baud
OPERATOR PASSWORDS
Offset
+ 0.0 mpH
+ 0.0 %
+ 0.0 %
+ 0.0 %
+ 0.0 %
+ 0.0 %
+ 0.0 %
+ 0.0 %
+ 0.0 %
+ 0.0 %
+ 0.0 %
RESULTS REPORTING
Calibration Print Mode

Print Calibration Slope & mV
Print Calibration Drift Data
Manual
On
Off
Off
ENTER BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

30 Aug 96
5
6
7
30 Aug 96
ELECTRODE OFFSETS
Mode
Slope & mV Data
DRIFT Data
Errors
11:45:45
Electrode
pH
PCO2
PO2
SO2%
Hct
Na+
K+
Ca++/ClGlu
Lac
BUN
Calibration Transmit
Transmit Calibration
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
1
2
3
4
C
kPa
mmol/L
mg/dL
mmol/L
mg/dL BUN
mmol/L (Hb/4)
Temperature
Blood Gas Values
Ca++ Concentration
Glu Concentration
Lac Concentration
BUN/Urea Concentration
Hemoglobin
COM1:
CALIBRATION CONFIGURATION
CALIBRATION OUTPUT OPTIONS
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
30 Aug 96
Port
11:45:45
xx.xx
2 Analysis Throughput Mode
K+ Result
Full Panel
1 Default Analysis Type
Manual
Off
Off
Off
Mode
mV Data
Drift Data
Errors
Remote Review (or Group #1)

101
nnnn
116
nnnn
131
nnnn
102
nnnn
117
nnnn
132
nnnn
103
nnnn
118
nnnn
133
nnnn
104
nnnn
119
nnnn
134
nnnn
105
nnnn
120
nnnn
135
nnnn
106
nnnn
121
nnnn
136
nnnn
107
nnnn
122
nnnn
137
nnnn
108
nnnn
123
nnnn
138
nnnn
109
nnnn
124
nnnn
139
nnnn
110
nnnn
125
nnnn
140
nnnn
111
nnnn
126
nnnn
141
nnnn
112
nnnn
127
nnnn
142
nnnn
113
nnnn
128
nnnn
143
nnnn
114
nnnn
129
nnnn
144
nnnn
115
nnnn
130
nnnn
145
nnnn
xxx.
Transmit
Analysis
Analysis
Analysis
Na+ Result
Analysis
Transmit
Transmit
Transmit
1
2
3
4
Warning, Port Previosly Assigned!
11:45:45
11:45:45
SERVICE MENU
5.0 SERVICE - Ultra F, G, H, I, J, and K Analyzers
1 System Test

2 Analog Input Signal Data

3 Analysis/Calibration Signal Data
4 Temperature Control Signal Data
5 System Error Log
6 Fluid/Gas Prime Menu
7 I/O Devices Menu

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
I/O DEVICES MENU
SYSTEM TEST #1
Version 123
DISK OPERATIONS
Revision 123.456
SYSTEM BUSY
Millivolt Display
PCO2 Membrane
PO2 Gain
Air Oscillators
Pump
Sampler Position
Valve Position
Gas Flow
Pump Bypass Valve
SO2% LED's
+042.32
-023.23
-023.23
Multiple
Off
Low
Off
0-Off
0
0
0-Off
Closed
Off
1
2
3
Transmit Last Results

Transmit Calibration Data
4
5
6
7
Printer Subsystem
External Parallel Port
Communications Tests
Disk Drive Utilities
Program Reload
Glu
Lac
BUN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Na
+008.56
K+
+017.35
Ca /Cl +074.43
++
pH + 047.43
PCO2 -082.12
PO2 -0051.20

30 Aug 96

30 Aug 96
Version 123
BLOOD GASES & pH
COMMUNICATIONS TEST
PROGRAM RELOAD
Revision 123.456
-0008.6 mV
Press ENTER to Advance Channel Number.

Millivolt Display
PCO2 Membrane
PO2 Gain
Air Oscillators
Pump
Sampler Position
Valve Position
Gas Flow
Pump Bypass Valve
SO2% LED's
Multiple
Off
Low
Off
0-Off
0
0
0-Off
Closed
Off
Gas B/Std B
mV Stab
-21.6
0.4
pH
pH
PCO2
PO2
+127.6
-4.0
pH
PCO2
PO2
Sample
mV Stab
-64.7
0.4
-91.9
0.9
-228.4
0.0
0.4
0.0
Gas A/Std A/STD C

mV Stab
Slope
-53.3
0.4
+10.1
-53.3
0.4
+10.1
+111.3
1.3
+9.3
-224.1
0.0
-4.0
Gas A/Std C
mV Stab
-57.1
0.4
+110.5
8.3
-231.5
0.0
Channel 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
11:45:45
SYSTEM TEST #2
11:45:45
mV
Chan
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
STD C/FLUSH
mV Stab
-165.5
1.8
+0.6
0.0
+68.3
0.3
Sample
mV Stab
Na+
-166.3
2.5
K+
+0.2
0.1
Cl-/Ca++ +68.6
0.2
Std C/FLUSH
mV Stab
-160.5
0.2
+0.3
0.3
+66.9
0.2
TRANSMITTER TEST

Slope
+9.2
+10.2
+9.7
These characters will be transmitted

continuously until the Clear key is pressed.
------------------------------------------------The Brown Fox Jumped Over...
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ 123 passes
The Brown Fox Jumped Over...

Conc
133.0
3.94
126.8
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Errors 123
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
30 Aug 96
11:45:45

11:45:45
ENTER
PROGRAM RELOAD
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
Std D/Std B
mV Stab
Na+
-180.3
2.9
K+
+42.1
0.4
Cl-/Ca++ +77.8
0.1
11:45:45
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
mV
ENTER
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
30 Aug 96
Digital Loop-Back Test
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
ELECTROLYTES
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
+1234.5
Transmitter Test Characters

ANALOG INPUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Insert program disk in drive.

Slope
7.568
18.8
155.1
ENTER
Chan
COM Port to Test: COM1
30 Aug 96
mV
Warning! All Stored Results Will be Deleted.

Chan
30 Aug 96

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
11:45:45
ENTER
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
AB BLR MTR
Preheater
37.1 C
+0080.10 mV
+ 50.99 mV
119
Controller
On
134
Off
On
Glu
Lac
BUN
Off
-9.0
0.8
Sample
mV Stab
+13.7
0.0
+13.7
0.0
+13.7
0.0
STD C/Std A
mV Stab
+12.6
0.5
+12.6
0.5
+70.2
0.6
-39.1
0.2
+3.3
0.8
Std C
mV Stab
+12.4
0.4
+12.4
0.4
+12.4
0.4
Slope
+17.8
+17.8
+10.6
Conc
86.4
86.4
86.4
Character Set Test
2
3
4
Print System Dump

Print Print Set-up Parameters
Print System Error Log
Cancel Printout
Printer Enabled
Install test fixture on COM1
+0004.30 mV
+ 566.68 mV
Std D
mV Stab
+33.9
0.0
+33.9
0.0
DAC
Air Bath
37.0 C
Glu
Lac
Lac
BUN
BUN
Thermistor
Current
SP REMOVED
Temperature
DOOR OPEN
PRINTER SUBSYSTEM
METABOLITES

30 Aug 96

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
ENTER
95 8:40:28
95 8:40:28
95 9:40:28
95 10:40:28
95 11:40:28
95 8:40:28
95 8:40:28
95 8:40:28
95 8:40:28
95 8:40:28
95 8:40:28
95 8:40:28
95 8:40:28
95 8:40:28

Fnc/-PgDn
-LnUp
LED 1
LED 3
Flush
mV Stab
+123.4
+12.3
+123.4
+12.3
Dark
mV Stab
+123.4 12.3
+123.4 12.3
LED 1
LED 3
Std 1
mV Stab
+123.4
+12.3
+123.4
+12.3
Std 2
mV Stab
+123.4 12.3
+123.4 12.3
Sample
mV Stab
+123.4 12.3
+123.4 12.3
LED 1
LED 3
Slope
+12.3
Errors
30 Aug 96
ENTER
AIR DETECTORS & Hct

Std B
+196.5
+314.3
Std C
+126.4
+273.0
mV
+70.1
+41.3
AD2
AD3
Flush
Std. A
Std. B
Std. C
Std. D
Gas A
Gas B
Flow Path
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ 123 passes
Hct
Std B
mV Stab
+314.3
0.4
STD C
mV Stab
+273.0
0.1
Slope
+66.4
Hct
Sample
mV Stab
+270.2
0.0
Std C
mV Stab
+272.1
0.5
Conc
48.
Errors 123
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
30 Aug 96
11:45:45

30 Aug 96
Stat Profile Ultra F thru K Service Screen Map Revision A, 8/96
11:45:45
TRD
DCD
CTS
RIV
123
123
123
123
123
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
Prime
Prime
Prime
Prime
Prime
Prime
Prime
Purge
DSR
RTS
Press CLEAR to Stop Test.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TXD
RXD
Errors
TXD
RXD
DSR
TRD
DCD
CTS
RTS
RIV
123
123
123
123
123
Conc
+123.4
ENTER
FLUID / GAS PRIME OPTIONS
Testing Completed After 123 passes
Testing Pass 123

30 Aug 96
11:45:45
-LnDn
ENTER
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Fnc/- PgUp
2
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
6
7
9
10
10
10
POD NOT PRESENT

SP TEMP .TOO HI
POD NOT PRESENT
POD NOT PRESENT
POD NOT PRESENT
POD NOT PRESENT
SP TEMP.TOO HI
POD NOT PRESENT
SP TEMP. TOO HI
POD NOT PRESENT
POD NOT PRESENT
POD NOT PRESENT
SP TEMP. TOO HI
SP TEMP. TOO HI
F4
S5
F4
F4
F4
F4
S5
F4
S5
F4
F4
F4
S5
S5
OXYGEN SATURATION
SYSTEM ERROR LOG
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
11:45:45
30 Aug 96
11:45:45
Appendix F Parts and Consumables

F
Ordering Information
Supplies and parts for the Stat Profile Ultra are available from Nova Biomedical.
DESCRIPTION
ITEM #
Maintenance Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17608

Reference Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16794
16017
16018
16019
16020
16016
16171
06007
06586
06587
06529
06005
00099
12704
08923
13409
09458
07158
16698
07161
17042
06588
06546
06548
08254
06545
06547
08897
16170
06555
06556
08161
09919
15507
F. Supplies
Blood Gas/Electrolyte/Chemistry Control Level 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Blood Gas/Electrolyte/Chemistry Control Multipack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUN Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUN Membrane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calcium Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Gas A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Gas B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capillary Adapter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chloride Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chloride Internal Filling Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deproteinizing Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrode Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrode Soaking Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrode Conditioning Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan Filters (10/box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Cell Interconnect Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Cell Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gas Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gas Cylinder Stand, E Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gas Cylinder Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gas Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gas Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gas Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glucose Electrode Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glucose Membrane Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hematocrit Control Level 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hematocrit Control Level 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hematocrit Control Multipack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lactate Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lactate Membrane Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
F. Supplies
Ordering Information (contd)
F-2
DESCRIPTION
ITEM #
Linearity Solution Set A, L1 (Na+, K+, Cl-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Linearity Solution Set B, L1 (Glucose, Lactate, BUN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linearity Solution Set C, L1 (iCa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linearity Solution Set D, L1 (Hematocrit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linearity Solution Set D, L2 (Hematocrit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Na/pH Conditioning Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nova Cleaning Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oxygen Saturation Calibrators Multipack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Paper (5 Rolls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Probe Adjustment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCO2 Conditioning Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCO2 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCO2 Electrolyte Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCO2 Membrane Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pH Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PO2 Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PO2 Electrolyte Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PO2 Premembraned Cap Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Potassium Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preheater Cleaning Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reagent Tubing Harness Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Preheater (Flow Cell holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Probe Cleaning Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Probe/S-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Septum Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Septum Tubing Harness Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13511
13512
13513
13514
13515
13516
13517
13518
13519
13520
13521
13522
13523
13524
01498
06856
11272
17371
10641
07190
06857
07541
06553
07543
06013
11098
06554
11099
06009
11802
06516
06025
17393
02702
06523
06558
06517
Appendix F Parts and Consumables

Ordering Information (contd)
DESCRIPTION
ITEM #
Shorting Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sodium Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stat Profile Ultra Reagent Pack F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stat Profile Ultra Reagent Pack G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stat Profile Ultra Reagent Pack H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stat Profile Ultra Reagent Pack I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stat Profile Ultra Reagent Pack J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stat Profile Ultra Reagent Pack K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultra Multi Control Level 1 with Glucose Over-Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultra Multi Control Level 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultra Multi Control Multipack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W/R-Tubing Harness Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W/R-Tubing Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer Replacement Kit (ISE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer Replacement Kit (pH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer Replacement Kit (PCO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer Replacement Kit (PO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer Removal Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
09331
06011
18194
18195
18170
18196
18197
18198
18772
18773
18774
16824
07575
08153
09796
09797
09798
07157
F. Supplies
F-3
Appendix G Shutdown/Reinstallation
G
Shutdown/Reinstallation Procedures
G.1
Shutdown Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Clean the flow path with Cleaning Solution (PN 11802) per Section 4.1.5.1.
Perform a deionized water purge per steps 1 to 6 of Section 5.2.2.3 (also purging the
R-line with deionized water).
Cap the reagent pack bottles.
Remove the PCO2 and PO2 electrodes from the flow cell. Remove the membraned
caps from the PCO2 and the PO2 electrodes and drain the filling solution from
them. Rinse the parts of the electrodes that were in contact with the filling solution
with deionized water, replace the PCO2 and PO2 membraned caps onto the
electrodes for protection, see Sections 4.4.6 and 4.4.7, omitting replacement of the
filling solution. Replace the electrodes in the flow cell.
Unplug the glucose and lactate electrode cables from the rack by lifting the latch
up with 1 hand while pulling the connector out with the other hand.
Draw the water out of the gas humidifiers with a syringe.
Turn off the gases at the regulators.
Lift the pinch bar, located on the pinch valve, off the reagent harness tubing.
Unplug the instrument.
G. Shut/Rein
G-1

G.2
Reinstallation Procedure
For maximum efficiency follow this reinstallation procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
G. Shut/Rein
14.
15.
Connect the gas hoses to the instrument per Section 4.4.18.3.

Install the septum assembly per Section 4.4.13.
Install the W/R-harness per Section 4.4.11.
Install the septum harness per Section 4.4.12.
Install the reagent harness per Section 4.4.12.
Install the reagent pack per Section 4.4.13.
Connect the power cord to the instrument at the back of the instrument then plug
the instrument into the line voltage.
Perform a barometer check as follows:
a.
Press MENU, 4, password, 2, 3, 3 to access the Set Barometric Pressure
screen.
b.
Note the barometric pressure reading. The barometric pressure reading
should agree within 2mm mercury with a reliable reference value such as
a lab barometer or weather bureau reading. If the values are not in
agreement, see Section 2.2.1.3.
c.
Press CLEAR, CLEAR, CLEAR to return to the Main Menu.
Check the sample probe position per the Probe Placement Test located in Section
5.3.1.5.
Turn on both gas cylinders, open the regulators completely. Verify that the gas
delivery pressure is at approximately 5 psig 1 and that the main pressure is at about
2000 psig (new tank). If the gas pressure is incorrect, refer to Section 4.4.18.1 to
adjust the regulators.
Assemble and attach the sample preheater-flow cell-reference electrode unit to the
rack per Section 4.4.15. Do not install the electrodes into the flow cell yet.
Attach the S-line to the bottom of the sample preheater by sliding the tubing over
the sample preheater connector.
Perform Sections 4.4.1, 4.4.2, 4.4.3, 4.4.4, 4.4.5, 4.4.6, 4.4.7, 4.4.8, and 4.4.9,
preconditioning and installing the electrodes in the flow cell.
From Main Menu, press 2, 4, 1 to start a fluid prime. Wait until the cycle is complete,
then press 2, 4, 1 for a final prime.
Remove the 2 humidifier caps and fill each humidifier to the line with deionized
water.
NOTE: Do not overfill the humidifiers.

From Main Menu, press 2, 4, 2 to initiate a gas prime. Wait until the cycle is
complete.
17. Set up the program as given in Section 2.
16.
G-2
Appendix H Warranty
H
Warranty
Subject to the exclusions and upon the conditions specified below, Nova Biomedical or the
authorized Nova Biomedical distributor warrants that he will correct free of all charges
including labor, either by repair, or at his election, by replacement, any part of an instrument
which fails within one (1) year after delivery to the customer because of defective material or
workmanship. This warranty does not include normal wear from use and excludes: (A) Service
or parts required for repair to damage caused by accident, neglect, misuse, altering the Nova
equipment, unfavorable environmental conditions, electric current fluctuations, work performed by any party other than an authorized Nova representative or any force of nature; (B)
Work which, in the sole and exclusive opinion of Nova, is impractical to perform because of
location, alterations in the Nova equipment or connection of the Nova equipment to any other
device; (C) Specification changes; (D) Service required to parts in the system contacted or
otherwise affected by expendables or reagents not manufactured by Nova which cause
shortened life, erratic behavior, damage or poor analytical performance; (E) Service required
because of problems, which, in the sole and exclusive opinion of Nova, have been caused by
any unauthorized third party; or (F) Instrument refurbishing for cosmetic purposes. All parts
replaced under the original warranty will be warranted only until the end of the original instrument
warranty. All requests for warranty replacement must be received by Nova or their authorized distributor
within thirty (30) days after the component failure. Nova Biomedical reserves the right to change,
alter, modify or improve any of its instruments without any obligation to make corresponding
changes to any instrument previously sold or shipped. All service will be rendered during
Novas principal hours of operation. All requests for service outside Novas principal hours
of operation will be rendered at the prevailing weekend/holiday rates after receipt of an
authorized purchase order. Contact Nova for specific information.
The following exceptions apply:
1.
3.
H-1
H. Warranty
2.
The Glucose, Lactate, and BUN membranes are warranted as stated on the insert
that is shipped with the membranes, provided they are stored refrigerated and
placed into service prior to the expiration date on the packaging. This warranty is
invalid under the conditions specified after item 7.
The sodium, pH, PCO2, PO2, and reference electrodes, and the chloride, glucose,
and lactate electrode bodies are warranted for six (6) months from the date of
installation, provided they are stored at room temperature and placed into service
prior to the use before date on the packaging. In the event that an electrode does not
meet that use life, then Nova Biomedical will replace that electrode at no charge
under this warranty. This warranty is invalid under the conditions specified after
item 7.
Each potassium electrode that is purchased from Nova Biomedical will achieve
three (3) months of use life from the date of installation, provided they are stored
at room temperature and placed into service prior to the expiration date on the
4.
5.
6.
7.
packaging. A majority of the electrodes will achieve that use life without intervention from Nova. In the unlikely event that an electrode you purchase does not meet
that use life, Nova Biomedical will replace that electrode at no charge under this
warranty. This warranty is invalid under the conditions specified after item 7.
The chloride cap is warranted as stated on the insert that is shipped with the caps. This
warranty is invalid under the conditions specified after item 7.
The ionized calcium and BUN electrodes are warranted as stated on the insert that
is shipped with the electrode. This warranty is invalid under the conditions
specified after item 7.
Consumable items, including the reagent pack, calibration gases, replaceable
membranes, tubing and tubing harnesses, electrolyte solutions, external standards,
and septum assemblies are warranted to be free of defects at time of installation.
The item must be placed into service prior to the expiration date printed on the
packaging. All defects must be promptly reported to Nova Biomedical in writing.
This warranty is invalid under the conditions specified after item 7.
Freight is paid by the customer.
The above warranties are invalid if:

1.
The date printed on the package label has expired.
2.
Non-Nova Biomedical reagents or controls are used, as follows:
Nova Biomedical will not be responsible for any warranties on electrodes, tubing,
probes, septa, or other parts if these parts are used in conjunction with and are
adversely affected by reagents, controls, or other material not manufactured by
Nova but which contact or affect such parts. Reagent formulations not manufactured by Nova Biomedical may contain acids, concentrated salt solutions, and
artificial preservatives that have been shown to cause problems such as shortened
electrode and septa life, electrode membrane damage, electrode drift, erratic
analytical results, and inaccurate instrument performance.
H. Warranty
THE FOREGOING OBLIGATIONS ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER OBLIGATIONS AND

LIABILITIES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND ALL WARRANTIES, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OTHERWISE, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED IN FACT BY LAW AND STATE
OUR ENTIRE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY AND BUYERS EXCLUSIVE REMEDY
FOR ANY CLAIM OF DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OR FURNISHING OF GOODS OR PARTS, THEIR DESIGN, SUITABILITY FOR USE, INSTALLATION OR OPERATION. NOVA BIOMEDICAL WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, AND OUR LIABILITY UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL EXCEED THE CONTRACT PRICE
FOR THE GOODS FOR WHICH THE LIABILITY IS CLAIMED.
IN ORDER FOR THE WARRANTY TO BE EFFECTIVE, THE WARRANTY CARD
MUST BE SENT TO NOVA BIOMEDICAL, 200 PROSPECT STREET, WALTHAM, MA
02254.
H-2
Index
A
ABG Calculated Results Reporting screen 2-17, 3-34
Acceptable samples .............................. A-1, 1-3, 1-5
Activity coefficient ................................................B-3
Adapting the program ............................................ 2-1
Air Bath Not Ready ............................................. 3-17
Air detector status ................................................ 3-19
Air Detector Status screens ................................. 3-19
Air detector test ................................................... 5-96
Air Detectors and Hct screen ............................. 5-108
Air detectors, subsystem test ............................. 5-107
Air Detectors Uncalibrated .................................. 3-17
Alternate analysis (expired gas) ............................ 4-2
Altitude effects .................................................... 5-88
Alveolar oxygen (A) ............................................ B-14
Ammonium ion selective electrode ..................... B-10
Analog input data .............................................. 5-103
Analysis ............................................................... 3-30
Analysis configuration ........................................... 2-3
Analysis Configuration screen ............................... 2-4
Analysis Output Options screen ............................ 2-4
Analysis signal data ........................................... 5-104
Analytical compartment ................................ 3-5, 3-6
ANALYZE key ...................................................... 3-4
Analyzer identification .......................................... 2-8
Analyzer, lifting or moving .................................. A-6
Analyzer reset .................................................... 5-120
Analyzing samples ............................................... 3-30
Anion gap ............................................................B-16
Anticoagulant .............................................. 1-7, 5-91
Aqueous controls, problems with ........................ 5-87
Arterial alveolar oxygen tension gradient (AaDO2) B-14
Arterial alveolar oxygen tension ratio .................B-14
Auto-Cal .............................................................. 3-25
B
Bar code wand port test ..................................... 5-112
Barometer ............................................................. A-2
Barometric pressure ..................................... 2-6, 3-17
Barometric pressure effects ................................. 5-88
Barometric pressure module .................................. 3-9
Barometric Pressure screen ................................... 2-6
Base excess extracellular fluid (BE-ECF) ...........B-13
Battery ................................................................. 2-31
Bicarbonate concentration ...................................B-11
Blank electrode suppression ................................ 2-13
Blood Gas/Electrolyte/Chemistry Controls ........... C-5
Blood gases ............................................................ 1-3
Blood gases (slope limits) ................................. 5-104
Blood Gases and pH screen ............................... 5-105
BUN concentration ..............................................B-10

BUN dilution, elevated .......................................... 1-7
BUN electrode membraning ................................ 4-23
BUN electrode replacement ................................ 4-23
BUN slope limits ............................................... 5-107
BUN, subsystem test ......................................... 5-106
Bypass valve test, pump .................................... 5-101
C
Cabinet cleaning ................................................... A-6
Cal I ....................................................................... 4-5
Calcium ............................................ B-5, B-15, 4-16
Calcium electrode replacement ........................... 4-14
Calcium, ionized .................................................... 1-4
Calculated parameters .........................................B-11
Calculated results ......................................... 1-2, 3-13
Calculated Results screen .......................... 2-13, 3-37
Calculated values ...................................... B-10, 2-15
Calculating sample concentration ..........................B-6
CALIBRATE key .................................................. 3-2
Calibrating gases ................................................... C-2
Calibration ........................................................... 3-24
Calibration configuration ....................................... 2-5
Calibration gas values ................................ 3-16, 5-88
Calibration gases .......................................... A-5, 4-9
Calibration gases composition ...............................C-2
Calibration options ...................................... 3-25, 4-3
Calibration Options screen .................................... 4-3
Calibration signal data ....................................... 5-104
Calibration standards ............................................. 5-3
Calibrations, terminating ....................................... 4-4
Cancel Print-out ................................................... 3-28
Capillary samples ........................................ 1-5, 3-31
Capillary samples, running .................................. 3-39
Capillary-adapter fitting ...................................... 3-39
Carbon dioxide content (TCO2) ........................... B-12
Check septum assembly message ........................ 5-92
Chloride .............................................. B-5, 1-4, 4-16
Chloride cap ......................................................... 4-16
Chloride cap filling and installation .................... 4-16
Chloride electrode replacement ........................... 4-14
Clean sample preheater message ......................... 5-92
Cleaning, septum assembly inlet port .................. 4-12
Cleaning the cabinet ............................................. A-6
Cleaning the CRT ................................................. A-6
CLEAR key ........................................................... 3-3
Clinical utility ........................................................ 1-3
Communication states ........................................... 6-2
Communications interface ..................................... 6-1
Communications setup ........................................ 2-24
Communications Setup screen ............................ 2-24
Communications Test screen ............................. 5-116
I-1
Index
Component conditioning ..................................... 4-10

Component flushing ............................................ 5-79
Component replacement ...................................... 4-14
Component Replacement screen ......................... 4-14
Components ........................................................... 3-1
Concentration gradient ..........................................B-1
Contamination by room air .................................. 5-91
Control Range Limits screen ............................... 2-23
Controls .................................................................C-1
Correcting pump problems .................................. 5-79
CRT cleaning ........................................................ A-6
CRT display ........................................................... 3-2
Cumulative Statistics for Control ........................ 3-27
Cumulative Statistics for Test .............................. 3-27
Cup samples ......................................................... 3-31
CURSOR key ........................................................ 3-3
D
Daily Data to Month-to-Date, move .................... 2-21
Daily QC Analysis Log ....................................... 3-27
Daily QC Analysis Log, print .............................. 2-21
Daily QC Summary Graphs ................................. 3-27
Daily QC Summary Graphs, print ....................... 2-21
Date and Time screen ............................................ 2-7
Date, setting ........................................................... 2-7
Decimal Point key ................................................. 3-4
Default functions ................................................... 2-1
Default parameter ................................................ 2-25
Default Parameter screen ..................................... 2-25
Definition of PCO2 .................................................................................. B-7
Definition of pH .....................................................B-7
Definition of PO2 ...................................................................................... B-8
Degasing the electrode ......................................... 4-27
Delays in transit ................................................... 5-91
Deproteinizing solution, cleaning .......................... 4-8
Digit keys ............................................................... 3-4
Dimensions ........................................................... A-5
Disabled ............................................................... 2-20
Disk drive utilities ............................................. 5-118
Disk Operations screen ...................................... 5-119
E
Electrical compliance ........................................... A-5
Electrical requirements .......................................... 1-1
Electrode calibration .............................................. B-5
Electrode conditioning holder ............................. 4-19
Electrode drift ...................................................... 3-13
Electrode membrane cap insertion ...................... 4-27
Electrode offset .................................................... 2-11
Electrode Offset screen ........................................ 2-12
I-2
Electrode polishing solution ...................... 4-20, 4-22

Electrode rack assembly ................................ 3-6, 3-7
Electrode suppression, blank ............................... 2-13
Electrode-flow cell assembly ..................... 4-15, 4-18
Electrodes .............................................................. 3-8
Electrolyte Calculated Results Reporting screen 3-35
Electrolyte Resolution screen .............................. 2-10
Electrolyte resolution, set .................................... 2-10
Electrolyte slope limits ...................................... 5-105
Electrolytes screen ............................................. 5-106
Elevated BUN, dilution ......................................... 1-7
Elevated glucose .................................................... 1-6
Elevated lactate ...................................................... 1-6
ENTER key ............................................................ 3-3
Enzyme-membrane cap ....................................... 4-20
Error codes .................................... 5-1, 5-6, 5-7, 5-8
Expired air bag samples ....................................... 3-31
Expired Gas Analysis Patient Results screen ...... 3-40
Expired gas samples (PCO2 and PO2), running .. 3-40
External fuse access ................................... 4-65, 4-66
External parallel port ......................................... 5-114
F
Fiber optic module ......................................... 3-6, 3-9
Fiber optics ............................................................ 4-5
Filling, gas humidifier well ................................. 4-13
Filling the PO2 membrane cap ............................ 4-31
FIO2 ......................................................................................................................... 2-26
Flow Cell ............................................................... 3-6
Flow cell ................................................................ 3-8
Flow cell conditioning ......................................... 4-11
Flow cell flush ..................................................... 5-83
Flow cell light ........................................ 3-6, 3-9, 4-2
Flow cell replacement .......................................... 4-56
Flow cell washers ................. 4-15, 4-18, 4-25, 4-30
Flow path air flush ............................................... 5-80
Flow path cleaning ................................................. 4-6
Flow Path Cleaning screen .................................... 4-7
Flow path flushing ............................................... 5-79
Flow path leaks .................................................... 5-86
Flow test .............................................................. 5-77
Fluid prime ........................................................ 5-111
Fluid prime options ................................................ 4-6
Fluid/Gas Prime Options screen ................ 4-6, 5-111
Fluidic diagram .................................................... 3-12
Fluidics ................................................................ 5-90
Full calibration ....................................................... 4-4
FUNCTION key .................................................... 3-3
Functions ............................................................... 3-2
Fuse replacement ................................................. 4-65
Fuse requirements .................................................. 1-1
Fuses .................................................................... 4-66
Index
G
Gas calibrating requirements ................................. 1-2
Gas cylinders filter replacement .......................... 4-63
Gas cylinders hose fitting .................................... 4-63
Gas cylinders regulator adjustment ..................... 4-63
Gas cylinders replacement ................................... 4-63
Gas filter replacement .......................................... 4-64
Gas hose connection ............................................ 4-64
Gas humidifier ..................................................... 5-86
Gas humidifier well fill levels ............................. 4-13
Gas humidifier well filling .................................. 4-13
Gas humidifier wells ...................................... 3-6, 3-7
Gas pressure test .................................................. 5-85
Gas prime ........................................................... 5-111
Gas prime options .................................................. 4-6
Gas regulator adjustment ..................................... 4-63
Gas test .............................................................. 5-101
Gas values ............................................................ 5-88
Gases ...................................................................... 5-3
Gases, calibrating .................................................. C-2
Glucose ......................................................... B-9, 1-4
Glucose electrode membraning ........................... 4-19
Glucose electrode polishing ................................ 4-19
Glucose electrode replacement ............................ 4-19
Glucose electrode tip polishing ........................... 4-20
Glucose, elevated ................................................... 1-6
Glucose Over-Range solution ................................C-3
Glucose slope limits .......................................... 5-107
Glucose, subsystem test ..................................... 5-106
H
Handling requirements .......................................... 1-5
Harness replacement ............................................ 4-47
Hct, subsystem test ............................................ 5-107
Hematocrit ........................................... B-8, C-4, 1-4
Hematocrit controls ............................................... C-1
Hematocrit slope limits ...................................... 5-108
Hemoglobin .............................................. B-12, 2-26
High-level protocol ................................................ 6-3
Humidifier leaks .................................................. 5-86
I
I/O devices ......................................................... 5-111
I/O Devices Menu screen .................................. 5-112
Idle state ................................................................. 6-2
Individual component flush ................................. 5-80
Inspired oxygen fraction ratio .............................B-16
Installation ............................................................. 1-1
Installing new software .......................................... 2-1
Instrument specifications ...................................... A-1

Intended use ........................................................... 1-2
Interferences ........................................................ 5-90
Interfering substances ............................................ 1-8
Internal filling solution ............................... B-5, 4-16
Introduction ........................................................... 1-1
Ion selective membrane ......................................... B-2
Ionic diffusion ........................................................ B-1
J
Junction potential ................................................... B-4
K
Keypad ................................................................... 3-2
L
Lactate .......................................................... B-9, 1-3
Lactate electrode membraning ............................ 4-21
Lactate electrode polishing .................................. 4-21
Lactate electrode replacement ............................. 4-21
Lactate electrode tip polishing ............................. 4-22
Lactate, elevated .................................................... 1-6
Lactate slope limits ............................................ 5-107
Lactate, subsystem test ...................................... 5-106
Levey-Jennings Graphs ....................................... 3-28
Levey-Jennings Graphs, print .............................. 2-21
Lifting the analyzer ............................................... A-6
Link establishment state ........................................ 6-2
Link termination state ............................................ 6-3
Loop-Back Test screen .......................... 5-117, 5-118
Low-level protocol ................................................. 6-1
M
Main menu ........................................................... 3-24
Main Menu screen ............................................... 3-24
Maintenance .......................................................... 4-1
Maintenance Menu ................................................ 4-1
Maintenance Menu screen ..................................... 4-2
Maintenance procedures ...................................... 4-10
Maintenance, scheduled ...................................... 4-10
Mandatory QC ..................................................... 2-20
Manual calibration ....................................... 3-25, 4-4
Matrix effects ....................................................... 5-90
Measured Results Reporting screen 2-13, 2-16, 3-34
Measured Results screen ..................................... 3-36
Measured tests ..................................................... 2-15
I-3
Index
Measurement range .............................................. A-1

Measuring technology .......................................... A-1
MENU key ............................................................. 3-3
Metabolites screen ............................................. 5-107
Method comparison .............................................. A-3
Minus sign ............................................................. 3-5
Month-to-Date Data, erase .................................. 2-21
Month-to-Date Statistics by Control ................... 3-28
Month-to-Date Statistics by Test ......................... 3-28
Month-to-Date Test Summaries, print ................. 2-21
Multiple parameter control failures ..................... 5-88
N
Nernst equation ......................................................B-2
No Reagent/Gas When Required ......................... 3-17
Not Ready screen ................................................. 3-16
O
O2 saturation ......................................................... 1-3
Offset limits ......................................................... 2-12
One-point calibration .................................. B-5, 3-13
Operation ............................................................... 2-1
Operation configuration ......................................... 2-3
Operation Configuration screen ............................. 2-3
Operation overview ............................................. 3-13
Operator passwords ............................................. 2-27
Ordering information ............................................. F-1
Osmolality ...........................................................B-16
Over-Range solution .............................................. C-3
Override mandatory QC analysis ........................ 3-29
Oxygen content (O2Ct) ........................................B-13
Oxygen fraction ratio, inspired ............................B-16
Oxygen saturation ..................................... C-4, 5-109
Oxygen saturation calibration ................................ 4-5
Oxygen saturation controls ....................................C-1
Oxygen Saturation screen .................................. 5-109
Oxygenation index ...............................................B-16
P
Panic ranges ......................................................... 2-18
Paper installation ................................................. 4-62
Paper release ........................................................ 4-61
Partial pressure of carbon dioxide (PCO2) ............B-7
Partial pressure of oxygen (PCO2) ........................B-8
Parts ....................................................................... F-1
Password ................................................................ 2-1
Password options ................................................. 2-26
Password Options screen ..................................... 2-27
I-4
Patient Recall Menu ........................................... 2-29

Patient data .......................................................... 2-26
PATIENT DATA key ............................................. 3-4
Patient Data Recall Menu screen ......................... 2-29
Patient Data screen .............................................. 3-33
Patient specimens, problems with ....................... 5-90
Patient temperature .............................................. 2-26
Patient temperature default value ........................ 2-26
pCO2, definition of ................................................B-7
PCO2 electrode conditioning ............................... 4-24
PCO2 electrode membraning ............................... 4-24
PCO2 electrode replacement ............................... 4-24
PCO2 electrode-flow cell alignment ................... 4-28
PCO2 measurement, principle of ........................... B-7
Performing maintenance functions ........................ 4-1
pH .......................................................................... 1-3
pH, definition of .................................................... B-7
pH electrode ...........................................................B-6
pH electrode replacement .................................... 4-17
pH slope limits ................................................... 5-104
Pinch valve .......................................................... 3-10
Pinch valve tubing repositioning ......................... 4-47
Platen ................................................................... 4-61
PO2, definition of .................................................. B-8
PO2 electrode membraning ................................. 4-29
PO2 electrode polishing ....................................... 4-29
PO2 electrode replacement .................................. 4-29
PO2 Electrode-flow cell alignment ..................... 4-32
PO2 measurement, principle of .............................B-8
PO2 polishing the electrode tip ........................... 4-30
PO2 premembraned cap ....................................... 4-31
Polishing paper ................................4-20, 4-22, 4-30
Potassium ............................................ B-5, 1-3, 4-16
Potassium electrode replacement ........................ 4-14
Potential measurement ...........................................B-1
Power .................................................................... A-6
Power loss ............................................................ 2-31
Precision ............................................................... A-3
Preheater cleaning agent ........................................ 4-7
Preheater replacement ......................................... 4-59
Premembraned cap .............................................. 4-31
Principle of PCO2 measurement ........................... B-7
Principle of PO2 measurement ..............................B-8
Principles of measurement ....................................B-5
PRINT key ............................................................. 3-2
Printer .................................................................... 3-5
Printer paper replacement .................................... 4-60
Printer subsystem ............................................... 5-113
Printer Subsystem screen ................................... 5-114
Probe adjustment ....................................... 4-55, 5-99
Probe placement test ............................................ 5-99
Probe position test, sample .................................. 5-97
Problems with aqueous controls .......................... 5-87
Index
Problems with patient specimens ........................ 5-90

Proficiency samples ............................................. 3-29
Program overview ................................................ 3-14
Program Reload screen ...................................... 5-119
Pump .......................................................... 3-10, 3-11
Pump aspiration test ............................................ 5-78
Pump bypass valve ..........................3-10, 3-11, 3-13
Pump bypass valve test ...................................... 5-101
Pump problems .................................................... 5-79
Pump test ............................................................. 5-97
Pump tubing replacement .................................... 4-35
Q
QC key ................................................................... 3-2
QC key (pressed in error) .................................... 3-29
QC lockout mode ................................................. 2-20
QC procedures .......................................................C-3
QC samples, running ........................................... 3-28
Quality Control .............................................C-4, C-5
Quality Control Configuration screen ................. 2-19
Quality Control Menu .......................................... 3-26
Quality control setup ........................................... 2-19
Quality Control Setup screen ..................... 2-19, 2-21
R
Ready for Analysis screen ................................... 3-15
Reagent flow controllers ...................................... 3-10
Reagent harness ............................................. 3-6, 3-7
Reagent harness maintenance .............................. 4-47
Reagent harness replacement .............................. 4-47
Reagent Management Pod installation ................ 4-52
Reagent Management System ............................. 4-50
Reagent Management System overview .............. 3-23
Reagent pack .............................................. C-2, 3-11
Reagent pack replacement ................................... 4-50
Reagent Pack screen ............................................ 3-23
Reagent Pack Status screen ................................. 4-51
Reagent pack tubing positions ............................. 4-52
Reagent preheater .......................................... 3-6, 3-7
Reagents ...................................................... A-2, C-1
Reference and Panic Ranges screen .................... 2-18
Reference electrode ....................................... 3-6, 3-9
Reference electrode flush .................................... 5-82
Reference electrode replacement ......................... 4-33
Reference ranges ................................................. 2-18
Reference solution flow check .......................... 5-102
Reference values ................................................... D-1
Reinstallation procedure .............................. G-1, G-2
Reminder only ..................................................... 2-20
Replacement, fuse ................................................ 4-65

Replacement, harness .......................................... 4-47
Replacement of septum assembly ....................... 4-50
Replacement of septum harness .......................... 4-47
Replacement, printer paper .................................. 4-62
Replacement, reagent pack .................................. 4-50
Replacement, S-line ............................................. 4-53
Replacement, sample probe ................................. 4-53
Replacement, W/R-harness ................................. 4-45
Replacing the BUN membrane cap ..................... 4-23
Replacing the glucose membrane cap ................. 4-21
Replacing the lactate membrane cap ................... 4-22
Replacing the tailpiece ........................................ 4-42
Repositioning, pinch valve tubing ....................... 4-47
Restriction functions .............................................. 2-1
Result suppression effects ................................... 2-14
Results configuration ............................................. 2-9
Results Configuration screen ................................. 2-9
Results reporting .................................................. 2-13
Results Reporting screen ........................... 2-13, 2-16
Resuming normal operation ................................ 2-31
Reversible suppression ........................................ 2-13
RMS ..................................................................... 4-50
RMS pod .............................................................. 4-51
RMS system error ................................................ 3-17
Routine cleaning .................................................... 4-8
Running capillary samples .................................. 3-39
Running expired gas samples (PCO2 and PO2) .. 3-40
Running QC samples ........................................... 3-28
Running samples ................................................. 3-31
S
S-line replacement ............................................... 4-53
Sample ................................................................... 1-4
Sample analysis printouts .................................... 3-38
Sample cup samples ............................................ 3-31
Sample handling .................................................. 5-91
Sample number counter ......................................... 2-8
Sample Number Counter screen ............................ 2-9
Sample preheater ........................................... 3-6, 3-7
Sample preheater flush ........................................ 5-84
Sample Preheater Not Ready ............................... 3-17
Sample probe ......................................................... 3-6
Sample probe flush .............................................. 5-80
Sample probe position test ................................... 5-97
Sample probe positions ........................................ 5-98
Sample probe replacement .................................. 4-53
Sample volume ..................................................... A-2
Sampler assembly .................................................. 3-7
Scheduled maintenance ....................................... 4-10
Sensor status ........................................................ 3-18
I-5
Index
Sensor Status screen ............................................ 3-18

Septum assembly ........................................... 3-5, 3-6
Septum assembly inlet port cleaning ................... 4-12
Septum assembly replacement ............................ 4-50
Septum harness ...................................................... 3-6
Septum harness replacement ............................... 4-47
Sequence error ..................................................... 3-20
Sequence Errors screens ...................................... 3-20
Sequence Errors Status screen ............................... 5-1
Service Menu ....................................................... 5-93
Service Menu screen ............................................ 5-93
Set date .................................................................. 2-7
Set time .................................................................. 2-7
Set Units of Measurement screen ........................ 2-11
Setup ...................................................................... 2-1
Setup Menu ............................................................ 2-1
Setup Menu screen ................................................ 2-2
Shorting jumper test ............................................ 5-95
Shutdown procedure ............................................. G-1
Single parameter control failures ......................... 5-89
Slope limits ........................................................... A-2
SO2 % .......................................................... 3-14, 4-5
SO2 % concentration ............................................ B-10
SO2, definition .....................................................B-10
SO2 maintenance ................................................. 4-33
SO2 Measurement, principle ................................B-10
SO2% interferences ................................................ 1-8
Sodium ................................................ B-5, 1-3, 4-17
Sodium conditioning ........................................... 4-11
Sodium electrode replacement ............................ 4-14
Software, installing new ........................................ 2-1
Solutions ................................................................ C-1
Specification functions .......................................... 2-1
Standard bicarbonate concentration (SBC) .........B-12
STATUS key .......................................................... 3-4
Status screens ....................................................... 3-18
Storage temperature ............................................. 5-87
Subsystem test blood gases + pH ...................... 5-104
Subsystem test communications ........................ 5-115
Subsystem test electrolytes ................................ 5-105
Summary Statistics for Test ................................. 3-26
Supervisor password ............................................ 2-29
Supplies ................................................................. F-1
Suppression, reversible ........................................ 2-13
Syringe sample presentation ................................ 3-32
Syringe samples ................................................... 3-31
System errors ....................................................... 3-21
System Errors screen ................................... 3-21, 5-2
System status ....................................................... 3-22
System Status screen ........................................... 3-22
System test ........................................................... 5-94
System Test 1 screen ............................................ 5-94
I-6
System test functions ........................................... 5-94

System Uncalibrated ............................................ 3-17
T
Tailpiece, replacing .............................................. 4-42
Technician passwords .......................................... 2-28
Temperature .......................................................... A-5
Temperature control, subsystem ........................ 5-110
Temperature correction for measured values .......B-11
Terminating calibrations ........................................ 4-4
Test, air detector .................................................. 5-96
Test panel ............................................................. 2-15
Test Panels screen ................................................ 3-30
TEST SELECT key ............................................... 3-4
Test, shorting jumper ........................................... 5-95
Tests from test panel ............................................ 2-15
Tests performed ..................................................... 1-2
Theory .................................................................... B-1
Time, setting .......................................................... 2-7
Transfer state ......................................................... 6-3
Transmission port configuration .......................... 2-24
Transmission Port Configuration screen ............. 2-25
Troubleshooting ............................................. 5-1, 5-2
Troubleshooting results ....................................... 5-87
Two-point calibration ............... B-5, 3-13, 3-25, 4-4
Two-point calibration sequence ..................... 5-3, 5-4
U
Units Of measurement, set .................................. 2-10
Urea Nitrogen ........................................................ 1-4
V
Vacuum tube samples .......................................... 3-31
Valve positions ................................................... 5-100
Valve test ........................................................... 5-100
Vent hole .............................................................. 4-26
Verifying performance ...........................................C-3
W
W/R harness ........................................................... 3-9
W/R-harness .......................................................... 3-6
W/R-harness replacement .................................... 4-45
Warranty ...................................................... A-6, H-1
Water test ............................................................. 5-77
Weight ................................................................... A-5
Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, K)

WARRANTY REGISTRATION CARD
CUSTOMER COPY
(to be retained by customer)
Unit sold by:
Analyzer Serial No.

Delivery Date
Distributor
Address
City
State
Zip
THIS IS YOUR WARRANTY

TO PROTECT YOURSELF - MAIL IN FACTORY COPY
RETAIN THIS COPY IN YOUR FILES
Cut and detach before mailing
WARRANTY REGISTRATION CARD
Stat Profile Ultra

(F, G, H, I, J, K)
FACTORY COPY
(to be sent to Waltham, Massachusetts)
Analyzer Serial No.

Delivery Date
Operator name
Laboratory
Company or institution
Address
City
Telephone No. (
State
Zip
Distributor purchased from:

Distributor Location: City
State
Installed by:
Date
Zip
(Customer Signature)
NOVA BIOMEDICAL
CUSTOMERS WARRANTY
STAT PROFILE ULTRA (F, G, H, I, J, K) ELECTROLYTE ANALYZER
Subject to the exclusions and upon the conditions specified below, Nova Biomedical
or the authorized Nova Biomedical distributor warrants that he will correct free of
all charges including labor, either by repair, or at his election, by replacement, any
part of an instrument which fails within one (1) year after delivery to the customer
because of defective material or workmanship. This warranty does not include
normal wear from use and excludes: (A) Service or parts required for repair to
damage caused by accident, neglect, breakage, misuse, altering the Nova equipment,
unfavorable environmental conditions, electric current fluctuations, work performed by any party other than an authorized Nova representative, or any force of
nature; (B) Work which, in the sole and exclusive opinion of Nova, is impractical
to perform because of location, alterations in the Nova equipment or connection of
the Nova equipment to any other device; (C) Specification changes; (D) Service
required to parts in the system contacted or otherwise affected by expendables or
reagents not manufactured by Nova which cause shortened life, erratic behavior,
damage or poor analytical performance; (E) Service required because of problems,
which, in the sole and exclusive opinion of Nova, have been caused by any
unauthorized third party; or (F) Instrument refurbishing for cosmetic purposes. All
parts replaced under the original warranty will be warranted only until the end of the original
instrument warranty. All requests for warranty replacement must be received by Nova or their
authorized distributor within thirty (30) days after the component failure. Nova Biomedical
reserves the right to change, alter, modify or improve any of its instruments without
any obligation to make corresponding changes to any instrument previously sold or
shipped. All service will be rendered during Novas principal hours of operation. All
requests for service outside Novas principal hours of operation will be rendered at
the prevailing weekend/holiday rates after receipt of an authorized purchase order.
Contact Nova for specific information.
The following exceptions apply:
1. The Glucose, Lactate, and BUN membranes are warranted as stated on the insert
that is shipped with the membranes, provided they are stored refrigerated and
placed into service prior to the expiration date on the packaging. This warranty
is invalid under the conditions specified after item 7.
2. The sodium, pH, PCO2, PO2, and reference electrodes, and the glucose and
lactate electrode bodies are warranted for six (6) months from the date of
installation, provided they are stored at room temperature and placed into service
prior to the use before date on the packaging. In the event that an electrode does
not meet that use life, then Nova Biomedical will replace that electrode at no
charge under this warranty. This warranty is invalid under the conditions
specified after item 7.
3. Each potassium electrode that is purchased from Nova Biomedical will achieve
three (3) months of use life from the date of installation, provided they are stored
at room temperature and placed into service prior to the expiration date on the
4.
5.
6.
7.
packaging. A majority of the electrodes will achieve that use life without intervention from Nova. In the unlikely event that an electrode you purchase does not meet
that use life, Nova Biomedical will replace that electrode at no charge under this
warranty. This warranty is invalid under the conditions specified after item 7.
The chloride electrode and chloride caps are warranted as stated on the insert that
is shipped with the electrode and the caps. This warranty is invalid under the
conditions specified after item 7.
The ionized calcium electrode is warranted as stated on the insert that is shipped
with the electrode. This warranty is invalid under the conditions specified after
item 7.
Consumable items, including the reagent pack, calibration gases, replaceable
membranes, tubing and tubing harnesses, electrolyte solutions, external standards,
and septum assemblies are warranted to be free of defects at time of installation. The
item must be placed into service prior to the expiration date printed on the
packaging. All defects must be promptly reported to Nova Biomedical in writing.
This warranty is invalid under the conditions specified after item 7.
Freight is paid by the customer.
The above warranties are invalid if:

1. The date printed on the package label has expired.
2. Non-Nova Biomedical reagents or controls are used, as follows:
Nova Biomedical will not be responsible for any warranties on electrodes,
tubing, probes, septa, or other parts if these parts are used in conjunction with and
are adversely affected by reagents, controls, or other material not manufactured
by Nova but which contact or affect such parts. Reagent formulations not
manufactured by Nova Biomedical may contain acids, concentrated salt solutions, and artificial preservatives that have been shown to cause problems such as
shortened electrode and septa life, electrode membrane damage, electrode drift,
erratic analytical results, and inaccurate instrument performance.
THE FOREGOING OBLIGATIONS ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITIES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND ALL WARRANTIES, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OTHERWISE, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
IN FACT BY LAW AND STATE OUR ENTIRE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY
AND BUYERS EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY CLAIM OF DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OR FURNISHING OF GOODS OR PARTS,
THEIR DESIGN, SUITABILITY FOR USE, INSTALLATION OR OPERATION.
NOVA BIOMEDICAL WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, AND OUR LIABILITY
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL EXCEED THE CONTRACT PRICE
FOR THE GOODS FOR WHICH THE LIABILITY IS CLAIMED.
IN ORDER FOR THE WARRANTY TO BE EFFECTIVE, THE WARRANTY
CARD MUST BE SENT TO NOVA BIOMEDICAL, 200 PROSPECT STREET,
WALTHAM, MA 02254-9141, USA.
INSTRUCTIONS
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY IF
MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 47966 WALTHAM, MA
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
Nova Biomedical
NOVA
Biomedical
200 PROSPECT STREET
PO BOX 9141
WALTHAM, MA 02254-9825
1. FILL OUT COMPLETELY.

2. In order for the Warranty to be effective, the warranty cards must be signed
and dated as of the date of delivery and
sent to NOVA BIOMEDICAL,
WALTHAM, MASSACHUSETTS.
3. Retain one card for your files.
1. Intro.

1.3.3 Dilution of Whole Blood Samples for Measurement of Elevated Glucose
The operating range of Stat Profile Ultra for glucose is 15 to 500 mg/dL. Glucose values
between 500 to 700 are displayed with a question mark. Values greater than 700 are not
displayed. An estimated glucose value will be displayed in reverse video on the Glucose
Subsystem Millivolt screen (MENU 5,3, ENTER,ENTER). USE EXTREME CAUTION. View this
value as a guideline for dilution purposes ONLY. For samples exhibiting values at or above 500 mg/
dL, the following is a method for confirming the glucose concentration.
3. Aspirate this diluted sample into the Ultra to measure the glucose concentration.
1.3.4 Dilution of Serum/Plasma Samples for Measurement of Elevated Lactate

The operating range of the Stat Profile Ultra for lactate is 0.3 to 20 mmol/L. Above this level,
results will not be displayed and sample dilution is required. An estimated lactate value will
be displayed in reverse video on the Lactate Subsystem Millivolt screen (MENU, 5,3,
ENTER,ENTER). USE EXTREME CAUTION. View this value as a guideline for dilution purposes ONLY.
For samples exhibiting values at or above 20 mmol/L, use the following method to confirm the
lactate concentration.
3. Aspirate this diluted sample into the Stat Profile to measure the lactate concentration.
1-6
1 Introduction
1. Intro.
1.3.5 Dilution of Serum/Plasma Samples for Measurement of Elevated BUN

The operating range of the Stat Profile Ultra M Analyzer for BUN is 3 to 100 mg/dL. Above
this level, results will not be displayed and sample dilution is required. An estimated BUN
value will be displayed in reverse video on the BUN Subsystem Millivolt screen (MENU, 5,
3, ENTER, ENTER). USE EXTREME CAUTION. View this value as a guideline for dilution purposes
ONLY. For samples exhibiting values at or above 100 mg/dL, use the following method to
confirm the BUN concentration.
3. Aspirate this diluted sample into the Stat Profile Ultra M Analyzer to measure the
BUN concentration. Multiply the observed concentration by 2.0 to establish the
initial concentration.
1.3.6 Acceptable Anticoagulants

Sodium and lithium heparin are the recommended anticoagulants for use with the Ultra
analyzers. EDTA, citrate, oxalate, or sodium fluoride are not recommended for use.
Depending on the amount of heparin used in the collection syringe and whether it is filled to
capacity with blood, heparin concentrations of 20 I.U. per mL to over 100 I.U. per mL may
result. Excess sodium heparin may elevate sodium results. Liquid heparin when present in
excess may cause errors by dilution in pH, PCO2, PO2, iCa, and electrolyte/glucose/lactate/
BUN determinations3.
Our experience suggests that lyophilized lithium heparin giving a final concentration in blood
of not more than 20 I.U. per mL is acceptable in the critical care laboratory. Stat Profile Ultra
Analyzer users should take careful note of these considerations when establishing reference
intervals and interpreting results.
1-7
1. Intro.


formate (10 mmol/L)
lactate (25 mmol/L)
citrate (10 mmol/L)
SO2% Interferences:
Lipid solutions of greater than 50 mg/dL will interfere with the SO2% value.
1.4

1-8

Nova Biomedical - Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, K Reference Manual)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nova Biomedical - Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, K Reference Manual)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Stat Profile Ultra

Stat Profile Ultra

Stat Profile Ultra

Stat Profile Ultra

Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, K) Reference Manual

Nova Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, K) Reference Manual

(617) 893-6998 (in the U.S.A.) or

Trademarks and Patents

Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, K) Reference Manual

Note: U.S. Legislative Requirements Nova Analyzers

Stat Profile Ultra Reference Manual

Cross-Reference Table for NCCLS Guideline

Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, and K)

Chapter 1, Sections 1.3, 1.3.1-1.3.5

Reagents, Standards, and Controls

Calibration procedures and schedule

Chapter 3, Section 3.15

Appendix B, Sections B.4, B.4.1-B.4.2

Frequency, Control Tolerance

Appendix C, Sections C.4, C.5, C.6

Chapter 1, Section 1.3.6

Stat Profile Ultra Customers

Installation ............................................................................................................ 1-1

Setup and Initial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Installing New Software ....................................................................................... 2-1

PN 16794 Rev. B 6/97

Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, K) Reference Manual

CRT Display ......................................................................................................... 3-2

PN 16794 Rev. B 6/97

Quality Control Menu ......................................................................................... 3-26

Performing Maintenance Functions with the Maintenance Menu........................ 4-1

PN 16794 Rev. B 6/97

Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, K) Reference Manual

Error Codes and How to Display Them ............................................................... 5-1

5.3.1.7 Gas Test .................................................................................... 5-101

6.0 Stat Profile Ultra Communications Interface . . . . . . . . 6-1

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 6-1

PN 16794 Rev. B 6/97

Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, K) Reference Manual

Instrument Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Reagents and Solutions ......................................................................................... C-1

Origin of the Potential Measurement.................................................................... B-1

Reagents and Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Instrument Specifications .................................................................................... A-1

Shutdown Procedure ............................................................................................ G-1

4 Amp Time Delay (SB 4A or T4A) at 100 - 120 Volt AC line.

Stat Profile Ultra (F, G, H, I, J, K) Reference Manual

Intended Use, Tests Performed, and Clinical Utility

pH PCO2 PO2 SO2%

Stat Profile Ultra G

pH PCO2 PO2 SO2%

Stat Profile Ultra H

pH PCO2 PO2 SO2%

Stat Profile Ultra I

pH PCO2 PO2 SO2%

Stat Profile Ultra J

pH PCO2 PO2 SO2%

Stat Profile Ultra K

pH PCO2 PO2 SO2%

From the directly measured results, the calculated results are

Acceptable samples are

Whole blood, plasma, or serum collected anaerobically from an arterial, venous, or

Whole blood measurement of blood gases is used in the diagnosis